Reference Guide SAP S/4HANA, on premise edition 1511 Feature Package Stack 01 March 2016 English
How to localize with SAP Best Practices SAP S/4HANA, on premise edition 1511 FPS 01
CUSTOMER
Typographic Conventions Type Style
Description
Example
Words or characters quoted from the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons labels, menu names, menu paths, and menu options. Textual cross-references to other documents.
Example
Emphasized words or expressions.
EXAMPLE
Technical names of system objects. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text, for example, SELECT and INCLUDE.
Example
Output on the screen. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, source text, and names of installation, upgrade and database tools.
Example
Exact user entry. These are words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.
Variable user entry. Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system.
EXAMPLE
Keys on the keyboard, for example, F 2 or E N T E R .
CUSTOMER 2
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Typographic Conventions
Document History Revision
Date
Change
0.1
2016-02-26
Draft ready for review and validation.
1.0
2016-04-01
Released
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Document History
CUSTOMER 3
Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3
Introduction Purpose of this document Scope of this document Out of scope
14 14 14 14
2 2.1 2.2
New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline SAP Best Practices new content architecture S/4 HANA Best Practices Global Template 2.2.1 Multi-countries in one client 2.2.2 Parallel accounting for multi-national company
16 16 18 18 18
3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Overview Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Procure to Pay Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Plan to Product Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Order to Cash Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Core Finance Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Analytics
20 20 21 21 22 22 23
4 4.1 4.2
Localization objects - per Business Priority Configuration sequence and simultaneous configuration Localization objects for basic settings 4.2.1 Enterprise structure (J57) 4.2.1.1 IFRS/ Local GAAP 4.2.1.2 Configuration - On Premise 4.2.1.2.1 Defining Transportation Zones 4.2.1.2.2 Create Company 4.2.1.2.3 Creating Company Code 4.2.1.2.4 Entering Global Parameters for Company Code 4.2.1.2.5 Checking for Duplicate Invoices 4.2.1.2.6 Configuring Price Change in Previous Period/Year 4.2.1.2.7 Assigning Company Code to Controlling Area 4.2.1.2.8 Assign Company Code to Company 4.2.1.2.9 Assigning Company Code to Credit Control Area 4.2.1.2.10 Defining and Assigning Sales Organization 4.2.1.2.11 Defining Distribution Channel 4.2.1.2.12 Assigning Distribution Channel to Sales Organization 4.2.1.2.13 Creating Divisions 4.2.1.2.14 Assigning Division to Sales Organization
CUSTOMER 4
24 24 26 26 27 27 27 28 29 30 31 31 32 33 33 34 35 36 36 37
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents
4.3
4.2.1.2.15 Setting up Sales Area 38 4.2.1.2.16 Defining Common Distribution Channels 38 4.2.1.2.17 Defining Common Divisions 39 4.2.1.2.18 Creating Purchasing Organization 39 4.2.1.2.19 Assigning Purchasing Organization to Company Code 40 4.2.1.2.20 Defining Valuation Area 40 4.2.1.2.21 Creating Plant 41 4.2.1.2.22 Assigning Sales Organization - Distribution Channel - to Plant44 4.2.1.2.23 Assigning Purchasing Organization to Plant 44 4.2.1.2.24 Defining Shipping Points 45 4.2.1.2.25 Assigning Shipping Point to Plant 46 4.2.1.2.26 Shipping Point Determination 46 4.2.1.2.27 Creating Storage Location 47 4.2.1.2.28 Assigning Picking Locations 47 4.2.1.2.29 Creating Sales Office 48 4.2.1.2.30 Assigning Sales Office to Sales Area 49 4.2.1.2.31 Maintaining Sales Group 49 4.2.1.2.32 Assigning Sales Group to Sales Office 50 4.2.1.2.33 Maintaining Transportation Planning Point 50 4.2.2 (Delta) Enterprise Structure (J47) 51 4.2.2.1 Configuration – On Premise 51 4.2.2.1.1 Creation of Organization Structure 51 4.2.2.2 Manual Rework 57 Localization objects for Finance 58 4.3.1 B Bank Account Management - Core [local] (J74) 58 4.3.1.1 Configuration - On Premise 58 4.3.1.1.1 Create Banks, House Banks, Bank Accounts 58 4.3.1.2 Manual Rework 63 4.3.2 Bank Account Management - Delta for Extended Version [local] (BFE) 64 4.3.2.1 Configuration - On Premise 64 4.3.2.1.1 Assign Approval Patterns 65 4.3.2.1.2 Define Responsibilities for Rules Used in Workflow StepsCreate Responsibilities 66 4.3.2.1.3 Manual Rework 68 4.3.3 External Financial Accounting [local] (J16) 69 4.3.3.1 Configuration – Cloud Edition 69 4.3.3.1.1 General Settings (from SAP NetWeaver) 69 4.3.3.1.2 Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) 69 4.3.3.1.3 General Ledger Accounting (New) (from 'Financial Accounting (New)') 87 4.3.3.1.4 Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable 92
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents
CUSTOMER 5
4.3.3.1.5 Bank Accounting 119 4.3.3.1.6 Period End Activities 126 4.3.3.2 Manual Rework 144 4.3.4 External Financial Accounting [local] (J16_OP) 146 4.3.4.1 Configuration – On-Premise Edition 146 4.3.4.1.1 Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable 146 4.3.4.2 Manual Rework 159 4.3.5 SEPA for External Financial Accounting [local] (BFS) 161 4.3.5.1 Configuration - On Premise 161 4.3.5.1.1 Accounts Receivable 161 4.3.6 Cash Daily Operation [local] (J76) 162 4.3.6.1 Configuration – Cloud Edition 162 4.3.6.1.1 Enter GL Account for Bank Account 162 4.3.6.1.2 Activate Individual Source Application 163 4.3.6.1.3 Define Clearing Accts for Receiving Bank for Acct. Transfer 164 4.3.6.1.4 Define Clearing Accts for Paying Bank for Acct. Transfer 165 4.3.6.1.5 Settings for Bank Statement Monitor 166 4.3.6.2 Manual Rework 167 4.3.7 Delta Cash Daily Operation [local] (BF3) 168 4.3.7.1 Configuration – On-Premise Edition 168 4.3.7.1.1 Define Clearing Accts for Paying Bank for Acct. Transfer 168 4.3.8 Financial Master Data (Manufacturing) [local] (BF2) 169 4.3.8.1 Configuration - On Premise 169 4.3.8.1.1 FI Master Data Manufacturing 170 4.3.9 Extended Accounting for Trading/Manufacturing [local] (J67) 176 4.3.9.1 Configuration - On Premise 176 4.3.9.1.1 Cost Centers and Groups 177 4.3.9.1.2 Maintain Required Planning Data 186 4.3.9.1.3 Cost Centers and Groups 190 4.3.9.1.4 Maintaining Required Planning Data 193 4.3.9.1.5 Assessments 196 4.3.9.1.6 Manual Rework 200 4.3.9.1.7 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 202 4.3.10 Activate Material Ledger (J72) 202 4.3.10.1 Configuration - On Premise 202 4.3.10.1.1 Enterprise Structure: Define Valuation Level 203 4.3.10.1.2 Controlling 203 4.3.10.1.3 Materials Management: Maintain Number Ranges for Material Ledger Documents 206 4.3.10.1.4 Run Report SAPRCKM_OBLIGATORY_SETTINGS 206 4.3.10.1.5 Production Startup of Material Ledger 207 4.3.10.2 Manual Rework 207
CUSTOMER 6
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents
4.4
4.3.11 Credit Management [local] (BD8) 208 4.3.11.1 Configuration - On Premise 208 4.3.11.1.1 Maintain Pricing Procedures 208 4.3.11.1.2 Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting 209 4.3.12 Sample Master Data for SAP Credit Management Processing [local] (BN8) 210 4.3.12.1 Configuration - On Premise 210 4.3.12.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 210 4.3.12.1.2 Adding Credit Management Data in BP 213 4.3.13 Asset Accounting [local] (J49) 214 4.3.13.1 Configuration - On Premise 214 4.3.13.1.1 Organizational Structures 214 4.3.13.1.2 Integration with the General Ledger 227 4.3.13.1.3 General Valuation 231 4.3.13.1.4 Depreciation 245 4.3.13.1.5 Transactions 250 4.3.13.1.6 Asset Data Transfer 252 4.3.13.1.7 Preparations for Going Live 256 4.3.13.1.8 Period End Closing 257 Localization objects for Controlling 258 4.4.1 Basic Overhead Cost Controlling [local] (J18) 258 4.4.1.1 Configuration - On Premise 258 4.4.1.1.1 Overhead Controlling 258 4.4.1.1.2 Configuration with Use of CO Master Data 271 4.4.1.2 Manual Rework 276 4.4.1.2.1 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 278 4.4.2 Delta Basic Overhead Cost Controlling [local] (BE2) 279 4.4.2.1 Configuration – On Premise 279 4.4.2.1.1 Internal Orders and Groups 279 4.4.2.1.2 Accrual Calculation 280 4.4.2.1.3 Assessments 282 4.4.2.2 Manual Rework 285 4.4.2.2.1 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 286 4.4.3 Profitability Analysis [local] (J53) 287 4.4.3.1 Configuration - On Premise 287 4.4.3.1.1 Create Actual Assessments CCA to CO-PA 287 4.4.3.1.2 Activate Profitability Analysis 289 4.4.4 Profitability Analysis for Manufacturing/Trading [local] (BEF) 290 4.4.4.1 Configuration - On Premise 290 4.4.4.1.1 Create additional assessment segments for Trading/manufacturing in Actual Assessments CCA to CO-PA 290 4.4.5 Product Cost Planning [local] (BE5) 292
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents
CUSTOMER 7
4.5
4.4.5.1 Configuration – On-Premise 4.4.5.1.1 Costing Sheet 4.4.5.2 Manual Rework 4.4.6 Cost Object Controlling – by Order [local] (BE7) 4.4.6.1 Configuration – On Premise 4.4.6.1.1 Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery 4.4.7 Cost Object Controlling – by Period [local] (BE9) 4.4.7.1 Configuration – On-Premise 4.4.7.1.1 Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery Localization objects for Material Managements 4.5.1 Output Management - MM [local] (J21) 4.5.1.1 Configuration of Output Management MM – Local Data (for Onpremise) 4.5.1.1.1 Output Condition Record: Invoice Verification 4.5.1.2 Manual Rework 4.5.2 Materials Management - Settings [local] (J05) 4.5.2.1 Logistics General 4.5.2.1.1 Maintaining Company Codes for Materials Management 4.5.2.1.2 Define Attributes of Material Types 4.5.2.2 Configuration of Materials Management 4.5.2.2.1 MRP Settings 4.5.2.2.2 Purchasing 4.5.2.2.3 ERP-Pricing 4.5.2.2.4 Tax Condition Records 4.5.2.2.5 Valuation and Account Assignment 4.5.2.2.6 Logistics Invoice Verification 4.5.3 Materials Management - Settings [local] (BR5) 4.5.3.1 Configuration for OP and CE 4.5.3.1.1 Settings for Logistics General 4.5.3.2 Manual Rework 4.5.4 Batch Management (BLH) 4.5.4.1 Configuration - On Premise 4.5.4.1.1 Batch Management General 4.5.4.1.2 Configuration of Batch Management 4.5.5 Serial Number Management (BLN) 4.5.5.1 Configuration - On Premise 4.5.5.1.1 Configuration 4.5.5.2 Manual Rework 4.5.6 Procurement & Consumption of Consigned Inventory (BMT) 4.5.6.1 Configuration - On Premise 4.5.6.1.1 Master Data 4.5.7 Return to Vendor (BMZ)
CUSTOMER 8
292 292 299 300 300 300 303 303 303 305 305 305 306 307 308 308 308 308 309 309 310 315 319 321 322 330 330 330 333 334 334 334 335 345 345 345 345 346 346 346 351
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents
4.6
4.5.7.1 Configuration - On Premise 351 4.5.7.1.1 Returns to Vendor 351 4.5.8 Sample Master Data Business Partners [local] (JA2) 351 4.5.8.1 Configuration - On Premise 351 4.5.8.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 351 4.5.8.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors 357 4.5.8.1.3 Create Domestic Contacts for Business Partners 362 4.5.9 Trading Goods (HAWA) related sample master data [local] (BM7) 365 4.5.9.1 Configuration - On Premise 365 4.5.9.1.1 Creating Material Master – Organization Dependent Views for Trading Materials 365 4.5.10 BP-Customers and -Suppliers, Sample Master Data [local] (BN6) 372 4.5.10.1 Configuration - On Premise 372 4.5.10.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 372 4.5.10.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors 381 4.5.11 Physical Inventory / Inventory Count and Adjustment (BMN) 383 4.5.11.1 Configuration - On Premise 383 4.5.11.1.1 Allow Freezing of Book Inventory Balance in Storage Location 383 4.5.11.1.2 Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences 384 4.5.11.1.3 Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences 385 4.5.12 General materials (MAT) related sample master data sLog/Local (J51) 386 4.5.12.1 Configuration - On Premise 386 4.5.12.1.1 Create Material Master 386 4.5.12.1.2 Create Info Records 389 4.5.12.1.3 Condition Maintenance Purch. Prices 391 4.5.12.1.4 Condition Maintenance Sales Prices 393 4.5.13 Sample Master Data Ariba Integration [local] (J88) 394 4.5.13.1 Configuration - On Premise 394 4.5.13.1.1 Create Domestic Vendors 394 4.5.13.1.2 Create Info Record 396 4.5.13.1.3 Map Company Codes for Log. Invoice 398 4.5.13.1.4 Map Tax Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification 399 4.5.14 BP-Customers and -Suppliers CPD, Sample Master Data [local] (BRC) 399 4.5.14.1 Configuration - On Premise 399 4.5.14.1.1 Create CPD Customers 399 Localization objects for Sales and Distribution 402 4.6.1 Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local] (J94) 403 4.6.1.1 Configuration - On Premise 403 4.6.1.1.1 ERP Tax 403
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents
CUSTOMER 9
4.6.1.1.2 Maintain Tax Condition Records 407 4.6.2 Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local] (BD2) 408 4.6.2.1 Configuration – Cloud Edition 408 4.6.2.1.1 SD Business Partner Configuration 408 4.6.2.1.2 LIS Configuration 409 4.6.3 Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local] (J04) 411 4.6.3.1 Configuration - On Premise 411 4.6.3.1.1 SD Core Configuration and Logistics Execution 412 4.6.3.1.2 Sales Order Processing I 416 4.6.3.1.3 Country Specific Sale from Stock Pricing 418 4.6.3.1.4 Delivery and Transportation Schedule 421 4.6.3.1.5 Routes 422 4.6.4 Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local] (BD5) 427 4.6.4.1 Configuration – Cloud Edition 427 4.6.4.1.1 SD Core Configuration and Logistics Execution 427 4.6.4.1.2 SD Process Configuration I 433 4.6.4.1.3 Master Data 433 4.6.4.2 Manual Rework 434 4.6.5 Sample Master Data Business Partners [local] (JA2) 435 4.6.5.1 Configuration - On Premise 435 4.6.5.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 435 4.6.5.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors 441 4.6.5.1.3 Create Domestic Contacts for Business Partners 445 4.6.6 Free of Charge Delivery [local] (BDC) 450 4.6.6.1 Configuration - On Premise 450 4.6.6.1.1 Creating Condition Records for Output Type 450 4.6.7 Customer Returns [local] (BDF) 451 4.6.7.1 Configuration - On Premise 451 4.6.7.1.1 Creating Condition Records BA00 451 4.6.8 Returnable Packaging (LEIH) related sample master data [local] (BDZ) 452 4.6.8.1 Configuration - On Premise 452 4.6.8.1.1 Create Material Master – Organization Dependency View for Returnable Packaging 452 4.6.8.1.2 Create Pricing Conditions 455 4.6.9 Returnables Processing [local] (BDY) 456 4.6.9.1 Configuration - On Premise 456 4.6.9.1.1 Master Data 456 4.6.10 SEPA Direct Debit Handling in Sales and Distribution (BKW) 457 4.6.10.1 Configuration – On-Premise 457 4.6.10.1.1 Output Control 457 4.6.10.2 Manual Rework 458
CUSTOMER 10
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents
4.7
4.6.11 BP-Customers and -Suppliers, Sample Master Data [local] (BN6) 459 4.6.11.1 Configuration - On Premise 459 4.6.11.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 459 4.6.11.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors 468 4.6.12 BP-Customers and -Suppliers CPD, Sample Master Data [local] (BRC) 470 4.6.12.1 Configuration - On Premise 470 4.6.12.1.1 Create CPD Customers 470 4.6.13 Free Goods Processing [local] (BKC) 474 4.6.13.1 Configuration - On Premise 474 4.6.13.1.1 Activating Free Goods Determination 474 4.6.13.1.2 Master Data 475 4.6.14 Sample Master Data for SEPA Processing [local] (BN9) 476 4.6.14.1 Configuration for OP 476 4.6.14.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 476 4.6.14.1.2 Creating SEPA Mandate Master Data 479 Localization objects for Production Planning 481 4.7.1 Production Planning and Control Settings [local] (BJ1) 481 4.7.1.1 Configuration – On-Premise 481 4.7.1.1.1 Basic Data 481 4.7.1.1.2 Material Requirements Planning (MRP) 490 4.7.1.1.3 Shop Floor Control (SFC) 508 4.7.1.1.4 Repetitive Manufacturing 508 4.7.2 Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Industry [local] (BJ7) 510 4.7.2.1 Configuration - On Premise 510 4.7.2.1.1 Shop Floor Control (SFC) 510 4.7.3 Make-to-Stock Production - Process Industry [local] (BJA) 517 4.7.3.1 Configuration – On-Premise 517 4.7.3.1.1 Define Order Types-Dependent Parameters 517 4.7.3.1.2 Define and Set Up Control Recipe Destinations 519 4.7.3.1.3 Define Checking Controls 520 4.7.3.1.4 Specify Scheduling Parameters 521 4.7.3.1.5 Define Production Scheduling Profiles 522 4.7.3.1.6 Define Production Supervisor 523 4.7.3.1.7 Define Confirmation Parameters 524 4.7.4 Make-to-Order Production w/o Variant Configuration [local] (BJG) 526 4.7.4.1 Configuration - On Premise 526 4.7.4.1.1 Sales and Distribution 526 4.7.4.1.2 Production Planning and Batch Management 527 4.7.5 Repetitive Manufacturing [local] (BJJ) 540 4.7.5.1 Configuration – On Premise 540 4.7.5.1.1 Defining Production Scheduling Profile 540
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents
CUSTOMER 11
4.7.5.1.2 Defining Production Supervisor 541 4.7.6 Production Material Related Sample Master Data [local] (BM2) 541 4.7.6.1 Configuration - On Premise 541 4.7.6.1.1 Create Material Master – Organization Dependent for Production material 541 4.7.7 Rework Production Order - Stock-Manufactured Material [local] (BJP) 570 4.7.7.1 Configuration - On Premise 570 4.7.7.1.1 Shop Floor Control 570 4.7.8 Rework Production Order Sample Master Data [local] (BJY) 576 4.7.8.1 Master Data –OP 576 4.7.9 Production Subcontracting - External Processing [local] (BJM) 580 4.7.9.1 Configuration - On Premise 580 4.7.9.1.1 Master Data 580 4.7.10 Central Production Sample Master Data (for Library - Mfg.) [local] (BJ3) 582 4.7.10.1 Configuration - On Premise 582 4.7.10.1.1 Logistics – General Data 582 4.7.10.1.2 General Data Production 584 4.7.10.1.3 Rework 602 4.7.11 Repetitive Manufacturing Sample Master Data [local] (BR4) 604 4.7.11.1 Master Data – On Premise 604 4.7.11.1.1 Creating Material Master - Work Scheduling View 604 4.7.11.1.2 Changing Material Master – MRP Views 605 4.7.11.1.3 Creating BOMs 607 4.7.11.1.4 Creating Routing 608 4.7.11.1.5 Creating Production Version for Semi - finished Product 610 4.7.12 Make-to-Order Production w/o Variant Configuration Master Data [local] (BJU) 611 4.7.12.1 Configuration - On Premise 611 4.7.12.1.1 Master Data – On Premise 611 4.7.13 MTS Production - Process Industry Sample Master Data [local] (BJR) 622 4.7.13.1 Configuration – On-Premise 622 4.7.13.1.1 Master Data 622 4.7.14 MTS Production - Discrete Industry Sample Master Data [local] (BJL) 638 4.7.14.1 Master Data –OP 638 4.7.14.1.1 Create Material Master - Work Scheduling View 638 4.7.14.1.2 Change Material Master – General Plant Data/Storage 1 639 4.7.14.1.3 Create Routing - Finished- and Semi Finished Product 640 4.7.14.1.4 Create BOMs - Finished- and Semi Finished Products 644
CUSTOMER 12
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents
4.7.14.1.5 4.7.14.1.6
Create Production Version for Finished Product Create Batch Search Strategy for Production Order
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents
646 649
CUSTOMER 13
1 Introduction 1.1 Purpose of this document This document explains how to carry out country localization by leveraging SAP Best Practices Baseline contents (Germany) (http://service.sap.com/s4op) for SAP S/4 HANA onpremise edition 1511 feature package stack 01. Note that the activities recorded in this document represent the status as of March 2016. For the most up-to-date SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition information, please refer to the standard documentation from (http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1511_001 ). Before you decide to add your country localization on top of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents, you should have checked the SAP Note 2244659 for the installation of SAP Best Practices S/4HANA on premise edition (Germany).
1.2 Scope of this document The SAP Best Practices for SAP S/4HANA are tailored specifically to accelerate and simplify the adoption of SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition for faster time to value, by providing pre-configured content for core business processes with role-specific, responsive, and simple user experience. However, as with all new products, it will take time for S/4 HANA to be localized for many other countries. This document intents to enable customers or partners on how to carry out the customizing activities in the transaction SPRO (implementation guide IMG) for the special legislation and business practice. This document provides you with the following information about localizations: 1. New features of SAP Best Practices Baseline solution 2. Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline solution 3. Localization objects per Business Priority
1.3 Out of scope This document is created based on SAP S/4 HANA on-premise edition 1511 feature package stack 01, it might not be applicable for other versions below or higher. It does not describe a generic implementation of SAP S/4 HANA on-premise edition 1511 feature package stack 01. It does not support the system conversion scenario, so it might not be applicable if you are doing the customizing on a converted system. It does not provide best practices for new scope items creation. (For the definition of scope items, you can find more information at SAP Best Practices new content architecture )
CUSTOMER 14
Introduction
It does not provide specific globalization for countries. You can refer to the Simplification List from (http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1511_001), sap note 2244803 Fiscal and Accounting Legal Reporting for SAP S/4H, sap note 2029012, sap note 2227963, and further relevant notes on country specific restrictions.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Introduction
CUSTOMER 15
2 New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline With SAP S/4HANA (SAP Business Suite 4 SAP HANA), on-premise edition, SAP is providing a new product and a next generation of business applications – simple enterprise software for big data and designed to help you run simple in the digital economy. In order to accelerate and simplify the path to SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition for faster time to value, SAP developed a renewed SAP Best Practices Baseline solution. With this solution, customers can quickly and affordably implement functionalities to enable pre-defined business. Customers can set up a best-practice client without configuration content from client 000. A best-practice client facilitates automatic content activation. The additional customizing activities are carried out in the transaction SPRO. You can find how to use best-practice implementation contents at (http://service.sap.com/~sapidp/012002523100012419282015E/ ). You can find the pre-defined business processes at Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents.
2.1 SAP Best Practices new content architecture SAP Best Practices methodology brings together: Business view (Content Modeling) and Implementation view (consistent content implementation). A solution consists of a specific number of scope items (business view) and a scope item contains a certain number of building blocks (implementation view). The picture below indicates the content structure, 1. Scope item is the pre-defined business process, which contains a certain number of building blocks; 2. Building Block is a set of customizing and master data steps for the respective piece of business content; 3. Activity is the smallest logical unit in the SAP Best Practices architecture, which includes a specific customizing and master data steps.
CUSTOMER 16
New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline
In order to support the Global Template concept S/4 HANA Best Practices Global Template, the following two building block types are used: 1. Central Building Blocks are required to be activated only once. These building blocks contain all the central settings as well as some country specific local content that have no dependence on the localized organizational units 2. Country Specific Building Blocks are required to be activated for the specific country selected. These building blocks contain only the local content that have dependence on the localized organizational units. How to localize with SAP Best Practices New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline
CUSTOMER 17
2.2 S/4 HANA Best Practices Global Template SAP Best Practices Baseline solution provides a Global Template to easily handle the multi-national company's headquarter and subsidiary business requirements. It defines business processes and related master data, which can be used as a basis across countries and industries o Flexibility: To add industry and/or country specific extensions o Extensibility: easy to enhance for partners, countries and industries that SAP does not cover o Simplification of master data management o Include integration scenarios o Simplify testing o Optimize business processes to utilize latest technology o Possible one global layer for all delivery options
2.2.1 Multi-countries in one client With SAP S/4 HANA, the ERP scope for multiple countries is implemented in one client for the first time. If a company has several legal entities (several company codes) in one or several countries its solution will run in only one client. This functionality is available for the complete enterprise structure of the company. This results in the following key features: 1. Country based preconfigured content is activated in one client 2. Country specific settings are available in one client for all countries 3. Period end closing processes on local level fully supported 4. It allows country related regulatory reporting and overall processes on company level (For example, controlling)
2.2.2
Parallel accounting for multi-national company
With SAP S/4 HANA, customers can use parallel ledger to o manage General Ledger Accounting in accordance with several accounting principles simultaneously, for example with a local accounting principle and the accounting principle of a corporate group; o manage Asset Accounting in accordance with several accounting principles simultaneously, for example with a local accounting principle and the accounting principle of a corporate group. This happens analog to General Ledger Accounting. Separate documents are posted for each accounting principle.
CUSTOMER 18
New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline
Parallel ledger in Global Template was designed to address the multi-national company reporting requirements. These companies need to report in most cases under IFRS, but still have specific local reporting requirements, according with local GAAP. International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) are used by 135 countries, therefore SAP Best Practices Baseline solution delivers a preconfigured content with two ledgers: -
Leading Ledger for IFRS (0L)
-
Local Ledger for local GAAP (2L).
Localized content is maintained in order to cover local requirements. Related to local ledger, common Global Template covers pre configuration for Local GAAP. All the company codes use the Operational Chart of Accounts (YCOA). This YCOA is mapped to the Alternative Chart of Accounts (YIKR) if it is needed for local reporting purposes (for example, Germany). Different accounting principles, valuation methods and depreciation areas were designed to cover all reporting requirements (Local and IFRS). To accommodate the Global Template, the following configuration was added: o Balance sheet and P/L statement by function based on CoA YCOA o Balance sheet and P/L statement by nature based on CoA YIKR (for Germany) o New set of financial statement versions designed for IFRS Other impact of parallel ledger design concept is related to Inventory valuation. At this time, only inventory valuation based on first in – first out method (FIFO) is taken into consideration. The picture below indicates the structure configured in the Baseline solution package.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline
CUSTOMER 19
3 Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents Before you start to localize the contents through customizing activities, it is strongly recommended that you get familiar with the pre-defined solution scope. This section provides an overview of the pre-defined business processes within the Global Template. You can find the business process overview and related documents by downloading the solution package at http://service.sap.com/s4op.
3.1 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Overview
CUSTOMER 20
Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents
3.2 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Procure to Pay SAP Best Practices for Streamlined Procure to Pay: While companies often focus on revenue, procurement savings can increase profits about five times more. The key to
maximizing procurement's success in this critical role is to deliver consistent quality, savings, and compliance over time.
3.3 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Plan to Product SAP Best Practices for Accelerated Plan to Product: Manage your entire manufacturing process – from planning and scheduling to monitoring and analysis – while improving efficiency across your value chain. We provide business scenarios that are crucial for
companies in the process, discrete, and repetitive manufacturing industries. How to localize with SAP Best Practices Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents
CUSTOMER 21
3.4 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Order to Cash SAP Best Practices for Optimized Order to Cash: Technology has changed the dynamics of customer relationships. People today are more informed and empowered than ever
before. Companies today need to adapt to this new reality to engage customers and succeed.
3.5 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Core Finance SAP Best Practices for Core Finance: Achieve excellence in financial management & accounting: In the face of sustained market volatility, increasing regulatory compliance, growing pressure on margins, and managers demanding instantaneous financial insight
CUSTOMER 22
Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents
at any time, from anywhere, finance organizations must have best practices in place to excel.
3.6 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Analytics SAP Best Practices for Analytics: Increase your organization's IQ with business intelligence Empower your people with easy access to the business intelligence (BI) and data exploration tools they need to make faster, more informed decisions. Boost your
organization's collective IQ by providing information that can help business users drive smarter processes, improve performance, and become more effective in everything they do.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents
CUSTOMER 23
4 Localization objects - per Business Priority This section gives a detailed step by step instructions on how the SAP Best Practices team localized the Netherlands. The Netherlands serves as an example to enable you to localize a different country. The order in which the instructions are followed is significant. After completing the customizing activities in the order given in this document, you can test the business process by referring to the test script provided by the solution package from http://service.sap.com/s4op.
4.1 Configuration sequence and simultaneous configuration The following configuration objects are the first building blocks that must be configured in the exact sequence listed in the table below. We start with the Germany solution as a foundation and the sequence is derived from that solution. Therefore you will encounter references to Germany (DE) in the following table. #
BBID
Title
Module
1
J57 (DE)
Enterprise Structure [local]
All
2
J47(DE)
(Delta) Enterprise Structure [local]
All
3
J74 (DE)
Bank Account Management - Core [local]
FI
4
J16 (DE)
External Financial Accounting [local]
FI
5
J16 (DE)_OP External Financial Accounting [local]
FI
6
J18 (DE)
Basic Overhead Cost Controlling
CO
7
BE2 (DE)
Delta Basic Overhead Cost Controlling
CO
8
J53 (DE)
Profitability Analysis [local]
CO
9
J05 (DE)
Materials Management
MM
10 BR5 (DE)
Materials Management - Settings [local]
MM
11 J94 (DE)
Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local]
SD
12 BD2 (DE)
Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local]
SD
13 J04 (DE)
Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local]
SD
14 BD5 (DE)
Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local]
SD
15 BF2 (DE)
Financial Master Data (Manufacturing) [local]
FI
16 J67 (DE)
Extended Accounting for Trading/Manufacturing [local]
FI
CUSTOMER 24
Localization objects - per Business Priority
17 BEF (DE)
Profitability Analysis for Manufacturing/Trading [local]
CO
18 J72 (DE)
Activate Material Ledger [local]
FI
19 JA2 (DE)
Sample Master Data Business Partners [local]
SD/MM
20 BM7 (DE)
Trading Goods (HAWA) related sample master data [local] MM
The other building blocks should not be dependent on one another therefore they can be configured simultaneously. In this document the localization objects/ building blocks are grouped by functional area and are in the correct configuration sequence. In the Excel File below you can find the Prerequisites Matrix for configuration.
Prerequisites_Matri x_BP_OP_ENTPR_S4HANAX_DEV2_EN_DE (3).xlsx
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 25
4.2 Localization objects for basic settings 4.2.1 Enterprise structure (J57) In the Baseline solution, a pre-defined enterprise structure is set as below. You are expected to create a local enterprise structure according to the instructions provided below.
CUSTOMER 26
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.2.1.1
IFRS/ Local GAAP
If your country does not apply IFRS, you need to add a local GAAP for local accounting principle. You can refer to the following table for IFRS/Local GAAP designing differences: Item
IFRS
Local GAAP
Ledger
0L
2L
Accounting principle
IFRS
LG
Valuation Area
IF
NL
Valuation method
IFRS
BILM (for NL)
Fixed assets classes
Standard fixed assets classes
Standard fixed assets classes + Special classes according with local requirements
32 - for local currency (posts in real time)
01 - for local currency (post APC immediate and depreciation to 2L)
33 - for group currency (does not post)
31 - for group currency (does not post)
Depreciatio n Area
4.2.1.2
15 - Tax depreciation area. Tax depreciation area does not post.
Configuration - On Premise
4.2.1.2.1 Defining Transportation Zones UseC This activity defines transportation zones according to country, and depending on your company's needs. Transportation zones represent delivery recipient (ship-to party) regions, or delivery shipper (vendor) regions. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 27
IMG Menu
Alternative IMG paths: Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Routes Route Determination Define Transportation Zones OR Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Routes Route Determination Define Transportation Zones OR Logistics Execution Transportation Basic Transportation Functions Routes Route Determination Define Transportation Zones
Transaction Code
OVR1
2.
On the Change View “Customers: Transportation Zones”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
Ctry
TranspZone
Description
NL
3700010000
Region North Holland
NL
3700020000
Region South Holland
NL
3700030000
Region Friesland Gro
NL
3700040000
Region Overijsel Dre
NL
3700050000
Region Gelderland
NL
3700060000
Region Utrecht
NL
3700070000
Region Zeeland
NL
3700080000
Region North Brabant
NL
3700090000
Region Flevoland
NL
3700100000
Region Limburg
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.2 Create Company Use In this activity, you create your company.
CUSTOMER 28
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG path
Enterprise Structure Definition Financial Accounting Define Company
Transaction code
SPRO
On the Change View Internal trading partners: Overview screen, choose New Entries to enter: Company
3710
Company name
Company 3710
Country
NL
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.3 Creating Company Code Use This activity creates your company code. The company code is an organizational unit used in accounting. It is used to structure the business organization from a financial accounting perspective. If you would like to create several company codes, we recommend that you create them as a copy of an existing company code. This action has the advantage that you also copy the existing company code-specific parameters. If necessary, you can change certain data in the relevant application. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Financial Accounting Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code
Transaction Code
OX02
2.
On the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Edit Company Code Data.
3.
On the Change View “Company Code”: Overview screen, choose New Entries to enter the following data.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 29
Company Code
Company Name
City
Country Currency Language
3710
Company Code 3710
'sHertogenbosch
NL
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Maintain the address data for your Company Code.
EUR
NL
4.2.1.2.4 Entering Global Parameters for Company Code Use In this activity, you can make various global specifications for the company code. In addition, you can look at the most important specifications of the company code at any time in the overview. This action includes, among other things, the chart of accounts, and the fiscal year variant.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting Financial Accounting Global Settings Global Parameters for Company Code Enter Global Parameters
Transaction Code
OBY6
2.
On the Change View “Company Code Global Data”: Overview screen, switch the screen to change mode, if necessary.
3.
Select the line with Company Code 3710 and choose Details.
4.
On the Change View “Company Code Global Data”: Details screen, enter the following data: Accounting organization Chart of accts
YCOA
Company Credit control area
A000
Fiscal Year Variant
K4
VAT Registration Number
NL123456789B01
Processing parameters Field status variant
0010
CUSTOMER 30
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Max. Exchange rate deviation
10
Workflow variant Negative postings permitted 5.
X
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.5 Checking for Duplicate Invoices Use This step specifies for each company code that the system is to check for duplicate invoices when invoices are entered. This check prevents incoming invoices being accidentally entered, and paid more than once. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification Incoming Invoice Set Check for Duplicate Invoices
Transaction Code
SM30 (Customizing Object V_169P_DC)
2.
On the Change View “Duplicate Invoice Check”: Overview screen, switch the screen to change mode, if necessary.
3.
Select the line with CoCd (Company Code) 3710 and choose Details.
4.
On the Change View “Company Code Global Data”: Details screen, enter the following data:
5.
CoCd Name
Check co. code
Check reference
Check inv. date
3710 Company Code 3710
X
X
X
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.6 Configuring Price Change in Previous Period/Year Use In this IMG activity, you configure price changes in the previous period or year.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 31
Under inflation accounting in Materials Management (MM), the system can post the replacement cost resulting from replacement cost valuation (Market Price Determination or Inflation Index Adjustment) as a price change in Financial Accounting (FI). If you want a price change that was posted in the previous period to be carried forward to the current period, you make the system settings in this IMG activity Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Valuation and Account Assignment Balance Sheet Valuation Procedures Set Up Replacement Cost Valuation (Inflation) Price Changes Configure Price Change in Previous Period/Previous Year
Transaction Code
OMRN
2.
On the Change View “Price Change in Previous Period, not in Current Period”: Overview screen, switch the screen to Change mode, if necessary.
3.
Select the line with CoCd (Company Code) 3710.
4.
Enter the following data: CoCd Price carr. Over 3710 Deselected
5.
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.7 Assigning Company Code to Controlling Area Use This step assigns the company codes for which you want to carry out common cost controlling to a controlling area. You may carry out cross-company code cost accounting only by explicitly assigning the company codes to a controlling area.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Controlling Assign company code to controlling area
CUSTOMER 32
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction Code
OX19
2.
On the Change View “Basic data”: Overview screen, select the line with COAr (controlling area) set to A000.
3.
Double click the Assignment of company codes folder.
4.
Enter the following data:
5.
CoCd
Company name
3710
Company Code 3710
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.8 Assign Company Code to Company Use In this step, you assign company codes to a company. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG path
Enterprise Structure Assignment Financial Accounting Assign company code to company
Transaction code
SPRO
On the Change View “Assign company code -> company”: Overview screen, enter the following data: CoCd
City
Company
3710
s-Hertogenbosch
3710
Save your entries
4.2.1.2.9 Assigning Company Code to Credit Control Area Use This step assigns company codes to a credit control area.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 33
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Financial Accounting Assign company code to credit control area
Transaction Code
OB38
2.
On the Change View “Assign company code -> credit control area”: Overview screen, find the lines with CoCd (Company Code) set to BP01.
3.
Enter the following data:
4.
CoCd Company Name
City
CCAr
Overwrite CC area
3710
's-Hertogenbosch
A000
X
Company Code 3710
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.10 Defining and Assigning Sales Organization Defining Sales Organization Use This step defines the sales organizations in your company. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Sales and Distribution Define, copy, delete, check sales organization
Transaction Code
OVX5
2.
On the Change View “Sales organizations”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following data: Field
Value entered
Sales Organization
3710
(Description)
Dom. Sales Org NL
Statistics currency
EUR
CUSTOMER 34
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Save your entries.
Assigning Sales Organization to Company Code Use This step assigns a sales organization to your company code. You can use this step to define the allocation of sales organizations to company codes. This action establishes a link between the SD and FI systems. A sales organization belongs to just one company code. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales organization to company code
Transaction Code
OVX3
2.
On the Sales Organizations -> Company Code: Overview screen, select Sales Organization 3710 and assign both to Company Code 3710.
3.
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.11 Defining Distribution Channel Use This step defines the distribution channels in your company, adapting the functional scope of a distribution channel to your organization. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Sales and Distribution Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel.
Transaction Code
OVXI
In the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Define distribution channel.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 35
3.
On the Change View “Distribution Channels”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
Enter the following data.
5.
Distr. Channel
Name
10
Direct Sales
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.12 Assigning Distribution Channel to Sales Organization Use This step allocates the distribution channels to a sales organization. In this case, you can assign as many distribution channels as desired to a sales organization. In addition, a distribution channel can be valid for several sales organizations. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign distribution channel to sales organization
Transaction Code
OVXK
On the Sales Organization Distribution Channels: Overview screen, choose New Entries, and maintain the following assignments: SOrg
Name
DChl
Name
3710
Dom. Sales Org (NL)
10
Direct Sales
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.13 Creating Divisions Use This step defines the divisions at your company. You use divisions to group together materials, products, or services. The system uses the division to determine the sales areas and business areas to which a material, product, or service is assigned.
CUSTOMER 36
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics - General Material Master Settings for Key Fields Define Divisions
Transaction Code
OMSP
2.
On the Change View “Divisions”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following data:
4.
Division
Name
00
Product Division 00
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.14 Assigning Division to Sales Organization Use This step allocates as many divisions as desired to a sales organization. Any one division can belong to several sales organizations. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign division to sales organization
Transaction Code
OVXA
On the Assignment Sales Organization - Division: Overview screen, choose New Entries, and create the following entries: SOrg.
Name
Dv
Name
3710
Dom. Sales Org NL
00
Product Division 00
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 37
4.2.1.2.15 Setting up Sales Area Use This step sets up the sales areas. You can create a sales area for any combination of sales organization, distribution channel, and division.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Set up sales area
Transaction Code
OVXG
2.
On the Assignment Sales Org. – Distribution Channel – Division screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
SOrg.
Name
DChl
Name
Dv
Name
3710
Dom. Sales Org NL
10
Direct Sales
00
Product Division 00
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.16 Defining Common Distribution Channels Use This menu option defines common distribution channels. You use this menu item to define distribution channels, which have common master data. The allocation is valid within a sales organization. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Master Data Define Common Distribution Channels
Transaction Code
VOR1
On the Change View “Dist. Channel per Sales Org. - Assign Master Data”: Overview screen, make the following entries. CUSTOMER
38
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
SOrg. DChi Name
DChConds
Name
DChCust/Mt
Name
3710 10
10
Direct Sales
10
Direct Sales
Direct Sales
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.17 Defining Common Divisions Use This step defines the divisions that common master data should apply to. The definition is valid within each sales organization. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Master Data Define Common Divisions
Transaction Code
VOR2
On the Change View “Org. Unit: Divisions per Sales Org – Assign Master Data”: Overview screen, make the following entries: SOrg. Dv Name
DivCon Name
DivCus Name
3710 00 Product Division 00
00
00
Product Division 00
Product Division 00
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.18 Creating Purchasing Organization Use This step creates a purchasing organization in your company. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 39
IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Materials Management Maintain purchasing organization
Transaction Code
OX08
2.
On the Change View “Purchasing Organizations”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following data:
4.
Purch. Organization
Purch. org. descr.
3710
Purch. Org.3710
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.19 Assigning Purchasing Organization to Company Code Use This step assigns purchasing organizations to company codes. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Materials Management Assign purchasing organization to company code
Transaction Code
OX01
2.
On the Purchasing Organizations -> Company Code: Overview screen, select Company Code 3710, and assign it to Purchasing organization 3710.
3.
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.20Defining Valuation Area Use This step defines a valuation area in your company. A plant can only belong to one company code.
CUSTOMER 40
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Logistics - General Define valuation level
Transaction Code
OX14
2.
On the Valuation Level screen, select the Valuation area is a plant radio button.
3.
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.21 Creating Plant Defining Plant Use This step assigns each plant to a company code. A plant can only belong to one company code.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Logistics - General Define, copy, delete, check plant
Transaction Code
OX10
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Define Plant.
3.
On the Change View “Plants”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
Make the following entries. Plnt
Name 1
3710
Plant 1
5.
Enter address data for each plant.
6.
Enter the Factory Calendar NL.
7.
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 41
Defining Plant Parameters Use This step makes and defines general plant settings.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical inventory Plant Parameters
Transaction Code
SM30 with Customizing Object V_159L
2.
On the Change View “General plant settings in inventory Management”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Select Plant 3710, and make the following entries: Field
Entry
Del. Compl. Default
X
BBD/Prod Date
X
BOM Usage
1
BOM Application
BEST
Trans./Event Type
WV
Stock type
1
Alternative unit
X
Batch in background
X
Movement allowed
X
Days mvt. Allowed
10
Retention period
30
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
6.
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 42
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Assigning Plant to Company Code Use This step assigns each plant to a company code. A plant can only belong to one company code.
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Logistics - General Assign Plant to Company Code
Transaction Code
OX18
On the Allocation of Plants -> Company Code: Overview screen, make the following assignments. CoCD
Plnt
Company Code 3710
3710 Plant 1NL
Save your entries.
Assigning Standard Purchasing Organization to Plant Use This step assigns a standard purchasing organization to a plant. If several purchasing organizations procure for a certain plant, you can define one of them as the standard purchasing organization for the transactions. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Materials Management Assign Standard Purchasing Organization to Plant
Transaction Code
OMKI
On the Change View “Default Purchasing Organization”: Overview screen, set 3710 as the Standard Purchasing Organization, as follows.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 43
3.
Plnt
POrg
Name 1
3710
3710
Plant 1
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.22 Assigning Sales Organization - Distribution Channel - to Plant Use This step, assigns any number of plants to a combination of sales organization, and distribution channel. A plant can be assigned more than once. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales organization – distribution channel – plant
Transaction Code
OVX6
On the Plants -> Sales Organization/Distribution Channel”: Overview screen, make the following assignments. Sales organization/distribution channel
Assign to Plants
3710 / 10 Dom. Sales Org NL (NL) / Direct Sales
3710 Plant 1 NL(NL)
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.23 Assigning Purchasing Organization to Plant Use This step assigns purchasing organizations to the plants for which they are responsible. You have the following options: One purchasing organization procures for one plant. This action is plant-specific purchasing. One purchasing organization procures for several plants. Several purchasing organizations procure for one plant.
CUSTOMER 44
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Materials Management Assign purchasing organization to plant
Transaction Code
0X17
On the Change view "Assign Purchasing Organization to Plant ": Overview screen make following assignments. POrg
Description
Plnt
Name 1
3710
Purch. Org 3710
3710
Plant 1(NL)
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.24Defining Shipping Points Use This step defines the shipping points, and adapts them to your organization. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Logistics Execution Define, copy, delete, check shipping point
Transaction Code
OVXD
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Define Point.
3.
On the Change View “Shipping Points”: Overview screen, choose New Entries, and make the following entries.
4.
Shipping Point
Description
Departure/Transportation Zone
Factory Calendar
3710
Shipping Point 3710
3700080000
NL
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 45
4.2.1.2.25 Assigning Shipping Point to Plant Use This step allocates as many shipping points as desired to the plants. Any one shipping point can belong to several plants.
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Logistics Execution Assign shipping point to plant
Transaction Code
OVXC
On the Shipping Points -> Plants: Overview screen, make the following assignments. Plants
Assign to Shipping Points
3710 Plant 1 (NL)
Shipping Point 3710
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.26Shipping Point Determination Use This step allocates the shipping points to the desired combinations of shipping condition, and loading group for each plant. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination Assign Shipping Points
Transaction Code
OVL2
On the Change View “Shipping Point Determination”: Overview screen, make the following assignments. CUSTOMER
46
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
SC
LGrp
Plnt
PrShP
01
0001
3710
3710
02
0001
3710
3710
03
0001
3710
3710
04
0001
3710
3710
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.27 Creating Storage Location Use This step creates a storage location (the place where stock is physically kept within a plant).
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Materials Management Maintain Storage Location
Transaction Code
OX09
2.
On the Determine Work Area: Entry screen, in the Plant field, enter 3710, and choose Enter.
3.
On the Change View “Storage Locations”: Overview screen, enter the following:
4.
Plant
SLoc
Description
3710
371A
Std. storage 1
371B
Std. storage 2
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.28 Assigning Picking Locations Use This step assigns the picking locations to the combinations of shipping point and storage condition for every plant.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 47
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics Execution Shipping Picking Determine Picking Location Assign Picking Location
Transaction Code
OVL3
On the Change View “Picking Location Determination”: Overview screen, enter the following: ShPt
Plnt
SC
SLoc
3710
3710
371A
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.29Creating Sales Office Use This step defines the sales offices in your company. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Sales and Distribution Maintain sales office
Transaction Code
OVX1
On the Change View “Sales offices”: Overview screen, enter the following data: Sales Office
Description
370
Sales Office 370
3.
Maintain the Address Data for each Sales Office.
4.
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 48
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.2.1.2.30
Assigning Sales Office to Sales Area
Use This step allocates as many sales offices as desired to the sales areas. Any one sales office can belong to several sales areas at the same time. The sales areas previously defined are automatically proposed as defaults for allocation.
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales office to sales area
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Sales Offices -> Sales Area: Overview screen, make the following assignments: SOrg. Name
DChl Name
Dv Name
SOff.
3710 Dom. Sales
10
00 Product Division 00
3710 Sales Office 100
Direct Sales
Name
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.31 Maintaining Sales Group Use This step defines sales groups in your company. The definition of sales groups is optional. You can use the SD system without creating sales groups. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Sales and Distribution Maintain sales group
Transaction Code
OVX4
On the Change View “Sales Groups”: Overview screen, enter the following data:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 49
3.
Sales group
Description
370
Sales Group 370
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.32 Assigning Sales Group to Sales Office Use This step assigns as many sales groups as desired to the sales offices. Any one sales group can belong to several sales offices. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Sales and Distribution Assign sales group to sales office
Transaction Code
OVXJ
On the Sales Groups -> Sales Office: Overview screen, make the following assignments. SOff.
Description
SGrp
Description
370
Sales Office 370
370
Sales Group 370
Save your entries.
4.2.1.2.33 Maintaining Transportation Planning Point Use This step defines a transportation planning point. The transportation planning point is responsible for planning shipments with particular features. A shipment is assigned to one transportation planning point. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Logistics Execution Maintain Transportation Planning Point
CUSTOMER 50
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction Code 2.
3.
SM30
On the Change View “Sales Groups”: Overview screen, enter the following data: TPPt
Description
CoCd
3710
Transp. 3710
3710
Save your entries.
4.2.2
(Delta) Enterprise Structure (J47)
4.2.2.1
Configuration – On Premise
4.2.2.1.1 Creation of Organization Structure Define Shipping Point and Maintain Shipping Point Address Data Use In this activity, you define the shipping point 371R. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Logistics Execution Define, copy, delete, check shipping point
Transaction Code
SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVST)
2.
On the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Define Shipping Point.
3.
On the Change View "Shipping Points": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
Make the following entries: Field
Value
Shipping Point
371R
Description (EN)
Shipping Point 371R
Description (DE)
Versandstelle 371R
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 51
Location Country
NL
Departure zone
#0000000001
Times Factory calendar
01
Determine Times Rounding Work Days
0
Print Picking List Output Type
EK00
Message language
EN
Number of messages
1
Send Time
3
Transmission Medium
#1
5.
Choose the Address button.
6.
Make the following entries: Field
User Action or Values
House Number
16
Street
Waterlooplein
Post Code
1011
City
Amsterdam
Country
NL
Region Time Zone 7.
CET
Save your entries.
Result You defined the shipping point.
CUSTOMER 52
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Assign Shipping Point to Plant Use In this activity, you assign the shipping point to the plant.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Assignment Logistics Execution Assign Shipping Point to Plant
Transaction Code
OVXC
2.
On the Change View "Shipping Points Plants": Overview screen, select the entry 3710 Plant 1 and choose the Assign button.
3.
On the Shipping Points -> Plants screen, in the Shipping Point dialog box, select the entry 371R and choose Enter.
4.
Save your entries.
Result You assigned the shipping point to the plant.
Define Loading Groups Use In this activity, you define the loading groups.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination Define Loading Groups
Transaction Code
SM30 (Customizing Object V_TLGR)
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 53
2.
On the Change View "Routes: Loading Groups": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
Loading Group
Description
0002
Forklift
0003
Manual
Save your entries.
Result You defined the loading groups.
Assign Shipping Points Use In this activity, you assign shipping points to shipping conditions, loading groups, and plants.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination Assign Shipping Point
Transaction Code
SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVSTZ)
2.
On the Change View "Shipping Point Determination": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries: Shipping Condition
Loading Group
Plant
Proposed Shipping Point
01
0001
3710
3710
01
0002
3710
3710
01
0003
3710
3710
02
0001
3710
3710
CUSTOMER 54
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Shipping Condition
Loading Group
Plant
Proposed Shipping Point
02
0002
3710
3710
02
0003
3710
3710
03
0001
3710
3710
03
0002
3710
3710
03
0003
3710
3710
04
0001
3710
3710
04
0002
3710
3710
04
0003
3710
3710
RE
0001
3710
371R
RE
0002
3710
371R
RE
0003
3710
371R
Save your entries.
Result You assigned the shipping points.
Maintain Storage Location Use In this activity, you maintain storage locations. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Enterprise Structure Definition Materials Management Maintain Storage Location
Transaction Code
OX09
2.
On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in the Plant field, enter 3710 and choose Continue.
3.
On the Change View “Storage Locations”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
Make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 55
5.
Storage Location
Description
371C
Returns
371R
Shipping (LWM)
Save your entries.
Result You maintained the storage locations.
Assign Picking Locations Use In this activity, you assign picking locations.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics Execution Shipping Picking Determine Picking Location Assign Picking Locations
Transaction Code
SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVKOL)
2.
On the Change View "Picking Location Determination": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
ShPt
Plnt
Storage Conditions
SLoc
3710
3710
3710
3710
10
371B
3710
3710
20
371B
371R
3710
371R
3710
10
371R
371R
3710
20
371R
371B
371R
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 56
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Result Picking locations are assigned.
4.2.2.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure, the following additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Maintain Address for Shipping Points
Yes
Yes
Remarks
If a manual transport is possible, proceed as follows: 1.
Log on to the source system / client.
2.
Go to the customizing activity as described in the respective section.
3.
Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. This can usually be done by choosing Table View Transport. If this is not possible, refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the affected customizing activity.
4.
The new transport request must be released and imported in the target system or client. Also check the documentation for the related IMG activity for specific information.
If manual action in the target system or client is required, proceed as follows: 1.
Log on to the target system or client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity, and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 57
4.3 Localization objects for Finance 4.3.1 B Bank Account Management - Core [local] (J74) 4.3.1.1
Configuration - On Premise
The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1.
Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings.
2.
Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by .
3.
Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.
4.3.1.1.1 Create Banks, House Banks, Bank Accounts Create Bank Master Data Use If you want to run the automatic payment run program, or if you want to post a bank statement automatically you must set up bank master data in your system. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu
SAP Menu Accounting Financial Accounting Banks Master Data Bank Master Record Create
Transaction code
FI01
On the Create Bank: Initial Screen, make the following entries: CUSTOMER
58
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
3.
Description
User action and values
Bank Country
NL
Bank Key
ABN
Note
On the Create Bank: Detail Screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
Bank Name
User action and values
Note
Bank 1
Region Street City
Amsterdam
Swift Code
ABNANL2A
Bank Group 4.
Save your entries.
5.
Repeat this activity to create other bank keys listed in following Excel sheet: Bank Keys
Define House Banks - House Banks Use In the SAP system, each house bank of a company code is represented by a bank ID, and every account at a house bank is represented by an account ID. In the SAP system, you use the bank ID, and the account ID to specify bank details. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
N/A
Transaction code
FI12_HBANK
2.
On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in the Company Code field, enter 3710, and choose Enter.
3.
On the Change View "House Banks": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 59
Field name
Description
User action and values
House Bank
BANK1
Bank Country
NL
Bank Key
ABN
Customer number
1110001
Company number
3710
Create Central Bank Report
Select
Area number
11
Forward pay. Data
Select
Note
5.
Choose Back.
6.
On the Change View "House Banks": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
7.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name
8.
Description
User action and values
House Bank
BANK2
Bank Country
NL
Bank Key
ING
Customer number
2220002
Company number
3710
Note
Save your entries.
Create Bank Accounts in Cash Management Use For each house bank several bank accounts must be maintained. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Supply Chain Management Cash and Liquidity Management Bank Account Management Maintain the Event Type Linkage for Triggering Workflow Processes
Transaction code
SWETYPV
CUSTOMER 60
Localization objects - per Business Priority
2.
3.
On the Change View "Event Type Linkage ": Overview screen, choose the default entry with the following field values and choose Details. Field Name
Entry Value
Object Category
BO(BOR Object Type)
Object Type
FCLM_CR
Event
CREATED
Receiver Type
WS74300043
On the Change View "Event Type Linkage ": Details screen, check the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Linkage Activated
(Unselect the checkbox)
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Fiori Launchpad
Please contact system administrator to get the url of Fiori Launchpad, the user and password. The user must be assigned with the following role: SAP_BR_CASH_SPECIALIST (for On-premise Edition) SAP_BCR_FIN_CM_BAM_MC (for Cloud Enterprise Edition) SAP_BCR_FIN_CM_BANK_ACC_MGM (for Cloud Project Services Edition)
Fiori app
Manage Bank Accounts
6.
On the Bank Hierarchy: Active Accounts (XX Accounts) screen, choose New Bank Account.
7.
On the New Bank Account screen, enter the following data: Field Name
Entry Value
Company Code
3710
Account Holder
Company Code 3710
Bank Country
NL
Bank Key
ABN
Currency
EUR
Account Number
0123456789
Description
Bank 1 Giro
Account Type
01
IBAN
NL02ABNA0123456789
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 61
Field Name
Entry Value
IBAN Valid From
Opening Date
8.
Choose Save as Active.
9.
Choose Edit.
10.
Choose the Connectivity Path tab, choose Add, and enter the following data: Field Name
Entry Value
ID Category
Central System: House Bank Account
Company Code
3710
House Bank
BANK1
House Bank Acct ID
GIRO
G/L Account
0011001000 (leave blank if the G/L account doesn’t exist in company code 3710)
11.
Choose Save as Active.
12.
Create another bank account by repeating the steps above using the following data: Field Name
Entry Value
Company Code
3710
Account Holder
Company Code 3710
Bank Country
NL
Bank Key
ING
Currency
EUR
Account Number
0005544499
Description
Bank 2 Giro
Account Type
01
IBAN
NL40INGB0005544499
IBAN Valid From
Opening Date
ID Category
Central System: House Bank Account
Company Code
3710
House Bank
BANK2
House Bank Acct ID
GIRO
G/L Account
0011002000 (leave blank if the G/L account doesn’t exist in company code 3710)
CUSTOMER 62
Localization objects - per Business Priority
13.
14.
15.
16.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Supply Chain Management Cash and Liquidity Management Bank Account Management Maintain the Event Type Linkage for Triggering Workflow Processes
Transaction code
SWETYPV
On the Change View "Event Type Linkage ": Overview screen, choose the default entry with the following field values and choose Details. Field Name
Entry Value
Object Category
BO(BOR Object Type)
Object Type
FCLM_CR
Event
CREATED
Receiver Type
WS74300043
On the Change View "Event Type Linkage ": Details screen, check the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Linkage Activated
X (Select the checkbox)
Save your entries.
4.3.1.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Create Bank Master Data
No
Yes
Define House Banks House Banks
Yes
No
Create Bank Accounts in Cash Management
No
Yes
Remarks
In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 63
1.
Logon to the source system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.
3.
Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.
4.
The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.
Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the target system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
4.3.2 Bank Account Management - Delta for Extended Version [local] (BFE) 4.3.2.1
Configuration - On Premise
The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1.
Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) . The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings.
2.
Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by .
3.
Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.
CUSTOMER 64
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.3.2.1.1 Assign Approval Patterns Use In the Assign Approval Patterns view, you can assign patterns to company codes and account types.
Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code
SPRO
IMG Menu
Financial Supply Chain Management Cash and Liquidity Management Bank Account Management Basic Settings Define Settings for Bank Account Master Data
2.
On the Change View "Bank Account Master Data Setting ": Details screen, in the Dialog Structure pane, double click Assign Approval Patterns.
3.
Choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, create the following settings:
5.
CoCd
Type
Pattern
Priority
3710
01
P001
1
3710
02
P001
1
3710
03
P001
1
3710
04
P001
1
3710
05
P001
1
3710
06
P001
1
3710
07
P001
1
3710
08
P001
1
3710
09
P001
1
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 65
4.3.2.1.2 Define Responsibilities for Rules Used in Workflow Steps-Create Responsibilities Use In this step, you can define responsibilities for the workflow rules used in your workflow processes. SAP predefines the following rules for Bank Account Management: 74300006: Cash Manager 74300007: Bank Accountant 74300008: Key User Procedure 1.
2.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: IMG Menu
Financial Supply Chain Management Cash and Liquidity Management Bank Account Management Define Responsibilities for Rules Used in Workflow Steps
Transaction Code
OOCU_RESP
On the Responsibility: Choose rule screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Rule Number
74300006
3.
On the Responsibilities for Rule FCLM_CASHMGR Cash Manager screen, choose Create responsibility.
4.
On the Create responsibility screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Object abbr.
CASHMGR_3710
Name
Cash Manager 3710
Start date
Current Date
End date
31.12.9999
5.
Choose Continue E n t e r .
6.
On the Responsibility Change for Rule CASHMGR_1010 screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Account Type of
0000000000
Account Type to
ZZZZZZZZZZ
CUSTOMER 66
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Company Code of
3710
Company Code to
3710
7.
Save your entries. The red light No responsibility defined turns to a green light Responsibility complete.
8.
On the Responsibility: Choose rule screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Rule Number
74300007
9.
On the Responsibilities for Rule FCLM_CASHOPR Bank Accountant screen, choose Create responsibility.
10.
On the Create responsibility screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Object abbr.
CASHOPR_3710
Name
Bank Accountant 3710
Start date
Current Date
End date
31.12.9999
11.
Choose Continue E n t e r .
12.
On the Responsibility Change for Rule CASHOPR_1010 screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Account Type
0000000000
Of Account Type
ZZZZZZZZZZ
To Company Code
3710
of Company Code
3710
to 13.
Save your entries. The red light No responsibility defined turns to a green light Responsibility complete.
14.
On the Responsibility: Choose rule screen, create the following settings:
15.
Field Name
Entry Value
Rule Number
74300008
On the Responsibilities for Rule FCLM_SYSCOLL Key User screen, choose Create responsibility.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 67
16.
On the Create responsibility screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Object abbr.
SYSCOLL_3710
Name
Key User 3710
Start date
Current Date
End date
31.12.9999
17.
Choose Continue E n t e r .
18.
On the Responsibility Change for Rule SYSCOLL_1010 screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Account Type
0000000000
of Account Type
ZZZZZZZZZZ
to Company Code
3710
of Company Code
3710
to 19.
Save your entries. The red light No responsibility defined turns to a green light Responsibility complete.
4.3.2.1.3 Manual Rework If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure, additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Define Responsibilities for Rules Used in Workflow StepsCreate Responsibilities
No
Yes
Remarks
In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: CUSTOMER 68
Localization objects - per Business Priority
1.
Logon to the source system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.
3.
Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.
4.
The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.
Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the target system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
4.3.3
External Financial Accounting [local] (J16)
4.3.3.1
Configuration – Cloud Edition
4.3.3.1.1 General Settings (from SAP NetWeaver) Set Countries 4.3.3.1.2 Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Ledgers Define Settings for Journal Entry Ledger Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Ledgers Ledger Define Settings for Ledgers and Currency Types
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 69
Transaction code
SPRO
2.
Select the row with ledger 0L, and double click on Company Code Settings for the Ledger on the left hand side.
3.
Check if following entries are available for company code 3710. Company Code
3710
Local Currency: Currency Type
Company code currency (10)
Local Currency: Exchange Rate Type
Standard translation at average rate (M)
Local Currency: Source currency type
Document Currency (00)
Local Currency: Translation Date Type
Translation date (3)
Real time conversation
X
Deviation in CO Deviation in AA Deviation in material Group Currency: Currency Type
Group currency (30)
Group Currency: Exchange Rate Type
Standard translation at average rate (M)
Group Currency: Source currency type
Company Code Currency (10)
Group Currency: Translation Data Type
Translation date (3)
Real time conversion
X
Deviation in CO Deviation in AA Deviation in material Fiscal Year Variant
Cal. Year, 4 Special Periods (K4)
Posting period variant
Variant 3710 (3710)
Parallel Accounting Using G/L Accounts 4.
Double click on Accounting Principles for Ledger, and Company Code on the left hand side. CUSTOMER
70
Localization objects - per Business Priority
5.
Choose New Entries, and make the following entries for Ledger 0L, and Company Code 3710: Accounting Principle
IFRS
Name/Description of Accounting Principle
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
6.
Save your entries.
7.
Go back twice.
8.
On the Ledger for the Universal Journal entry sub screen, enter a new entry ledger :
9.
Ledger Leading
Ledger Type
Ledger Name
Base ledger
2L
Standard Ledger
Local GAAP Ledger
unmarked
Choose on Company Code Settings for the Ledger on the left hand side. Choose New Entries, and make the following entries for company code 3710: Company Code
3710
Local Currency: Currency Type
Company code currency (10)
Local Currency: Exchange Rate Type
Standard translation at average rate (M)
Local Currency: Source currency type
Document Currency (00)
Local Currency: Translation Date Type
Translation date (3)
Real time conversion
X
Deviation in CO Deviation in AA Deviation in material Group Currency: Currency Type
Group currency (30)
Group Currency: Exchange Rate Type
Standard translation at average rate (M)
Group Currency: Source currency type
Company Code Currency (10)
Group Currency: Translation Data Type
Translation date (3)
Real time conversion
X
Deviation in CO How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 71
Company Code
3710
Deviation in AA Deviation in material Fiscal Year Variant
Cal. Year, 4 Special Periods (K4)
Pstng period variant
Variant 3710 (3710)
10.
Double click Accounting Principles for Ledger, and Company Code on the left hand side.
11.
Choose New Entries, and make the following entries for Ledger 0L, and company code 3710:
12.
Accounting Principle
Name/Description of Accounting Principle
LG
Local GAAP
Save your entries.
Fields Assigning Company Code to Field Status Variants Use In this activity, you assign the company code to the status variant field. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Ledgers Fields Assign Company Code to Field Status Variants
Transaction code
OBC5
Make the following entries for Company Code 3710: Company Code
Field Status Variant
3710
0010
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 72
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Fiscal Year and Posting Periods Maintain Fiscal Year Variant Use For Baseline the standard customizing is required with fiscal year variant K4. This activity is only necessary if the standard fiscal year variants cannot be used.
Posting Periods Define Variants for Open Posting Periods Use In this activity, you define variants for open posting periods. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Ledgers Fiscal Year and Posting Periods Posting Periods Define Variants for Open Posting Periods
Transaction code
OBBO
On the Change View "Posting Periods: Define Variants": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name
3.
Description
User action and values
Variant
3710
Name
Variant 3710
Note
Save your entry.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 73
Assign Variants to Company Code Use In this activity, you make the specification that is necessary to be able to work in several company codes with the same variant for open posting periods.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Ledgers Fiscal Year and Posting Periods Posting Periods Assign Variants to Company Code
Transaction code
OBBP
On the Change View "Assign Com.Code-> Posting Period Variants": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
CoCd
Company Code
3710
Variant 3.
Note
3710
Save your entries.
Open and close posting periods Use In this activity, you can specify which periods are open for posting for each variant. You have two time intervals (time period 1 and time period 2). In each interval, specify a period lower limit, a period upper limit, and the fiscal year. You close a period by selecting the period specifications so that the period to be closed does not fall within them. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Ledgers Fiscal Year and Posting Periods Posting Periods Open and Close Posting Periods
CUSTOMER 74
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction code 2.
OB52
On the Change View "Posting Periods: Specify Time Intervals": Overview screen, make the following entries:
Var.
A To account
3710 +
3.
From From per. per. To To 1 Year period Year 2 Year period Year 1
2000 12
2030 13
2000 16
2030
3710 A ZZZZZZZZZZ 1
2000 12
2030 13
2000 16
2030
3710 D ZZZZZZZZZZ 1
2000 12
2030 13
2000 16
2030
3710 K ZZZZZZZZZZ 1
2000 12
2030 13
2000 16
2030
3710 M ZZZZZZZZZZ 1
2000 12
2030 13
2000 16
2030
3710 S ZZZZZZZZZZ 1
2000 12
2030 13
2000 16
2030
Save your entries.
Parallel Accounting Activate Cost of Sales Accounting Use In this activity, you activate cost of sales accounting for your company codes. This action means that when you post data to these company codes, the functional areas are derived and updated.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Ledgers Ledger Activate Cost of Sales Accounting
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Change View “Cost of Sales Accounting”: Overview screen, make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 75
3.
Co
Company Name
COS Status
3710
Company Code 3710
2 Active
Save your entries.
Result You have activated the cost of sales accounting for company code 3710.
Global Parameters for Company Code Enter Global Parameters (additional details) Use In this activity, you can make various global specifications for the company code. In addition, you can look at the most important specifications of the company code at any time in the overview (including, for example, the chart of accounts, and the fiscal year variant).
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting(New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Global Parameters for Company Code Enter Global Parameters
Transaction code
OBY6
2.
On the Change View "Company Code Global Data": Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.
3.
Make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
Chart of Accts
Chart of account
YCOA
Note
Country Chart/Accts Credit Control Area
A000
Fiscal Year Variant
K4
CUSTOMER 76
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description
User action and values
VAT Registration No.
Document entry screen variant
2
Field status variant
0010
Pstng period variant
3710
Max. exchange rate deviation
10
Workflow variant
0001
Negative postings permitted
Note
Do not change the other fields. In some cases they are maintained by other areas (building blocks). 4.
On the Change View "Company Code Global Data": Details screen, choose Additional Data.
5.
Make the following entries: Field name
6.
Description
User action and values
INTRASTAT ID number
NL0123456
INTRASTAT additional number
001
EXTRASTAT company number
NL3710
EXTRASTAT material number
123456
Note
Save your entries.
Tax Define Foreign VAT Registration Numbers Use In this activity, you define the VAT registration number that you received in another EC member state for every company code with: A headquarters in an EC country. The business transactions maintained with other EC member states.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 77
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Global Parameters for Company Code Tax VAT Registration Numbers (VAT Reg. No.) Define Foreign VAT Registration Numbers
Transaction code
OB87
On the Change View "View for "Foreign VAT Registration Numbers": Overview screen, Make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
CoCD
Company Code
3710
Cty
Country
NL
VAT Registration No. 3.
Note
Save your entries.
Document Documents in Entry View Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View Use Only one document number interval can be defined for each document type in a company code. The document number intervals in a company code must not overlap. In this activity you define the number ranges to be used for the document types.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Document Document Number Ranges Documents in Entry View Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View
CUSTOMER 78
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction code 2.
FBN1
On the Number Ranges For Accounting Documents screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
Company Code
User action and values
Note
3710
3.
Choose Change Intervals.
4.
On the Maintain Number Range Intervals view, choose Insert Interval.
5.
In the Insert Interval dialog box, make the following entries. After each entry, choose Insert, and Insert Interval: No
To Fiscal Year
From No.
To No.
01
9999
0100000000
0199999999
02
9999
0200000000
0299999999
03
9999
0300000000
0399999999
04
9999
0400000000
0499999999
05
9999
0500000000
0599999999
06
9999
0600000000
0699999999
07
9999
0700000000
0799999999
08
9999
0800000000
0899999999
09
9999
0900000000
0999999999
10
9999
1000000000
1099999999
11
9999
1100000000
1199999999
12
9999
1200000000
1299999999
13
9999
1300000000
1399999999
14
9999
1400000000
1499999999
15
9999
1500000000
1599999999
16
9999
1600000000
1699999999
17
9999
1700000000
1799999999
18
9999
1800000000
1899999999
19
9999
1900000000
1999999999
20
9999
2000000000
2099999999
21
9999
2100000000
2199999999
22
9999
2200000000
2299999999
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
External
CUSTOMER 79
No
To Fiscal Year
From No.
To No.
23
9999
2300000000
2399999999
24
9999
2400000000
2499999999
47
9999
4700000000
4799999999
48
9999
4800000000
4899999999
49
9999
4900000000
4999999999
50
9999
5000000000
5099999999
51
9999
5100000000
5199999999
52
9999
5200000000
5299999999
53
9999
5300000000
5399999999
81
9999
8100000000
8199999999
82
9999
8200000000
8299999999
83
9999
8300000000
8399999999
84
9999
8400000000
8499999999
85
9999
8500000000
8599999999
90
9999
9000000000
9099999999
X1
9999
9100000000
9199999999
X2
9999
9299999999
9399999999
Z1
9999
0090000000
0090999999
70
9999
0070000000
0070999999
External
X
X
6.
Save your entries.
7.
Confirm the dialog box regarding transport of number range intervals.
8.
Choose Back twice to leave the IMG activity.
Tolerance Groups Define Tolerance Groups for Employees Use In this activity, you predefine various amount limits for your employees with which you determine: The maximum document amount the employee is authorized to post. CUSTOMER 80
Localization objects - per Business Priority
The maximum amount the employee can enter as a line item in a customer, or vendor account. The maximum cash discount percentage the employee can grant in a line item. The maximum acceptable tolerance for payment differences for the employee. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Document Tolerance Groups Define Tolerance Groups for Employees
Transaction code
OBA4
2.
On the Change View "FI Tolerance Groups for Users": Overview screen, select New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
4.
5.
Company Code
Currency Amount per document
Amount per Open Item Account Item
Cash Discount per Line Item
3710
EUR
9.999.999.999,00
5,000
9.999.999.999,00
Permitted Payment Differences: Amount
Percent
Revenue
5,00
2,0
Expense
5,00
2,0
Cash Discnt Adj. to
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 81
Tax on Sales / Purchases Basic Settings Define Procedures Use In this activity, you can define the procedure that defines the valid condition types and the sequence for calculation, and posting of taxes on sales or purchases. The calculation procedure determines for which amount the individual condition types are to be calculated.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Check Calculation Procedure Define Procedures
Transaction code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Procedures”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Procedure
Descript.
0TXNL
Sales Tax - Netherlands
4.
Choose Control data.
5.
On the Change View “Control data”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Level Cntr CTyp
Pricing procedure line
From Print
Account key
100
0
BASB
Base Amount
110
0
MWAS
Output Tax
100
It was not printed
MWS
120
0
MWVS
Input Tax
100
It was not printed
VST
It was not printed
CUSTOMER 82
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Level Cntr CTyp
6.
Pricing procedure line
From Print
Account key
130
0
MWRK Travel Expenses (%)
100
It was not printed
VST
140
0
MWVN Non-deduc. Input Tax
100
It was not printed
NAV
150
0
MWVZ
Non-deduc. Input Tax
100
It was not printed
NVV
200
0
NLXA
Acquisition Tax Cred
100
It was not printed
ESA
210
0
NLXV
Acquisition Tax Deb.
200
It was not printed
ESE
Save your entries.
Assign country to Calculation Procedure Use In this activity, you enter the key for the calculation procedure, which determines the conditions, which are allowed per document, and which defines the sequence of the conditions in the document for each country. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings Assign Country to Calculation Procedure
Transaction code 2.
On the Change View “Assign Country -> Calculation Procedure”: Overview screen, choose the entry for country NL and Name Netherlands.
3.
In the Proc field, enter 0TXNL.
4.
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 83
Calculation Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases Use You have to define a separate tax on sales/purchases code for each country in which one of your company codes is located. Each code contains one or more tax rates for the different tax types. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Calculation Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases
Transaction code
FTXP
2.
Choose Country NL.
3.
On the next screen, in the Tax Code field, enter AH, and choose Enter.
4.
In the Properties dialog box, make the following entries: Tax Name Code
Tax Condition Type Type
AH
V
Domestic purchase of goods reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)
Comment
NLXA/NLXV
5.
Choose Enter.
6.
On the Maintain Tax Code: Tax Rates screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
Acquisition Tax Credit (ESA)
6,000-
Acquisition Tax Debit (ESE)
100,00-
Note
Comment
7.
Save your entries.
8.
Repeat these steps for the entire list of Tax codes mentioned in the document YCOA_ACCDET_DOCU_NL.xlsx
CUSTOMER 84
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Import/Create Tax Codes Prerequisites The Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases activity of this configuration guide has been performed and a transport request has been created that contains the tax codes to be transported. The transport request, and the entries contained in it to be transported (tax codes, tax rates, and so on) are stored in Table T007V. To look up the transport request number and/or the tax codes and rates contained in it you can execute transaction code SE16; then enter T007V as table name. On the following screen, make the selections you want to make (for example, transport request no. or tax code). Then choose Execute. On the next screen the table entries are displayed. These entries are transported into the system.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity as follows: SAP System Menu
System Services Reporting
Transaction code
SA38
2.
On the ABAP: Program Execution screen, in the Program field, enter RFTAXIMP, and choose Execute.
3.
On the Import Tax Codes After Transport screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
Transport number
For example, /SMBUSE/0TXNL
Country
Country key
NL
4.
Choose Execute.
5.
On the next screen, the session ID, and a log are displayed. Ensure that the log contains the entry 1 Sessions successfully processed.
Result The system has created a batch input session that is executed in the background. When the execution has ended successfully the tax codes and tax rates are available in the system for productive use. If execution in the background was not successful execute transaction code SM35 to check the cause of errors.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 85
Posting Assign Tax Codes for Non-Taxable Transactions Use In this step, you specify an input tax indicator per company code. The system then uses this indicator when you post acquisitions that are not subject to tax. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Posting Assign Tax Codes for Non-Taxable Transactions
Transaction code
OBCL
On the Change View "Allocate Co.Cd. -> Non-Taxable Transactions": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
CoCd
Company Code
3710
Input tax code Output tax code 3.
Note
O1 Output tax
O2
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 86
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.3.3.1.3 General Ledger Accounting (New) (from 'Financial Accounting (New)') Master Data G/L Accounts Preparations Edit Chart of Accounts List Use In the chart of accounts list, you enter the charts of accounts that you want to use in your organization (at client level). In the Baseline for the Netherlands, the standard chart of accounts YCOA is used. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Master Data G/L Accounts Preparations Edit Chart of Accounts List
Transaction code
OB13
2.
On the Change View "List of All Charts of Accounts": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description User action and values
Chart of Accts
YCOA
Description
Chart of Accounts – Industry – Netherlands(or any other appropriate description)
Maint. Language
English
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Note
CUSTOMER 87
Field name
Description User action and values
Length of G/L account number 4.
Note
8
Save your entries.
Transport Chart of Accounts Use The following sections describe the activities that must take place if the accounts are created manually. To maintain the descriptions in a different language, log on with the relevant language and execute the maintenance of the texts in the logon language.
Define Account Group Use The procedure for copying G/L account groups is described in this section. For Baseline the Netherlands, the chart of accounts YCOA is used with the listed standard G/L account groups. Chrt/Accts Acct Group Name
From acct To account
YCOA
ABST
Recon. account ready for input
999999
YCOA
ANL.
'Fixed assets accounts'
999999
YCOA
ERG.
Income statement accounts
999999
YCOA
FIN.
Liquid funds accounts
999999
YCOA
MAT.
Materials management accounts
999999
YCOA
SAKO
G/L accounts (general)
999999
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Master Data G/L Accounts Preparations Define Account Group
CUSTOMER 88
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction code
OBD4
2.
Select the account group from the chart of accounts you want to copy, and choose Copy.
3.
On the next screen, overwrite the Chart of accounts, and or the Account group name, and the Description.
4.
Choose Enter.
5.
To adapt the status field, double click the line with the new entry.
6.
On the next screen, make your settings for the Status field, and save your entries.
7.
Copy the next account group, and repeat the previously mentioned steps as required.
8.
Save your entries.
Create Accounts If the chart of accounts is maintained manually, this activity is done during the creation of Accounts in the application itself. 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system Menu
SAP Menu Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Master Records G/L Accounts Individual Processing Centrally
Transaction Code
FS00
2.
To maintain data for an account, on the Edit G/L Account Centrally view screen, enter the account number and the Company Code 3710.
3.
Choose Create (next to the company code field).
4.
Save your entries.
Define Retained Earnings Account Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) → General Ledger Accounting (New) → Periodic Processing → Carry Forward → Define Retained Earnings Account
Transaction code
OB53
In the Chart of Accounts field, enter YCOA, and choose Continue.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 89
Field Name
Value
Chart of Accounts
YCOA
Transaction
BIL
3.
Choose Accounts.
4.
Make the following entries:
5.
Field Name
Value
P&L statmt acct type
X
Account
33000000
Save your entries.
Business Transactions Open Item Clearing Define Tolerance Groups for G/L Accounts Use When G/L accounts are cleared, tolerance groups are used to define limits that define the differences that are accepted and posted automatically to predefined accounts. The groups that are defined here are assigned in the G/L account master record. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting(New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Business Transactions Open Item Clearing Clearing Differences Define Tolerance Groups for G/L Accounts
Transaction code
OBA0
2.
On the Change View "Tolerances for Groups of G/L Accounts in Local Currency" screen, select New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
CUSTOMER 90
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Company Code
Tol. Group
3710
3710
4.
DEFT
Name
Debit Posting
Credit Posting
Percentage (Deb.)
Percentage (Cre.)
Tolerance Group G/L accounts
1,00
1,00
1,0
1,0
Default Tolerance Grp G/L acct
Save your entries.
Adjustment Posting/Reversal Permit Negative Posting Use In this activity, you specify whether reverse documents can be comprised of negative postings for each company code. Negative postings are permitted for Company Code 3710. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting(New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Business Transactions Adjustment Posting/Reversal Permit Negative Posting
Transaction code
S_ALR_87004651
On the Change View "Maintain Negative Postings in Company Code": Overview screen, make the following entry: Company Code
Negative Postings Allowed
3710
Set the indicator
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 91
Actual Postings Profit Center Define Number Ranges for Local Documents Use Number ranges must be assigned for actual postings. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Profit Center Accounting Actual Postings Basic Settings: Actual Define Number ranges for local documents
Transaction code
GB02
2.
On the Range Maintenance: Local GL document screen, choose the Change Intervals button.
3.
If the Get Subobject dialog box displays, in the Company Code field, enter 3710, and choose Enter.
4.
On the Interval Maintenance: Number Range Object Local GL document, Subobject screen, make the following entries:
5.
Year
From Number
To Number
9999
0000000001
0199999999
Ext
Save your entries.
4.3.3.1.4 Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Reconciliation Account for company, employee expenses Use To populate the reconciliation account in the Company Code segment of the BP to make sure the user creation (either by XLS upload or via EC-integration) works. BP-Employee/User creation as well as the EC (Employee Central) integration rely on a table (/SHCM/RECON) during the BP-Employee creation when the BP-role “Supplier” is
CUSTOMER 92
Localization objects - per Business Priority
added to a BP-Employee. This logic is in place in the HCM-code. Businesswise an employee assumes the BP-Supplier role when “his company” is reimbursing expenses. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
n/a
Transaction code
SM30 (Customizing Object /SHCM/RECON)
2.
Choose Maintain.
3.
On the Change View “Reconciliation Account for company”: Overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entry:
4.
Company Code
Reconciliation acct
3710
21105000
Save your entries.
Vendor accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data Define Accounting Clerks Use You define the names of the accounting clerks under a name identification code. You enter the identification code in the vendor master records that the accounting clerk supervises. You can use this information for evaluations and for correspondence.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Vendor Accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data Define Accounting Clerks
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 93
Transaction code
OB05
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
Company Code
Accounting Clerk
Accounting Clerk Descr.
3710
01
Michaela Schneider
3710
AM
Anna Müller
User Name
Save your entries.
Business Transactions Payments Global Settings Payment Differences Define Tolerances (Customers and Vendors) Define Tolerances (Vendors) Use In this step, you specify the tolerances for customers and vendors. These tolerances are used for dealing with differences in payment and residual items that can occur during payment settlement. Specify the tolerances under one or more tolerance groups. Allocate a tolerance group to each customer and each vendor via the master record. For each tolerance group, specify the following: Tolerances up to which differences in payment are posted automatically to expense or revenue accounts when clearing open items. The handling of the terms of payment for residual items, if they are to be posted during clearing. The tolerance group can be assigned to customers and vendors (general tolerance group).
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER
94
Localization objects - per Business Priority
IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Manual Outgoing Payments Define Tolerances (Vendors)
Transaction code
OBA3
2.
On the Change View "Customer/Vendor Tolerances": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Company Tolerance Text Code Group 3710
Default Tolerance Cust/Vend 5,00
Loss
Percent Percent Adj. Disc. (Gain) (Loss) By 2,0
2,0
2,00
5,00
3710
CUS1
999,00 5,00
10,0
2,5
1,00
3710
CUS2
10,00
10,0
2,5
1,00
3710
VEN1
200,00 100,00
3710
VEN2
0,02
Company Code
Tolerance Group
3710
4.
Rev.
Grace Days due date
PT from Invoice
00
3,00
0,02
Only grant Fixed partial PT cash disc X
3710
CUS1
01
X
X
3710
CUS2
02
X
X
3710
VEN1
03
3710
VEN1
03
Dunning key
NT00 2
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 95
Define Reason Codes (Overpayments and Underpayments) Use In this step, you define reason codes per company code for handling payment differences in the form of residual items, partial payments, and postings on account.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Manual Outgoing Payments Overpayment/Underpayment Define Reason Codes (Manual Outgoing Payments)
Transaction code
OBBE
2.
On the Determine Work Area Entry dialog box, choose Company Code 3710.
3.
On the Change View "Classification of Payment Differences": Overview screen, make the following entries: RCd Short Text
Long Text
CorrT
050
Cash discount period
Cash discount period exceeded
SAP50
051
Cash discount rate
Cash discount rate not kept to
SAP51
052
Cash discount f. net
Cash discount deduction for net terms
SAP52
053
Cash discount retro.
No csh disc.retrograde calc.frm crd.memo
SAP53
054
Disc. period and rate
Disc. per. exceeded and disc. rate incorr.
SAP54
055
Pmnt on acct
General payment on account
SAP55
056
Pmnt advice error
Pmt adv.on acct is missing or incomplete
SAP56
057
Calculation error
Customer calculation error
SAP57
058
Debit reduced
Debit reduced instead of paid
SAP58
059
Debit paid twice
Debit paid twice
SAP58
060
Credit memo paid
Credit memo paid instead of reduced
SAP60
061
Credit memo twice
Credit memo reduced twice
SAP60
CUSTOMER 96
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Save your entries.
Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up All Company Codes for Payment Transactions Use In this activity, you specify paying company code (process payment transactions centrally for several company codes) for all company codes involved in payment transactions. Cash discount strategy: determination of maximum cash discount for the company code. Special G/L transactions: are to be settled for customers and vendors. Vendors - Special G/L transactions to be paid: A (Down payment), B (Financial assets down payment), F (Down payment request), I (Intangible asset down payment), M (Tangible asset down payment), V (Stocks down payment) Customers - Special G/L transactions to be paid: A (Down payment), F (Down payment request). Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up All Company Codes for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100687 or FBZP, select button All Company codes.
2.
On the Change View "Company Codes": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description User action and values
Company Code
3710
Sending Company Code
3710
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Note
CUSTOMER 97
Field name
Description User action and values
Paying Company Code
Note
3710
Max. Cash Discount Vendors: Sp. G/L transactions to be paid Customers: Sp. G/L transactions to be paid 4.
Save your entries.
Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions Use Minimum amount for which an incoming (€ 1,-) or outgoing payment (€ 5,-) is created. (SAP standard is used with minor changes.) Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100688 or FBZP, select button Paying Company codes
2.
On the Change View "Paying Company Codes": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field
Value
Company Code
3710
Min. Amount for incoming payment Min. Amount for outgoing payment One bill of exch. Per due date per.
select
Specification for SEPA Payments – Vendor CUSTOMER 98
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Save your entries.
Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions Use In this activity, you specify which payment methods are to be used in each country. The following payment methods are used: Pmt Method
Description (local language)
F
Description (English)
Provided by
Foreign bank transfer (BTL91)
Standard ERP
SEPA Credit Transfer
Standard ERP
T
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100689 or FBZP, select button Pmnt methods in country
2.
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select country NL, and choose New Entries if additional payment methods are required.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
Country Pymt Method
User action and values NL
Payment Method
T
Description
SEPA Credit Transfer
Outgoing Payments
Bank transf How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Note
Bank transfer
CUSTOMER 99
Field name
Description
User action and values
Bank details
Account number required
IBAN Required
SWIFT Code Required
Document type for payment
ZP
Clearing document type
ZV
Use payment medium workbench
Format
FSN_CT_00100103
Format supplement
EUSEPA
Note
4.
Choose Back.
5.
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pmt method T.
6.
In the left-hand frame, double click Currencies Allowed.
7.
Enter EUR as the allowed currency.
8.
Choose Back.
9.
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pmt method T.
10.
In the left-hand frame, double click Permitted Destination Countries.
11.
Enter the following country keys: Country Key AU BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI CUSTOMER
100
Localization objects - per Business Priority
FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SK SL 12.
Choose Back.
13.
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pmt method T.
14.
In the left-hand frame, double click Note to Payee by Origin.
15.
Enter SAP
16.
Save your entries.
17.
Choose Back.
18.
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select country NL, and choose New Entries if additional payment methods are required.
19.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
SEPA
as Note to payee.
Field name
Description
Country Pymt Method How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
User action and values
Note
NL Payment Method
F CUSTOMER 101
Field name
Description
User action and values
Description
Foreign bank transfer (BTL91)
Outgoing Payments
Bank transf
Bank transfer
Note
Bank details
Account number required
IBAN Required
SWIFT Code Required
Document type for payment
ZP
Clearing document type
ZV
Use payment medium workbench
Format
FSN_CT_00100103
Format supplement
BTL91
20.
Choose Back.
21.
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pmt method F.
22.
In the left-hand frame, double click Currencies Allowed.
23.
In the left-hand frame, double click Note to Payee by Origin.
24.
Enter Sample01 as Note to payee.
25.
Save your entries.
Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up
CUSTOMER 102
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions Transaction code
S_ALR_87100690
2.
On the Change View "Maintenance of Company Code Data for a Payment Method" screen, select company code 3710 and the payment method (see following table).
3.
On the Change View "Maintenance of Company Code Data for a Payment Method" screen, make your entries as listed in the following table (note that this table is continued on the next page as it is too wide for one page): Amount Limits and Foreign Payments/Foreign Currency Payments/Bank Selection Control Pmt Metho d
T F
Minimu m amount
Maximum amount
Foreign busines s partner allowed
Foreign currenc y allowed
Cust./ vendor bank abroad allowed ?
No optimizatio n
0,00
99999.999.999, 00
X
X
X
X
0,00
99999.999.999, 00
X
X
X
X
Form Data Pmt Method
Form for the payment medium
Next form
Drawer on the Form Drawer name 1 Phone of drawer 0123 / 456 – 789 Street of drawer 123
F
123456 Town of drawer Drawer name 1 Drawer name 2
T
123456 Town of drawer
Pyt adv.ctrl. Pmt Method
Restricted to
Rows Pymt adv. After … lines
Always pyt adv
T
X
4
X
F
X
4
X
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
NoPYtAdv
CUSTOMER 103
4.
Save your entries.
Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Ranking Order Use The program selects banks or bank accounts from which payment are to be made. Therefore the following specifications are made: 1. Ranking order of banks: specify which house banks are permitted and rank them in a list. 2. Bank accounts: specify which bank account is to be used for payments for each house bank, and payment method (and currency, if required), and to which G/L account the payment is posted. 3. Available amounts: for each account at a house bank, the amount (incoming, and outgoing payments) that is available must be specified. 4. Value date: specify how many days elapse between the posting date of the payment run and the value date at the bank, dependent on the payment method, bank account, payment amount, and currency.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP
2.
On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 3710.
3.
Choose Ranking Order.
4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: PM
Crcy
Rank Order
House Bk
T
EUR
1
BANK1
T
EUR
2
BANK2
CUSTOMER 104
Localization objects - per Business Priority
PM
6.
Crcy
Rank Order
House Bk
F
1
BANK1
F
2
BANK2
Save your entries.
Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Available Amounts Use In this section you determine the available amounts of each bank. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP
2.
On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 3710.
3.
Choose Available Amounts.
4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
6.
House Bank
Accoun t ID
Day s
Currenc y
Available for outgoing payment
Scheduled incoming payment
BANK 1
GIRO
999
EUR
9.999.999.999.999,0 0
9.999.999.999.999,0 0
BANK 2
GIRO
999
EUR
9.999.999.999.999,0 0
9.999.999.999.999,0 0
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 105
Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Bank Accounts Use In this section you determine the available bank accounts.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP
2.
On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 3710.
3.
Choose Bank Accounts.
4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
6.
House Bank
Payment Method
BANK1
F
BANK1
T
BANK2
F
BANK2
T
Currency
EUR
EUR
Account ID
Bank subaccount
GIRO
11001020
GIRO
11001020
GIRO
11002020
GIRO
11002020
Save your entries.
Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Value Date Use In this section you determine the value date.
CUSTOMER 106
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP
2.
On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 3710.
3.
Choose Value Date.
4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
6.
Prnt. Methd.
House Bank
Account
Amount Limit
Currency
Days
T
BANK1
GIRO
0,00
EUR
1
T
BANK2
GIRO
0,00
EUR
1
F
BANK1
GIRO
0,00
EUR
1
F
BANK2
GIRO
0,00
EUR
1
Save your entries.
Payment Media Define Sender Details for Payment Forms Use In this activity you specify the standard texts that you want to use for the letter header, letter footer, and the sending address in the letter window per company code.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 107
Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Media Define Sender Details for Payment Forms Transaction code 2.
S_ALR_87003346
On the Change View "Sender details (Payment program)": Overview screen, make the following entries: Co.Cd. ID 3710
3.
Letter header
Footer text
Signature
Sender
ADRS ADRS_HEADER ADRS_FOOTER ADRS_SIGNATURE ADRS_SENDER
Save your entries.
Assign Payment Medium Format and Note to Payee to Payment Method Use In this activity you assign the payment medium format to a combination of payment method and country. You also determine the note to payee to be used, depending on the country and origin. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Media Make Settings for Payment Medium Formats from Payment Medium Workbench Assign Payment Medium Format and Note to Payee to Payment Method
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100701 or FBZP
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, make the following entries (double click the payment method): Payment Method (forthe Netherlands)
Format
Format supplement
F
FSN_CT_00100103 BTL91
T
FSN_CT_00100103 EUSEPA
Payment medium program
Print dataset
Key Print dataset b/exch.
CUSTOMER 108
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
Save your entries.
Dunning Procedure Define Dunning Procedures Use You enter the settings that control the dunning program by: Specifying the company codes to include in dunning. Setting up the dunning procedure you want to use (dunning interval, grace periods for the due date determination, and number of dunning levels) Setting the dunning charges. Specifying the net payment due date at which a particular dunning level is reached. Specifying the dunning notice you want to send to your customers. The following dunning procedures are defined for dunning customers: 3701
Four-level dunning notice, every two weeks.
3702
One-level dunning notice, every 30 days.
The dunning procedure 3702 specifies that customers who do not pay within 30 days are automatically in arrears. The customers receive a dunning notice without interest amounts. From then on, interest is calculated for the open items using the interest calculation program (see also the section on the interest calculation program). Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Dunning Dunning Procedure Define Dunning Procedures
Transaction code
FBMP
2.
On the Maintain Dunning Procedure screen choose New Procedure.
3.
On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name Dunn. Procedure
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Description
User action and values
Note
3701
CUSTOMER 109
Field name
Description
User action and values
Name
Four-level dunning notice, every two weeks
Dunning intervals in days
14
No. of dunning levels
4
Total due items from dunning level
3
Min. days in arrears (acct)
6
Line items grace periods
2
Interest calculator
01
Public hol cal ID
holiday calendar
Note
NL
NL = Netherlands
Standard transaction dunning
Ref. Dunning procedures for texts
3701
4.
Choose Dunning Levels.
5.
On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Dunning levels screen, make the following entries: Field name Days in arrears
Calculate interest?
Always dun?
Description
User action and values 1
2
3
4
2
16
30
44
1
2
3
4
3
4
1
2
Note
Print all items
Payment deadline
6.
1
1
2
2
3
4
3
4
10
7
Choose Charges. CUSTOMER
110
Localization objects - per Business Priority
7.
On the Dunning Charges dialog box, choose EUR.
8.
On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Charges screen, make the following entries: Dunn. Level
Dunn. Charge
1
500,00
2
500,00
3
1000,00
4
1000,00
9.
Choose Minimum amounts.
10.
On the Minimum amounts dialog box, choose EUR.
11.
On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Minimum amounts screen, make the following entries: Dun
Minimum amount
Min. amount for interest
1
10,00
10,00
2
20,00
50,00
3
50,00
100,00
4
100,00
100,00
12.
Choose Back.
13.
Save your entries.
14.
Choose Dunning texts.
15.
On the Company Code/Account type dialog box, choose company 3710.
16.
On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Dunning texts screen, make the following entries: Normal dunning procedure
Form
1
FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE
2
FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE
3
FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE
4
FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE
Legal dunning procedures
FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE
17.
Save your entries.
18.
Choose Back.
19.
Choose Sp. G/L indicator.
20.
Mark F Down Payment Request for Customers and Vendors.
21.
Save your entries.
22.
Choose Back.
23.
Maintain the next dunning procedure.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 111
24.
On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: List screen choose New Procedure.
25.
On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
Dunn. Procedure
Dunning procedure
3702
Name
One-level dunning notice, every 30 days
Dunning intervals in days
30
No. of dunning levels
1
Note
Total due items from dunning level Min. days in arrears (acct) Line items grace periods Interest indicator Public hol cal ID
01 holiday calendar
NL
Standard transaction dunning
Ref. Dunning procedures for texts
3702
NL = Netherlands
26.
Choose Dunning Levels.
27.
On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Dunning levels screen, make the following entries: Field name Days in arrears
Description
User action and values
Note
1 1
Calculate interest
1
Always dun?
1
Print all items
1
CUSTOMER 112
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description
User action and values
Note
Payment deadline
1 7
28.
Choose Dunning texts.
29.
On the Company Code/Account type dialog box, choose company code 3710.
30.
On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Dunning texts screen, make the following entries: Normal dunning procedure
Form
1
FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE
Legal dunning procedures
FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE
31.
Save your entries.
32.
Choose Back.
33.
Choose Sp. G/L indicator.
34.
Mark F Down Payment Request for Customers.
35.
Save your entries.
Define Dunning Procedures (Dunning Control) Use In this activity you enter the settings that control the dunning program. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (NEW) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Dunning Dunning Procedure Define Dunning Procedures
Transaction code
FBMP
2.
From the menu, choose Environment Company Code Data.
3.
On the Change View "Company Code Dunning Control": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 113
5.
Field name
Description
User action and values
CoCd
Company Code
3710
By don. Ar.
by dunning area
Deselected
Ref.CoCode
Reference company code
3710
Sort. MHNK
K1
Sort. MHND
P1
Dun CoDC
3710
Note
Save your entries.
Interest Calculation Define Reference Interest Rates Use In this step, you define your reference interest rates by entering a key, and a mnemonic name. All other fields are purely informative.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Interest Calculation Interest Calculation Define Reference Interest Rates
Transaction code
OBAC
2.
On the Change View "Define Reference Interest Rate": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
Ref.Int.Rate
Reference Interest rate
UICEUR
Long Text
Credit interest
Description
Credit
Date from
01.01.1999
Note
CUSTOMER 114
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description
Currency
User action and values
Note
EUR
Finan. center 4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
Ref.Int.Rate
Reference Interest rate
UIDEUR
Long Text
Debit interest
Description
Debit
Date from
01.01.1999
Currency
EUR
Note
Finan. center 6.
Save your entries.
Define Time-Based Terms Use In this step, you define your reference interest rates by entering a key and a mnemonic name. All other fields are purely informative.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Interest Calculation Interest Calculation Define Time-Based Terms
Transaction code
OB81
2.
On the Change View "Time-Dependent Interest Terms": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 115
4.
Int. Calc. Indicato r
Currenc y Key
Eff. from
Sequentia Term Referenc l number (Debit/Credi e t Interest) Interest
Premiu m
02
EUR
01.01.200 1
1
Debit interest: balance interest calc.
UIDEUR
0
02
EUR
01.01.200 1
2
Credit interest: balance interest calc.
UICEUR
0
02
EUR
01.01.200 0
1
Credit interest: balance interest calc.
UICEUR
-1
02
EUR
01.01.200 0
4
Debit interest: balance interest calc.
UIDEUR
5
Save your entries.
Enter Interest Values Use An interest rate is defined for the discount rate. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable/ Accounts Payable Business Transactions Interest Calculation Interest Calculation Enter Interest Values
Transaction code
OB83
2.
On the Change View "Reference Interest Rate Values": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
CUSTOMER 116
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description
Reference
UICEUR
Valid from
01.01.2001
Int.Rate 4.
Interest Rate
Note
7,0000000
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
Reference
UIDEUR
Valid from
01.01.2001
Int.Rate 5.
User action and values
Interest Rate
Note
10,0000000
Save your entries.
Closing Count Define Reply Addresses for Balance Confirmation Use In this step, you define the address to which the customers or vendors are to send their reply for the balance confirmation. Since this address is different from the company code address, this specification is important. You can define several addresses under one ID for every company code. Specify the required identification for every program run. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transaction Closing Count Balance Confirmation Correspondence Define Reply Addresses for Balance Confirmation
Transaction code
OBV1
2.
On the Change View "Company Code-Dependent Address Data": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 117
4.
5.
Field name
Description
User action and values
CoCd
Company Code
3710
AdrID
Address-Identification
100
Note
On the Edit address: 37100100 screen, make the following entries: Field name
User action and values
Name
Company Code 3710 (NL)
Street/House number
Amerikastraat
Postal code/City
5232 BE/ 's-Hertogenbosch
Country
NL
Time zone
CET
Language
NL
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 118
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.3.3.1.5 Bank Accounting Bank Accounts Update House Bank Account with House Bank ID Use If you want to run the automatic payment run program, or if you want to post a bank statement automatically, you must set up the bank identification in your corresponding general ledger master data. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu
Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Master Records G/L Accounts Individual Processing In Company Code
Transaction code
FS00
On the Edit G/L Account Company code data screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
G/L Account
11001000
Company Code
3710
3.
Choose the Change button (next to the Company Code field).
4.
Choose the Create/bank/interest tab.
5.
Make the following entries: Field name
Description
Note
User action and values
House bank
BANK1
Account ID
GIRO
Note
6.
Save your entries.
7.
Repeat the previous steps for the following accounts, and enter House bank and Account ID as stated in the following table. G/L Account
Company Code
House bank
Account ID
11002000
3710
BANK2
GIRO
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 119
8.
Save your entries.
Business Transactions Payment Transactions Bank Statement Make Global Settings for Electronic Bank Statement Use In this activity you make the settings for the account statement. You create a transaction type, and assign bank details, for which the account statements must be imported, to a transaction type. All the house bank accounts at a particular bank are assigned to the same transaction type. For the following entries you have one customizing topic. If you have entered the customizing topic, you find all other settings in the Dialog Structure on the lefthand side of the screen. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu
Financial Accounting (New) Bank Accounting Business Transactions Payment Transactions Electronic Bank Statement Make Global Settings for Electronic Bank Statement
Transaction code
S_P00_07000249
2.
In the Chart of Accounts field, enter YCOA and choose Continue.
3.
On the Change View "Create Transaction Type": Overview screen, make the following entry:
4.
Trans. Type
Name
37MT
MultiCash Netherlands
Save your entry.
CUSTOMER 120
Localization objects - per Business Priority
5.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen select Transaction Type 37MT, and double click Assign External Transaction Types to Posting Rules in the left-hand pane. In this step, you assign (external) business transaction codes to a posting rule (internal), which enables you to use the same posting specifications for different business transaction codes.
6.
On the Change View "Assign External Transaction Types to Posting Rules": Overview screen, make the following entries: Ext Trans
+/- Post. Rule
Int. Algthm.
Notes
001
-
F003
012
Outgoing check: check number same as payment doc. no.
002
-
F003
012
Outgoing check: check number same as payment doc. no.
004
-
F010
021
Reference document number search
005
-
F010
021
Reference document number search
009
-
F015
000
No interpretation
020
-
F004
019
Reference no. (DME management)
051
+
F001
021
Reference document number search
070
+
F002
000
No interpretation
071
+
F009
019
Reference no. (DME management)
082
+
F008
001
Standard algorithm
083
-
F007
001
Standard algorithm
104
-
F010
021
Reference document No search
105
-
F010
021
Reference document No search
108
-
F015
000
No interpretation
109
F015
000
No interpretation
116
F004
000
No interpretation
159
F001
000
No interpretation
166
F001
021
Reference document No search
171
F009
019
Reference no. (DME management)
174
F009
019
Reference no. (DME management)
191
F004
019
Reference no. (DME management)
192
F009
019
Reference no. (DME management)
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 121
Ext Trans
+/- Post. Rule
196
7.
Int. Algthm.
Notes
F009
019
Reference no. (DME management)
201
-
F004
019
Reference no. (DME management)
202
+
F001
021
Reference document number search
206
-
F004
019
Reference no. (DME management)
808
-
F011
000
No interpretation
814
+
F012
000
No interpretation
814
-
F013
000
No interpretation
UNALLOCATED +
F006
000
UNALLOCATED -
F005
000
Save your entries. To enable the bank statement to find the item to be cleared in the vendor direct debit transaction, the bank details must be maintained in the vendor master record. The bank statement finds the vendor using the bank details and the item using the value (if unique). For algorithm 012, the number interval of the document numbers must be entered in the import report. For algorithm 026, the number interval of the reference document numbers must be entered (SD number assignment = XBLNR in the FI document). For more information about searching for the reference document number, see SAP Note 0107592. The UNALLOCATED transaction results in the bank statement being imported, even if the external transaction code has not been created in Customizing. The transaction is posted to the interim account (bank subaccount, depending on bank). Review this interim account after the bank statement is imported and post the items to the correct accounts where necessary. To ensure that the transaction is contained in the system the next time the statement is imported, define the new external transaction code in Customizing, and assign an appropriate posting rule.
Reprocessing Analysis, Define Average Cost of Reprocessing Use In order to make the efforts for reprocessing more visible, they will also be displayed as costs. Therefore, there is a configuration to maintain average cost of manually reprocessing bank statement items per company code.
CUSTOMER 122
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (NEW) Bank Accounting Business Transactions Payment Transactions Electronic Bank Statement Reprocessing Analysis → Define Average Cost of Reprocessing
Transaction code
SPRO
On the Change View " Average Cost of Reprocessing an Incoming Payment": Overview screen, make the following entry: Co.Cd.
Average Cost of Reprocess
Crcy
3710
27.50
EUR
Save your entries.
Import and assign Reporting Variants Reporting Variants Use The reporting variants needed for classic payment medium programs are created.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system menu
SAP Menu Tools ABAP Workbench Development ABAP Editor
Transaction code
SE38
2.
On the ABAP Editor Initial Screen, provide the program.
3.
Choose Variants.
4.
Choose Change.
5.
On the ABAP: Variants - Initial Screen, provide the variant, select Values, and choose Create.
6.
On the Maintain Variant: Report xxxx, variant yyyy screen, provide the necessary data, and choose Attributes.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 123
7.
On the Variant Attributes screen, enter the description in Meaning field, and save your entries.
8.
Perform the steps for the following program RFKORD30:
9.
Program
Variant
Description
RFKORD30
BPFINL/RFKORD3
Variant RFKORD30
Repeat the steps for following program: RFFOD__S.
Program
Paym. Meth.
Print checks
Print checks: Printer
Print Payment Summary
Print Payment Summary: Printer
RFFOD__S BPFINL_S_10 Variant Payment Method O
O
Select
Select
RFFOD__S BPFINL_S_20 Variant Payment Method S
S
Select
Select
10.
Variant
Description
Repeat the steps for the following program: RFFOD__U Program
Variant
Descr.
Paym. Print Data Data Medium Meth. Paym. Medium Med. Exchange Exch.: Printer
RFFOD__U BPFINL_U Variant U, A, Payment E Method UAE
Program
Variant
Select
Descr.
RFFOD__U BPFINL_U Variant Payment Method UAE 11.
Print paym, Advice Notes
Print paym, Advice Notes: Printer
Select
Print Paym. Sum.
Print Paym. Sum Printer
Select
Repeat the steps for following program: RFFOD__L.
CUSTOMER 124
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Program
Variant
Descr.
Paym. Data Meth. Med. Exch.
RFFOD__L BPFINL_L Variant L RFFOD__L
Data Med. Exch: Printer
Print paym, Advice Notes
Select
Print Print paym, Paym. Advice Sum. Notes: Printer
Print Paym. Sum Printer
Define Posting Parameters Use For the Post Incoming Payments Fiori app, this configuration task uses the parsing service of the electronic bank statement to enable the search functionality to find open invoices in Accounts Receivable. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (NEW) Bank Accounting Business Transactions Payment Transactions Electronic Bank Statement Settings for the Data Import → Define Posting Parameters
Transaction code
SM31: FEBV_IMP_POST and FEBV_IMP_SELOPT
2.
Choose the New Entries button.
3.
Make the following entries: Co.Cd.
Posting Mode
Ass.val.dte to acct
Bundling Type
3710
1 Import and Post
Selected
No bundling
4.
In the Dialog Structure pane, double click Number ranges.
5.
Make the following entries:
6.
No.
Field Name
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
001
BELNR Document Number
90000000
90000000
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 125
4.3.3.1.6 Period End Activities Tax Reporting Make Settings for Electronic Bank Communication with Authorities Use You define the settings that are required for electronic communication with the authorities in this IMG activity. The settings depend on the: Return type, for example, electronic advance return for tax on sales/purchases. Company code or dominant enterprise. Country in which the tax authority is located, to which you want to send your tax returns. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Report Electronic Communication with Authorities Make Settings for Electronic Communication with Authorities
Transaction code
SPRO
2.
On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box screen, enter 0001 for Electronic Advance Return for Tax on Sales/Purchases or 0002 for Electronic EC Sales List in the Return Type field, and click Enter.
3.
On the Change View “Settings Electronic Data Transmission”: Details screen, choose the month field, if you want to report on a monthly basis.
4.
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 126
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Define Parameters for Electronic Communication with Authorities Use In this Customizing activity, you define the parameters that are required for electronic communication with the authorities. The parameters depend on the: 1. Return type, for example, electronic advance return for tax on sales/purchases. 2. Company code or dominant enterprise. 3. Country in which the tax authority is located to which you want to send your tax returns. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Report Electronic Communication with Authorities Make Settings for Electronic Communication with Authorities
Transaction code
SPRO
2.
On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box screen, enter 0001 in the Return field, and enter 3710 for the Dominant Enterprise/Company Code field.
3.
Enter NL for the Country of Reporting Authority field, and choose Enter.
4.
On the Change View “Parameter Values Electronic Data Transmission”: Overview screen, enter optional entries for the available fields.
5.
Save your entries.
Define Tax on Sales/Purchases Groups Use In this activity you define taxes on sales/purchases groups . You can group taxes on sales/purchases groups, for example, for creating the advance return for tax on sales/purchases for your country, or for grouping different company codes with the same VAT registration number in the EC sales list.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 127
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Report Sales/Purchases Tax Returns Define Tax on Sales/Purchases Groups
Transaction code
OBCF
On the Change View “Taxes on Sales/Purchases Groups”: Overview, choose the New Entries button and enter the following:
2.
Tax Group
Adv.ret.tax no.
Dom.Ent./CoCode
NL01
NL123456789
3710
Save your entries.
Assign Company Codes to Tax on Sales/Purchases Groups Use In this activity, you can group several company codes together in a taxes on sales/purchases group. To do this, you must assign the same taxes on the sales/purchases group to the company codes concerned. The data for the company codes in question are grouped together and printed with the taxes on sales/purchases group with the automatic printout of the advance return for taxes on sales/purchases. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Report Sales/Purchases Tax Returns Assign Company Codes to Tax on Sales/Purchases Groups
Transaction code
OBC6
On the Change View “Assign Comp.Code -> Taxes on Sls/Purch. Group”: Overview make the following assignment: CoCd
Tx grp
3710
NL01
Save your entries. CUSTOMER
128
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Assign Tax Group Version Time-Dependent Use For the electronic tax return, if you change the tax code you can assign a time-dependent tax group version for the new assignment of the tax codes to the key figures. The tax group version is determined in report RFUMSV00 with the last valid-from date based on the reporting period of the Electronic Tax Return. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Report Sales/Purchases Tax Returns Assign Tax Group Version Time-Dependent
Transaction code
OBDI
2.
On the Change View “Assign Time-Dependent Tax Group Version”: Overview make the following entries:
3.
Assign to CoCd 3710:
4.
Country
From Date
Version
NL
01.01.2011
EDCL
Save your entries.
Group Tax Base Balances Use In this activity, you group the combinations of taxes on sales/purchases codes, transaction keys, and indicators for total/debit/credit balances relevant for filling out the advance return for tax on sales/purchases form together in a base amount group. Each tax base amount group represents an item on the advance return for tax on the sales/purchases form. The balance of the tax base amounts are entered in this item. If the amount for a particular combination is also needed in subtotals, amounts carried forward, and totals, then you also enter the other groups involved. You do the same for the tax amounts. Read the documentation for the activity Group Tax Balances for more information.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 129
In addition, you assign your tax base amount indicators for the electronic advance tax return to the tax codes. These are on the official form before the column for the base for tax contributions without tax on sales and purchases. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Report Sales/Purchases Tax Returns Group Tax Base Balances
Transaction code
OBCG
2.
On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box screen, enter NL in the Country Key field.
3.
Enter EDCL in the Tax grouping version field, and click Enter.
4.
On the Change View “Grouping of Tax Base Balances”: Overview screen, enter the values mentioned in the following table: Tx
Description
Trs
A0
Domestic sale of goods, Zero rate (0%)
MWAS
5
A1
Domestic sale of goods, Reduced rate (6%)
MWAS
2
A2
Domestic sale of goods, Standard rate (21%)
MWAS
1
7A
Domestic sale of services, Zero rate (0%)
MWAS
5
8A
Domestic sale of services, Reduced rate (6%)
MWAS
2
9A
Domestic sale of services, Standard rate (21%)
MWAS
1
AG
Domestic Sale, Reverse charge
MWAS
5
AH
Domestic purchase of goods reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)
NLXA
6
AI
Domestic purchase of goods reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)
NLXA
6
AJ
Domestic purchase of service reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)
NLXA
6
AK
Domestic purchase of service reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)
NLXA
6
NLXA
10
I1
Article 23 import reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)
Ba l.
Tx.bs
Arithm Oper
CUSTOMER 130
Localization objects - per Business Priority
5.
Tx
Description
Trs
Ba l.
Tx.bs
I2
Article 23 import reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)
NLXA
10
E5
EU sale of service reverse charge
MWAS
8
E7
EU sale of goods
MWAS
8
9E
EU sale of goods distance selling
MWAS
9
Y1
Export of goods
MWAS
7
N1
NonEU purchase of service reverse charge reduced rate (6%)
NLXA
10
N2
NonEU purchase of service reverse charge standard rate (21%)
NLXA
10
C1
Import VAT reduced rate (6% customs invoice)
NLXA
10
C2
Import VAT standard rate (21% customs invoice)
NLXA
10
Arithm Oper
Save your entries.
Group Tax Balances Use In this activity, you group the combinations of taxes on sales/purchases codes, transaction keys, and indicators for total/debit/credit balances relevant for filling out the German, Belgian, and Portuguese advance return for tax on sales/purchases form together in tax groups. Each tax group represents an item on the advance return for tax on the sales/purchases form. The balances of the tax amounts are entered in this item. If the amount for a particular combination is also needed in subtotals, amount carried forward, and totals, then you also enter the other groups involved. In addition, you assign your tax base amount indicators for the electronic advance tax return to the tax codes. These are on the official form before the column for tax. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Report Sales/Purchases Tax Return Group Tax Balances
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 131
Transaction code
OBCH
2.
On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box screen, enter NL in the Country Key field, and EDCL in the Tax grouping version field, and click Enter.
3.
On the Change View “Grouping of Tax Balances”: Overview screen, enter the values mentioned in the following table:
CUSTOMER 132
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Tx
Description
Trs
A1
Domestic sale of goods, Reduced rate (6%)
MWS
52
A2
Domestic sale of goods, Standard rate (21%)
MWS
51
8A
Domestic sale of services, Reduced rate (6%)
MWS
52
9A
Domestic sale of services, Standard rate (21%)
MWS
51
A9
Domestic purchase of goods, Reduced rate (6%)
VST
62
Domestic purchase of goods, Standard AA rate (21%)
VST
62
Domestic purchase of services, Reduced AD rate (6%)
VST
62
Domestic purchase of services, Standard rate (21%)
VST
62
Domestic purchase of goods reverse AH charge, Reduced rate (6%)
ESA
56
Domestic purchase of goods reverse AH charge, Reduced rate (6%)
ESE
62
AI
Domestic purchase of goods reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)
ESA
56
AI
Domestic purchase of goods reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)
ESE
62
AJ
Domestic purchase of service reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)
ESA
56
AJ
Domestic purchase of service reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)
ESE
62
Domestic purchase of service reverse AK charge, Standard rate (21%)
ESA
56
Domestic purchase of service reverse AK charge, Standard rate (21%)
ESE
62
Article 23 import reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)
ESA
60
AE
I1
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Bal. Gp no
ArithmOper Comment
CUSTOMER 133
I1
Article 23 import reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)
ESE
62
I2
Article 23 import reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)
ESA
60
I2
Article 23 import reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)
ESE
62
E0
EU purchase of goods reverse charge reduced rate (6%)
ESA
61
E0
EU purchase of goods reverse charge reduced rate (6%)
ESE
62
E1
EU purchase of goods reverse charge standard rate (21%)
ESA
61
E1
EU purchase of goods reverse charge standard rate (21%)
ESE
62
E2
EU purchase of service reverse charge reduced rate (6%)
ESA
61
E2
EU purchase of service reverse charge reduced rate (6%)
ESE
62
E3
EU purchase of service reverse charge standard rate (21%)
ESA
61
E3
EU purchase of service reverse charge standard rate (21%)
ESE
62
N1
NonEU purchase of service reverse charge reduced rate (6%)
ESA
60
N1
NonEU purchase of service reverse charge reduced rate (6%)
ESE
62
N2
NonEU purchase of service reverse charge standard rate (21%)
ESA
60
N2
NonEU purchase of service reverse charge standard rate (21%)
ESE
62
C1
Import VAT reduced rate (6% customs invoice)
ESA
60
C1
Import VAT reduced rate (6% customs invoice)
ESE
62
C2
Import VAT standard rate (21% customs invoice)
ESA
60
CUSTOMER 134
Localization objects - per Business Priority
C2 4.
Import VAT standard rate (21% customs invoice)
ESE
62
Save your entries.
Define SCB Indicator for Foreign Trade Regulations Use In this activity, you define information using an indicator which is needed for reporting according to foreign trade regulations for foreign payment transactions and which shows the reason for payment. You must enter the indicator in the line item. The reasons for payment stored for the indicator are transferred when you print the form or in the corresponding data medium exchange.
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Report Foreign Trade Regulations Define SCB Indicator for Foreign Trade Regulations
Transaction code
SPRO
On the Change View “SCB Indicators”: Overview screen, enter the following values the Netherlands: SCB Indicator
Document type for the report record
Indicator acc. to service specifications
Reason for pmnt (2 lines)
N01
1
1
Voeding en levende dieren
N17
1
15
Overige
N18
1
16
Storno-uitvoer 1
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 135
Discounting of Long-Term Receivables, Payables, and Provisions Use Long-Term-Receivables, Payables, and Provisions with a residual maturity >1 year must be discounted. The interest rates can be differently assigned for each year.
Define Valuation Areas Use In this IMG activity, you define your valuation areas for your closing operations. With the valuation areas, you can report different valuation approaches and post to different accounts. You can save the valuation results separately for each document item and use them for other closing operations (such as sorted lists). Note In foreign currency valuation, the saved valuation differences are not used to calculate the realized exchange rate differences. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Valuate Define Valuation Areas
Transaction code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View "Valuation Area”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
4.
Valuation area
Valuation method
Currency type
Long text
NL
BILM
10
Valuation area Netherlands
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 136
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Assign Valuation Areas and Accounting Principles Use In this IMG activity, you assign the desired accounting principles to your valuation areas. You can use the valuation area for the reclassification or sorted list of payables and receivables and for foreign currency valuation. You can use the valuation area to apply in these reports the different valuation requirements of the accounting principles.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Valuate Assign Valuation Areas and Accounting Principles
Transaction code
S_PL0_86000071
2.
On the Change View "Assignment of Valuation Area to Accounting Principles": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
4.
Valuation area
Acc. Princ.
NL
LG
Save your entries.
Define Calculation Methods Use In this activity, you define your calculation methods for discounting long-term receivables/payables as well as provisions.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Valuate Discounting of Long-Term Receivables, Payables, and Provisions Define Calculation Methods
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 137
Transaction code
F107_PROVMETH
2.
On the Change View "Calculation Methods": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Method
Description
YBNL
Long-Term Provisions
4.
Select line method YBNL, and choose Details.
5.
On the Change View "Details Overview" screen, choose New Entries.
6.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
7.
Remaining Maturity from (Exclud)
Until (including)
Time Unit
Interest indicator
Name
0
11
Month
Y0
Provisions < 1 Year
11
23
Month
Y1
Provisions >1 Years
23
35
Month
Y2
Provisions >2 Years
35
47
Month
Y3
Provisions >3 Years
47
59
Month
Y4
Provisions > 4 Years
59
71
Month
Y5
Provisions > 5 Years
71
83
Month
Y6
Provisions > 6 Years
83
95
Month
Y7
Provisions > 7 Years
95
107
Month
Y8
Provisions > 8 Years
Save your entries.
Define Interest Rates Use In this activity, you define the interest rates for discounting long-term receivables/payables as well as provisions. CUSTOMER 138
Localization objects - per Business Priority
The interest rates in this document are examples only. They must be adapted to your business requirements. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Valuate Discounting of Long-Term Receivables, Payables, and Provisions Define Calculation Methods
Transaction code
F107_PROVMETH
2.
On the Change View "Calculation Methods": Overview screen, select the YBNL method, and choose Details.
3.
On the Change View "Details Overview:" screen, select Interest Indicator.
4.
On the Display View "Interest Rates": Overview screen, select the Display -> Change button.
5.
On the Change View "Interest Rates": Overview screen, make the following entries:
6.
Int ID
Crcy
Valid from
Debit %
Cred. %
Y0
EUR
current date
5,000
5,000
Y1
EUR
current date
5,100
5,100
Y2
EUR
current date
5,200
5,200
Y3
EUR
current date
5,300
5,300
Y4
EUR
current date
5,400
5,400
Y5
EUR
current date
5,500
5,500
Y6
EUR
current date
5,600
5,600
Y7
EUR
current date
5,700
5,700
Y8
EUR
current date
5,800
5,800
Save your entries.
Define Accounts for Value Adjustments 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Valuate Discounting of
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 139
Long-Term Receivables, Payables, and Provisions Define Accounts Transaction code
OBB0
2.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting Procedures screen, choose Provisions/Recs/Payables: Adjust. Acct (transaction RKK).
3.
On the Enter Chart of Accounts dialog box, select YCOA and choose the Change Value area F 7
4.
On the Change valuation area dialog box, select NL.
5.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, select posting key.
6.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Posting Keys screen, make the following entries: Posting Key
Transaction Type
Debit
40
Credit
50
7.
Save your entries.
8.
Choose Accounts.
9.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, make the following entries: In the following maintenance views, the term Reconciliation account is not meant in the sense of a reconciliation account (SKB1-MITKZ is not empty) to which cannot be directly posted (as for example a vendor reconciliation account), but in the sense account to be adjusted by valuation postings. Chart of Accounts
YCOA
Transaction
RKK
Valuation Area
NL
Reconciliation account
Adjustment Account
24031000
24099900
24032000
24099900
24033000
24099900
24034000
24099900
24035000
24099900
24036000
24099900
24037000
24099900
CUSTOMER 140
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Chart of Accounts
YCOA
Transaction
RKK
Valuation Area
NL
Reconciliation account
Adjustment Account
24090000
24099900
24091000
24099900
24093000
24099900
24097000
24099900
24030000
24099900
10.
Save your entries.
11.
Go back to the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting Procedures screen.
12.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting Procedures screen, choose Provisions/Recs/Payables: Discount Exp. (transaction ZKB).
13.
On the Enter Chart of Accounts dialog box, select YCOA and choose Change Value area F 7
14.
On the Change valuation area dialog box, select NL.
15.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, select posting key.
16.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Posting Keys screen, make the following entries: Posting Key
Transaction Type
Debit
40
Credit
50
17.
Save your entries.
18.
Choose Accounts.
19.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, make the following entries: Chart of Accounts
YCOA
Transaction
ZKB
Valuation Area
NL
Reconciliation account
Adjustment Account
24031000
66010000
24032000
66010000
24033000
66010000
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 141
Chart of Accounts
YCOA
Transaction
ZKB
Valuation Area
NL
Reconciliation account
Adjustment Account
24034000
66010000
24035000
66010000
24036000
66010000
24037000
66010000
24090000
66010000
24091000
66010000
24093000
66010000
24097000
66010000
24030000
66010000
20.
Save your entries.
21.
Choose Back.
22.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting Procedures screen, choose Provisions/Recs/Payables: Discount Tfr (transaction ZKK).
23.
On the Enter Chart of Accounts dialog box, select YCOA and choose Change Value area F 7
24.
On the Change valuation area dialog box, select NL.
25.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, select posting key.
26.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Posting Key screen, make the following entries: Posting Key
Transaction Type
Debit
40
Credit
50
27.
Save your entries.
28.
Choose Accounts.
29.
On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, make the following entries:
CUSTOMER 142
Localization objects - per Business Priority
30.
Chart of Accounts
YCOA
Transaction
ZKK
Valuation Area
NL
Reconciliation account
Adjustment Account
24031000
66019900
24032000
66019900
24033000
66019900
24034000
66019900
24035000
66019900
24036000
66019900
24037000
66019900
24090000
66019900
24091000
66019900
24093000
66019900
24097000
66019900
24030000
66019900
Save your entries.
Period End Reporting Creating Financial Statement Version Use In this activity: You define the versions you must create a balance sheet, and profit and loss statement. You can define versions for a specific chart of accounts, for a group chart of accounts, or without any specific assignment. You then determine the financial statement items for your version. You assign groups of accounts to the items at the lowest levels of the hierarchy. You can select the criteria that determine which items the accounts are displayed in. For example, accounts or groups of accounts can be assigned to particular items based on their balance. Alternatively, you can also assign functional area intervals at the lowest level of the structure, instead of account intervals. Either account intervals or functional area How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 143
intervals can be assigned to a financial statement item. You must explicitly define financial statement versions to which functional areas are assigned as such. You do this by setting the Fun.area allowed indicator. This financial statement version can then also be used by the notes to financial statement in the G/L account information system. A financial statement version would be created for each operative and country CoA used. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Master Data GL Accounts Define Financial Statement Versions
Transaction Code
OB58
2.
On the Change View "Financial Statement Versions": Overview screen, choose New Entries F 5 .
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name
User action and values
Fin.Stmt.version
3730
Name
Acc Balance Sheet (#266) & P&L (new BilMoG) operative
Maint. language
EN
Chart of Accounts
YCOA
4.
Create the hierarchy, and assign the accounts from operational CoA YCOA .
5.
Save your entries.
4.3.3.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure, additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View
No
Yes
Remarks
CUSTOMER 144
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Remarks
Import /Create Tax Codes
Yes
Yes
Import with report RFTAXIMP
Define Number Ranges for Local Documents
No
Yes
Define Reply Addresses for Balance Confirmation
Yes
No
Reporting Variants
Yes
No
If manual transport is possible, follow these steps: 1. Logon to the source system / client. 2. Go to the customizing activity as described in the respective section. 3. Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. 4. The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required, follow these steps: 1. Logon to the target system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 145
4.3.4
External Financial Accounting [local] (J16_OP)
4.3.4.1
Configuration – On-Premise Edition
4.3.4.1.1 Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up All Company Codes for Payment Transactions Use Specify paying company code for payment advice. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (NEW) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
SM30 (Customizing Object V_T042B)
2.
On the Change View “Paying Company Codes”: Overview screen, double click the Company Code to update.
3.
On the Change View “Paying Company Codes”. Details screen, on the Forms section, make the following entries: Field Form for the Payment Advice
4.
Value SAPscript
F110_NL_ADVIES
Save your entries. CUSTOMER
146
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions Use Minimum amount for which an incoming (€ 1,-) or outgoing payment (€ 5,-) is created. (SAP standard is used with minor changes.) Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100688 or FBZP, select button Paying Company codes
2.
On the Change View "Paying Company Codes": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field
Value
Company Code
3710
Min. Amount for incoming payment Min. Amount for outgoing payment
4.
no exchange rate differences
No Exchange Rate Differences for Partial Payments
Separate Payment for each Payment Reference
Bill of Exchange Payments
Direct Debit Pre-notifications
Creditor Identification Number
NL42ZZZ123456780001
Form for the Payment Advise
F110_NL_ADVIES
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 147
Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions Use In this activity, you specify which payment methods are to be used in each country. The following payment methods are used: Pmt Method Description (local language) Description (English) E
Direct Debit
F
Auslandsüberweisung
Foreign bank transfer (DTAZV)
T
SEPA Überweisung
SEPA Credit Transfer
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100689 or FBZP, select button Pmnt methods in country
2.
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select country DE, and choose New Entries if additional payment methods are required.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
Country Pymt Method
User action and values
Note
NL Payment Method
E
Description
Direct Debit
Incoming Payments
Debit Memo
Bank details
Account number required
IBAN Required
CUSTOMER 148
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description
User action and values
SWIFT Code Required
SEPA Mandate required
Document type for payment
ZP
Clearing document type
ZV
Use payment medium workbench
Format
SEPA_DD
Note
Format supplement 4.
Choose Back.
5.
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pynt.Methd E.
6.
In the left-hand frame, double click Currencies Allowed.
7.
Enter EUR as the allowed currency.
8.
Choose Back.
9.
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pynt.Methd E.
10.
In the left-hand frame, double click Permitted Destination Countries.
11.
Enter the following country keys: Country Key AU BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 149
GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SK SL 12.
Choose Back.
13.
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pynt.Methd E.
14.
In the left-hand frame, double click Note to Payee by Origin.
15.
Enter SAP
16.
Save your entries.
17.
Choose Back.
SEPA
as the Note to Payee.
Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions for the OP solution Use In this activity, you specify which payment methods are to be used in each country for the OP solution. Following payment methods need to be updated to be used in OP, the OP solution uses BANK2: CUSTOMER 150
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Pmt Method
Description
F T E
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (NEW) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
SM34 (Customizing Object VC_T024ZL)
2.
On the Change View “Payment Method/Country”: Overview screen, double click Payment Method/Country to update.
3.
On the Change View Payment Method/Country”: Details screen, in the Payment Medium section, choose the Format im Buchungskreis button and make the following entry:
4.
5.
6.
CoCd
PM
House Bk
Pmnt medium format
3710
F
BANK1
FSN_CT_00100103
3710
F
BANK2
FSN_CT_00100103
Addit.
Select the row of the created entry, double click the last folder in the Dialog Structure, choose New Entries and make the following entry: Origin
Note to payee
Leave blank
SAMPLE 01
Save your entries and repeat the steps for payment method E and T with the following values: CoCd
PM House Bk
Pmnt medium format
Addit. Note to payee
3710
T
BANK1
SEPA_CT
SAP SEPA
3710
E
BANK1
SEPA_DD
SAP SEPA
3710
T
BANK2
SEPA_CT
SAP SEPA
3710
E
BANK2
SEPA_DD
SAP SEPA
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 151
Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100690
2.
On the Change View "Maintenance of Company Code Data for a Payment Method" screen, select company code 1010 and the payment method (see following table).
3.
On the Change View "Maintenance of Company Code Data for a Payment Method" screen, make your entries as listed in the following table (note that the table is continued on the next page as it is too wide for one page): Amount Limits and Foreign payments/foreign currency payments/Bank selection Control Pmt Metho d
E
Minimu m amount
1,00
Maximum amount
Foreign busines s partner allowed
99999.999.999, 00
Foreign currenc y allowed
X
Cust./ vendor bank abroad allowed ?
No optimizatio n
X
X
Pyt adv.ctrl.
4.
Pmt Method
Restricted to
Rows Pymt adv. After … lines
E
X
4
Always pyt adv
NoPYtAdv
X
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 152
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Ranking Order Use The program selects banks or bank accounts from which payment is to be made. Therefore the following specifications are made: 1. Ranking order of banks: specify which house banks are permitted and rank them in a list. 2. Bank accounts: specify which bank account is to be used for payments for each house bank, and payment method (and currency, if required), and to which G/L account the payment is posted. 3. Available amounts: for each account at a house bank, the amount (incoming, and outgoing payments) that is available must be specified. 4. Value date: specify how many days elapse between the posting date of the payment run and the value date at the bank, dependent on the payment method, bank account, payment amount, and currency. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP
2.
On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 1010.
3.
Choose Ranking Order.
4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
6.
PM
Crcy
Rank Order
House Bk
E
EUR
1
BANK1
E
EUR
2
BANK2
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 153
Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Available Amounts Use In this section you determine the available amounts of each bank.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP
2.
On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 1010.
3.
Choose Available Amounts.
4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
6.
House Bank
Account ID
Days Currency Available for outgoing payment
Scheduled incoming payment
BANK1
GIRO
999
EUR
10.000,00
10.000,00
BANK2
GIRO
999
EUR
1.000.000.000,00
1.000.000.000,00
Save your entries.
Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Bank Accounts Use In this section you determine the available bank accounts.
CUSTOMER 154
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP
2.
On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 1010.
3.
Choose Bank Accounts.
4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
6.
House Bank
Payment Method
Currency
Account ID
Bank subaccount
BANK1
E
EUR
GIRO
11001040
BANK2
E
EUR
GIRO
11002040
Save your entries.
Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Value Date Use In this section you determine the value date. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 155
2.
On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 1010.
3.
Choose Value Date.
4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
6.
Prnt. Methd.
House Bank
Account
Amount Limit
Currency
Days
E
BANK1
GIRO
0,00
EUR
1
E
BANK2
GIRO
0,00
EUR
1
Save your entries.
Assign Payment Medium Format and Note to Payee to Payment Method Use In this activity you assign the payment medium format to a combination of payment method and country. You also determine the Note to Payee to be used, depending on the country and origin. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Media Make Settings for Payment Medium Formats from Payment Medium Workbench Assign Payment Medium Format and Note to Payee to Payment Method
Transaction code
S_ALR_87100701 or FBZP
On the Change View "Payment Method/Country". Overview screen, make the following entries (double click the payment method): Payment Format Method
Format Payment Print Key Print dataset supplement medium dataset program b/exch.
E
SEPA_DD
F
FSN_CT_00100103 BTL91
CUSTOMER 156
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Payment Format Method T 3.
Format Payment Print Key Print dataset supplement medium dataset program b/exch.
FSN_CT_00100103 EUSEPA
Save your entries.
Payment Medium Variant Creation Use Creation of payment medium variants. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (NEW) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Media Make Settings for Payment Medium Formats from Payment Medium Workbench Create/Assign Selection Variants
Transaction code
OBPM4
2.
On the Payment medium: Selection Variants screen, double click on Payment medium Format FSN_CT_00100103 (Foreign Transfer), and for BANK2 enter Sel. Variant: FSN.
3.
On the Edit Variants: Report SAPFPAYM, Variant FSN screen, in the Format section enter: Payment medium Format
Choose Format Parameters, and in field ACH batch hdr. Company entry description
FSN_CT_00100103 4.
Choose Format Parameters: Description
Checkbox
Reporting Data in Order Currency Indicator: Transfer Bank Address too
X
Transfer IBAN
X
Report Using Z4
X
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 157
Description
Checkbox
EU Standard Bank Transfer with Reporting Data Foreign Bank Transfer instead of EU Standard Bank Transfer 5.
X
On the Print Control section: Description
Checkbox
Data Medium Exchange
X
FTR list
X
Payment Summary
X
Error Log
X
Choose Print Parameters, and in field Output Device
6.
Choose OK.
7.
Save your entries.
8.
Go Back.
9.
On the Payment medium: Selection Variants screen, double click on Payment medium Format SEPA_CT (SEPA Transfer) and for BANK2 enter Sel. Variant: SEPA_CT_VAR.
10.
On the Edit Variants: Report SAPFPAYM, Variant SEPA_CT_VAR screen, in the Format section enter: Payment medium Format
Choose Format Parameters, and in field ACH batch hdr. Company entry description
SEPA_CT 11.
12.
13.
Choose Format Parameters and make the following entries: Payment medium Format
SEPA_CT
XML Namespace of Data Medium
urn:iso:std:iso:20022:tech:xsd:pain.001.002.03
XML Location of Schema
urn:iso:std:iso:20022:tech:xsd:pain.001.002.03 pain.001.002.03.xsd
In the Print Control section, make the following entries: Description
Checkbox
Data Medium Exchange
X
Payment Summary
X
Error Log
X
Choose Print Parameters, and in field Output Device
Choose OK. CUSTOMER
158
Localization objects - per Business Priority
14.
Save your entries.
15.
Go Back.
16.
On the Payment medium: Selection Variants screen, double click on Payment medium Format SEPA_DD (SEPA Direct Debit (Bank Collection)) and for BANK2 enter Sel. Variant: SEPA_DD_VAR.
17.
On the Edit Variants: Report SAPFPAYM, Variant SEPA_DD_VAR screen, in the Format section enter: Payment medium Format
Choose Format Parameters, and in field ACH batch hdr. Company entry description
SEPA_DD 18.
19.
20.
Choose Format Parameters: Payment medium Format
SEPA_DD
XML Namespace of Data Medium
urn:iso:std:iso:20022:tech:xsd:pain.008.002.02
XML Location of Schema
urn:iso:std:iso:20022:tech:xsd:pain.008.002.02 pain.008.002.02.xsd
In the Print Control section, make the following entries: Description
Checkbox
Data Medium Exchange
X
Payment Summary
X
Error Log
X
Choose Print Parameters, and in field Output Device
Choose OK.
4.3.4.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure, additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View
No
Yes
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Remarks
CUSTOMER 159
Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Remarks
Import /Create Tax Codes
Yes
Yes
Import with report RFTAXIMP
Define Number Ranges for Local Documents
No
Yes
Define Reply Addresses for Balance Confirmation
Yes
No
Reporting Variants
Yes
No
If manual transport is possible, follow these steps: 1. Logon to the source system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section. 3. Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. 4. The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required, follow these steps: 1. Logon to the target system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
CUSTOMER 160
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.3.5 SEPA for External Financial Accounting [local] (BFS) 4.3.5.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.3.5.1.1 Accounts Receivable Business Transactions Define Number Range Intervals Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Incoming Payments Management of SEPA Mandates Number Ranges of Mandates Define Number Ranges Intervals
Transaction code
SEPA_NR_MT
2.
On the Range Maintenance: SEPA Mandate Refer screen, enter in the Company Code field the value 3710 and choose the Change Intervals button.
3.
On the Maintain Intervals: Customer screen, choose the Insert Line button to maintain number range intervals:
4.
No
From number
To number
1
000000000001
000099999999
Ext
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 161
4.3.6
Cash Daily Operation [local] (J76)
4.3.6.1
Configuration – Cloud Edition
4.3.6.1.1 Enter GL Account for Bank Account Use Enter the G/L account for the existing bank accounts which were created in building block J74. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Fiori Launchpad
Please contact system administrator to get the url of Fiori Launchpad, the user and password. The user must be assigned with role: SAP_BR_CASH_SPECIALIST (for On-premise Edition) SAP_BCR_FIN_CM_BAM_MC (for Cloud Enterprise Edition) SAP_BCR_FIN_CM_BANK_ACC_MGM (for Cloud Project Services Edition)
Fiori app
Manage Bank Accounts
2.
On the Bank Hierarchy: Active Accounts (XX Accounts) screen, choose the bank account 1133698 in bank key ABN of Country NL to be changed from the bank Hierarchy View or Account List View.
3.
The Bank Account screen displays, choose Edit.
4.
Choose the Connectivity Path tab, enter the following data: Field Name
Entry Value
G/L Account
0011001000
5.
Choose Save and Submit.
6.
Repeat the steps above using the following data: Field Name
Entry Value
Account Number
2580061
Bank Key
82080000
G/L Account
0011002000
Country
NL
CUSTOMER 162
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.3.6.1.2 Activate Individual Source Application Use You use this Customizing activity to activate source applications for cash management. Once a source application is activated, the transactions from the application are included in reporting for cash management. Applications are activated per company code. With this activity, you enter each application/company code combination individually. To activate multiple company codes for an application simultaneously, you can use the mass activation report Activate Multiple Source Applications.
Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code
SPRO
IMG Menu
Financial Supply Chain Management Cash and Liquidity Management Cash Management Tools Activate Individual Source Applications
2.
On the Change View "Activate Source Applications": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, create the following settings:
4.
Field Name
Entry Value
Src. Appl.
FI General Ledger
CoCd.
3710
Company Name
Company Code 3710
Active
1 Active
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 163
4.3.6.1.3 Define Clearing Accts for Receiving Bank for Acct. Transfer Use In this activity, you define the offsetting accounts for the receiving bank accounts for bank account transfers (payments between house bank accounts), which should be posted to when payment is made. The entries are necessary when payment requests are created for cash management payment advice notes that result from cash concentration, for example. The offsetting accounts for the paying house bank are determined by the payment program specifications and the payment methods used. The offsetting accounts for the receiving house bank cannot be determined from these specifications, however, but can be defined in this section. Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code
SPRO
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting(New) Bank Accounting Business Transactions Payment Transactions Payment Request Define Clearing Accts for Receiving Bank for Acct. Transfer
2.
On the Change View "Acct Transfer: Determine Receiving Bank's Clearing Account screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen and create the following settings: CoCode House Bk
4.
Country Pmt Method
Currency Account ID
Clrg acct
3710
BANK1
11001080
3710
BANK2
11002080
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 164
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.3.6.1.4 Define Clearing Accts for Paying Bank for Acct. Transfer Use In this activity, you can define the bank sub-accounts to be posted to in the general ledger for payment transactions with bank accounts. The accounts are specified by house bank account, payment method, and currency. If a currency is not specified, the account applies to all currencies.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code
SPRO
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting(New) Bank Accounting Business Transactions Payment Transactions Payment Handling Bank Clearing Account Determination Define Account Determination
On the Determine Work Area: Entry screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Paying company code
3710
3.
On the Change View "Account Determination for GL Account Payments": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, create the following settings:
5.
House Bk
PM
BANK1
Crcy
Acct ID
Bank subacct
T
GIRO
11001020
BANK1
F
GIRO
11001020
BANK2
T
GIRO
11002020
BANK2
F
GIRO
11002020
Charge ind
BusA
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 165
4.3.6.1.5 Settings for Bank Statement Monitor Use In this IMG activity, you make the required settings for the house bank accounts that you want to view using the bank statement monitor.
Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code
SPRO
IMG Menu
Financial Supply Chain Management Bank Communication Management Bank Statement Monitor Settings for Bank Statement Monitor
2.
On the Change View "FTE-BSM: Settings for Bank Statement Monitor": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Company code
3710
House Bank
BANK1
Account ID
GIRO
Process Status
Choose checkbox
Difference Sts
Blank
Serial No. Sts
Blank
Reconcil. Sts
Blank
Interval
1
Interval Unit
0 Months
Fac.Calendar ID
01
Position
Blank
Difference Amount
Blank
Currency
EUR
Field Name
Entry Value
Company code
3710
CUSTOMER 166
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Field Name
Entry Value
House Bank
BANK2
Account ID
GIRO
Process Status
Choose checkbox
Difference Sts
Blank
Serial No. Sts
Blank
Reconcil. Sts
Blank
Interval
1
Interval Unit
0 Months
Fac.Calendar ID
01
Position
Blank
Difference Amount
Blank
Currency
EUR
Save your entries.
4.3.6.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Enter GL Account for Bank Account
No
Yes
Remarks
In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: 1. Logon to the source system / client. 2. Go to the customizing activity as described in the respective section. 3. Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. 4. The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 167
5. Remark: Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 6. Logon to the target system / client. 7. Go to the customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
4.3.7
Delta Cash Daily Operation [local] (BF3)
4.3.7.1
Configuration – On-Premise Edition
4.3.7.1.1 Define Clearing Accts for Paying Bank for Acct. Transfer Use In this activity, you can define the bank sub-accounts to be posted to in the general ledger for payment transactions with bank accounts. The accounts are specified by house bank account, payment method, and currency. If a currency is not specified, the account applies to all currencies. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code
SPRO
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting(New) Bank Accounting Business Transactions Payment Transactions Payment Handling Bank Clearing Account Determination Define Account Determination
On the Determine Work Area: Entry screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Paying company code
3710
CUSTOMER 168
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
On the Change View "Account Determination for GL Account Payments": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, create the following settings:
5.
House Bk
PM
Crcy
Acct ID
Bank subacct
BANK1
E
EUR
GIRO
11001020
BANK2
E
EUR
GIRO
11002020
Charge ind
BusA
Save your entries.
4.3.8 Financial Master Data (Manufacturing) [local] (BF2) 4.3.8.1
Configuration - On Premise
The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1. Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings. 2. Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by . 3. Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.
4.3.8.1.1 FI Master Data Manufacturing Create G/L Account Manually 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 169
Transaction Code
FS00
IMG Menu
SAP Menu Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Master Records G/L Accounts Individual Processing Centrally
2.
To maintain account data, on the Edit G/L Account Centrally screen, enter the account number and the company code you want to update. Choose Create (the button to the right of the Company Code field).
3.
Make the following entries: G/L Account
Description
Accoun Account Group t type
Functi onal Area
0013100000 Inventory - Raw Material
X
Materials management accounts
0013200000 Inventory - Work In Progress
X
Materials management accounts
0013300000 Inventory - Semi Finished Goods
X
Materials management accounts
0013400000 Inventory - Finished Goods
X
Materials management accounts
0050100000 Cost of Goods Sold (Raw w/o Cost Element)
N
Income statement accounts
YB20
0050300000 Cost of Goods Sold (SF & Finish Goods w/o Cost El)
N
Income statement accounts
YB20
0050301000 COGS Direct Material
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0050302000 COGS Third Party
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0050303000 COGS Material Overhead
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
CUSTOMER 170
Localization objects - per Business Priority
G/L Account
Description
Accoun Account Group t type
Functi onal Area
0050304000 COGS Personnel Time
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0050305000 COGS Machine Time
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0050306000 COGS Setup Time
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0050307000 COGS Production Overhead
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0050308000 COGS Credits (Co/By-Pr)
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0051100000 Consumption - Raw Material
P
Income statement accounts
0052001000 Loss Inventory Variance (Raw & Trade)
P
Income statement accounts
0052003000 Loss Inventory Variance (SF & Finish Goods)
P
Income statement accounts
0052011000 Loss Inventory Transfer (Raw & Trade)
P
Income statement accounts
0052013000 Loss Inventory Transfer (SF & Finish Goods)
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0052021000 Loss Consumption for Quality Control (Raw & Trade)
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0052023000 Loss Consumption for Quality Control (SF&Fin Gds)
P
Income statement accounts
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 171
G/L Account
Description
Accoun Account Group t type
Functi onal Area
0052033000 Loss from Valuation of own Products
P
Income statement accounts
0052042000 Loss Price Differences (PRV)
P
Income statement accounts
0052043000 Loss Price Differences (PRY)
P
Income statement accounts
0052044000 Loss Price Differences Material Ledger (LKW)
P
Income statement accounts
0052045000 Loss Price Differences own Products (PRK)
P
Income statement accounts
0052046000 Loss Price Diff fm Lower Lev.own Mats ML (PRC)
P
Income statement accounts
0052051000 Loss Consumption of Consign. Mat (Raw & Trade)
P
Income statement accounts
0052053000 Loss Consumption of Consign. Mat (SF & F.Goods)
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0052070000 Loss from Production Variances
P
Income statement accounts
YB75
0052071000 Price Difference PRIV
P
Income statement accounts
YB75
0052072000 Price Difference QTYV
P
Income statement accounts
YB75
0052073000 Price Difference RSUV
P
Income statement accounts
YB75
YB20
CUSTOMER 172
Localization objects - per Business Priority
G/L Account
Description
Accoun Account Group t type
Functi onal Area
0052074000 Price Difference INPV
P
Income statement accounts
YB75
0052075000 Price Difference MXPV
P
Income statement accounts
YB75
0052076000 Price Difference OPPV
P
Income statement accounts
YB75
0052077000 Price Difference LSFV
P
Income statement accounts
YB75
0052078000 Price Difference REMV
P
Income statement accounts
YB75
0052079000 Price Difference SCRP
P
Income statement accounts
YB75
0052501000 Gain Inventory Variance (Raw & Trade)
P
Income statement accounts
0052503000 Gain Inventory Variance (SF & Finish Goods)
P
Income statement accounts
0052511000 Gain Inventory Transfer (Raw & Trade)
P
Income statement accounts
0052513000 Gain Inventory Transfer (SF & Finish Goods)
P
Income statement accounts
0052521000 Gain Consumption for Quality Control (Raw & Trade)
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0052523000 Gain Consumption for QM (SF & Finish Goods)
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 173
G/L Account
Description
Accoun Account Group t type
Functi onal Area
0052532000 Gain from Valuation own Products
P
Income statement accounts
0052542000 Gain Price Differences (PRV)
P
Income statement accounts
0052543000 Gain Price Differences (PRY)
P
Income statement accounts
0052544000 Gain Price Differences Material Ledger (LKW)
P
Income statement accounts
0052545000 Posterior Real Rate Activity Allocation (AUI)
P
Income statement accounts
0052551000 Gain Consumption of Consign. Mat (Raw & Trade)
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0052552000 Gain Consumption of Consign. Mat (SF & F.Goods)
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0052570000 Gain from Production Variances
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0054011000 Inventory Change Purch.Offset.Acct (Raw & Trade)
N
Income statement accounts
YB20
0054013000 Inventory change Purch.Offset.Acct (SF & F.Good)
N
Income statement accounts
YB20
0054053000 Inventory Change - Scrap own Products
P
Income statement accounts
0054083000 Inventory change - Cost of own Goods sold w/C.Elem
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
CUSTOMER 174
Localization objects - per Business Priority
G/L Account
4.
Description
Accoun Account Group t type
Functi onal Area
0054093000 Inventory Change - QM cons.own prod. w/ cst elem.
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0054200000 Inventory Change - Work in Progress
N
Income statement accounts
YB20
0054300000 Inventory change - Semi Finished goods
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0054400000 Inventory Change Finished Goods
P
Income statement accounts
YB20
0055100000 Plant Activity Production Order
P
Income statement accounts
0092101000 Settl.Material
S
Secondary costs / revenues
0092101500 Settl. Rework
S
Secondary costs / revenues
0094111000 Overhead Material
S
Secondary costs / revenues
0094112000 Overhead production
S
Secondary costs / revenues
0094301000 Machine hours 1
S
Secondary costs / revenues
0094302000 Machine hours 2
S
Secondary costs / revenues
094303000
S
Secondary costs / revenues
Setup Production
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 175
4.3.9 Extended Accounting for Trading/Manufacturing [local] (J67) 4.3.9.1
Configuration - On Premise
The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1. Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings. 2. Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by . 3. Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.
4.3.9.1.1 Cost Centers and Groups Cost Centers Use In this activity, the cost centers for manufacturing are created.
Prerequisites Cost center categories must be defined. The cost center standard hierarchy must be created. All Cost centers are assigned to controlling area A000.
CUSTOMER 176
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Master Data → Cost Center → Individual Processing → Create
Transaction Code
KS01
2.
On the Create Cost Center: Initial screen, provide the necessary data, and choose Master Data.
3.
On the Create Cost Center: Basic screen, provide the necessary data, and Save.
4.
Make the following sets of entries: All Cost Centers are valid from 01.01.2006 to 31.12.9999. Person CC- Hier. Responsi Cat. Area ble
Comp Code
Manufacturing 37101301 1 Manufacturing – 1
SAP
F
0001
3710
Manufacturing 37101302 2 Manufacturing – 2
SAP
F
0001
3710
37101401 QM
Quality management
SAP
H
0001
3710
37101501 R&D
Research and development
Cost Center
Name
Description
Purch & Store 1 Purch & Store 1 (NL) 37101201 (NL) Purch & Store 2 Purch & Store 2 (NL) 37101202 (NL) Plant & Maint 37101701 (NL)
0001 SAP
E
SAP
G
3710 0001 3710 0001
SAP
G
Plant & Maint (NL)
3710 0001
SAP
H
3710
Result You have created cost centers.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 177
Change Cost Center Groups - Assign CCs to AltH Use The new created cost centers are assigned to the cost center alternative hierarchies.
Prerequisites The cost center groups are already created with layer 0 activation (see building block J18: Basic Overhead Cost Controlling). Cost center group
Description
3710120
Stores
3710130
Operations
3710140
Quality Management
3710150
Research and Development
3710300
CCA Receiver Building and Maintenance Cost-Manuf
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Master Data → Cost Center Group → Change
Transaction Code
KSH2
2.
On the Change Cost Center Group: Initial screen, provide cost center group, and choose Hierarchy.
3.
On the Change Cost Center Group: Structure screen, choose Insert Cost Center.
4.
Provide the minimum and maximum values of the cost center range to be assigned.
5.
Make the following sets of entries: Cost Center Group
From Value
To Value
3710120
37101201
37101201
3710120
37101202
37101202
3710110
37101701
37101701
3710180
37101801
37101801
CUSTOMER 178
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Cost Center Group
From Value
To Value
3710130
37101301
37101301
3710130
37101302
37101302
3710140
37101401
37101401
3710150
37101501
37101501
3710300
37101201
37101201
3710300
37101202
37101202
3710300
37101701
37101701
3710300
37101301
37101301
3710300
37101302
37101302
3710300
37101401
37101401
3710300
37101501
37101501
3710300
37101101
37101101
3710300
37101601
37101601
3710300
37101602
37101602
Result The industry-specific cost centers are assigned to the cost center groups.
Assignment Functional Areas to Cost Centers Use In this step, you make additional settings for a functional area in cost centers. If you change the functional area, future postings are made using the new functional area. The change made to the functional area has no effect on postings that have already been made. You have to repost any documents that have already been posted. Changes to the functional area can lead to inconsistencies if documents are reversed. If subsequent to the functional area being changed, documents posted before this change are then reversed. The reversal document may in some cases be posted under the new functional area. How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 179
You should only carry out this procedure when testing the configuration. If you decide to carry it out in a productive system, do so with special care! Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Centers Individual Processing Change
Transaction Code
KS02
2.
If required, enter controlling area A000.
3.
On the Change Cost Center Initial screen, provide the cost center, and choose Enter.
4.
On the Change Cost Center: Basic screen, select the Basic Data tab, and enter the functional area in the Functional Area field.
5.
Save your entries.
6.
Provide the following data for SAP Best Practices cost center master data: Cost Center
Functional Area
37101301
YB20
37101302
YB20
37101401
YB40
37101501
YB50
37101201
YB20
37101202
YB20
37101701
YB40
Assign Profit Centers to Cost Centers Use Profit Centers must be assigned to all cost centers that exist in the client. Because of different scope selections, it is possible that some of the following listed cost centers do not exist or alternatively that cost centers exist that are not maintained in the list. If the listed cost center does not exist: no further action is necessary. If a cost center exists in the client, but is not listed below: add profit center depending on the scope. CUSTOMER 180
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Center Single Processing Change
Transaction Code
KS02
2.
On the Cost Center Change: Entry View screen, provide the necessary data, and choose Master Data.
3.
On the Change Cost Center: Basic screen, provide the necessary data, and save your entries. Key
Profit Center
37101301
YB110
37101302
YB111
37101401
YB600
37101501
YB600
37101201
YB110
37101202
YB111
37101701
YB700
Result Profit centers are assigned to all cost centers. CO Configuration with use of CO Master Data
Transfer Scheduled Activities from PP Use This activity must allow the transfer of scheduled activities planned in PP to cost center controlling. This step is only needed if production is in scope.
Prerequisites The planning scenario must be maintained by annual operations planning process (see 173 - SOP through Long Term Planning Transfer to LIS/PIS/Capacity). How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 181
If the annual operations planning process is not in scope, this step must be omitted. If the annual operations planning process is in scope, it is only possible to perform this step after the execution of the planning scenario. Because of the activation sequence, it could be the case that this building block has to be activated before. In this case, this step has to be done later (as soon as the longterm planning scenario is created).
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Planning → Plan Data Transfer → Transfer Scheduled Activities from PP
Transaction Code
OMIK
2.
On the Change View Control: Transferring Activity Reqs. To Cost Center Planning screen, select New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, provide following data, and choose Save. CO Area
Version Fi Fiscal Year
SOP MRP Longterm plng,
Version Plnng scenario
A000 2
Select
2
A000 2
+1
Select
2
A000 2
+2
Select
2
A000 2
+3
Select
2
A000 2
+4
Select
2
CUSTOMER 182
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Assessments Use Assessment is used to allocate primary and secondary costs. The original cost elements are combined, and allocated to the receiver cost center in an assessment cost element.
Define Assessment Actual Use The following cycles have been defined for the actual assessment: Cycle
Segment
Sender
Tracing Factor
Receiver
A37300 Manuf Ass. shared facility (ac
100
Cost Center
Cost center
Buildings & maintenance cost-M
37101750
Actual Statistical Key Figures
Cost Element 10_CE
group 3710300 (CCA Receiver Building and Maintenance Co)
Prerequisites Assessment cost elements (cost element type ‘42’) must be defined (see section “Create Secondary Cost Elements” in this document). Cost Element
Description
94201000
Build&Maint
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Actual Postings → Period-End Closing → Assessment → Maintain Assessment → Create Actual Assessment
Transaction Code
KSU1
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Initial screen, make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 183
Field name
3.
Description
User actions and values
Cycle
A37300
Start Date
01.01. current year
Comment
Example
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Header Data screen, enter the following data: Field name
Description User actions and values
Comment
Controlling Area
A000
Cycle
A37300
Start Date From
01.01. current year
Example
Start Date To
31.12. current year
Example
Text
Buildings & maintenance costM
Indicator: Iterative
Not Set
Object Currency
Set
4.
Choose Attach Segment.
5.
On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, under Segment Header Data, make the following entries:
6.
7.
Segment Name
Text
100
Buildings & maintenance cost-M
On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Segment header tab page, make the following entries: Segmen t
Assessment CEle
Sender rule
Share %
Actual value origin
100
94201000
Posted amounts
100
set
Segmen t
Receiver rule
var.portion type
scale neg. tracing fact.
100
Variable portions
Actual Statistical key figure
No scaling
On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Senders/Receivers tab page, make the following entries:
CUSTOMER 184
Localization objects - per Business Priority
8.
9.
10.
Segmen t
Sender Cost Center from
Sender Cost Element Group
Receiver Cost Center Group
100
37101750
10_CE
3710300
On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Sender Values tab page, make the following entries: Segmen t
Share %
Actual value origin
Version From
100
100,00
Set
0
On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on Receiver Tracing factor tab page, make the following entries Segmen t
Var.portion type Scale Neg. Tracing Factor
Stat. key. Fig.From - to
100
Actual Statistical key figure
1002
No scaling
On the Create Plan Assessment: Segment screen, on the Receiver Tracing Factor tab page, make the following entries: Segmen t
Receivers
100
37101101
100
Percent example only
100
37101201
100
Percent example only
100
37101202
100
Percent example only
100
37101301
100
Percent example only
100
37101302
100
Percent example only
100
37101401
100
Percent example only
100
37101501
100
Percent example only
100
37101601
100
Percent example only
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Portion/percent
Comment
CUSTOMER 185
11.
Segmen t
Receivers
Portion/percent
Comment
100
37101602
100
Percent example only
100
37101701
100
Percent example only
Save your entries.
Result You have defined the actual assessment cycle A37300.
4.3.9.1.2 Maintain Required Planning Data Set Planner Profile Use The following profile must be performed for activity type planning. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu
Accounting Controlling Planning Set Planner Profile
Transaction Code
KP04
On the Set Planner Profile screen, enter SAPALL and choose Enter.
Change Activity Type/Price Planning Actual Year Use The purpose of this activity is to plan the output of cost centers, and the prices.
Prerequisites Cost centers and activity types must have been created. CUSTOMER 186
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu
Accounting → Controlling Cost Center Accounting → Planning → Activity Output/Prices → Change
Transaction Code
KP26
On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Initial screen, enter the necessary data, and choose Overview Screen. Field name
Description User actions and values
Comment
Version
See following table
From Period
1
To Period
12
Fiscal year
Cost center
See following table
See following table
To Or group Activity Type (AT) To Or group Entry: Form-based 3.
Select
On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Overview screen, make the following entries, and save your entries.
For changing cost centers use drop down menu F2). Cost Center
AT Plan Distr Act . Key
37101301 1 How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Cap. Distr . Key
Price (fixed ) 20
(next combination or STRG + Price (Var ) 10
Price Unit
PP Versio Ind n
0000 1
1 0 CUSTOMER 187
Cost Center
AT Plan Distr Act . Key
Cap. Distr . Key
37101301 2
Price (fixed ) 60
37101301 3 37101301 11 37101301 1
20
37101301 2
60
37101301 3 37101301 11
Price (Var )
Price Unit
PP Versio Ind n 1
10
0000 1
1
30
0000 1
1
35
0000 1 0000 1
1
10
1
10
0000 1
1
30
0000 1
1
35
0000 1
0 0 0 2 2 2 2
The headings in the previous table have been abbreviated. The following table shows the technical names, and their descriptions: Heading
Description
Statement
CC
Cost Center
AT
Activity Type
Plan Act
Plan Activity
Distr. Key
Distribution Documentation for Application-specific Key Distribution Key
Cap.
Capacity
Price (fixed
Price (fixed
Fixed Price Per Unit of Measure in CO Area Currency
Price (var
Variable price
Variable Price Per Unit of Measure in CO Area Currency
Price Unit
Price Unit
Price Unit in Controlling Area Currency
PP Ind.
Plan Price Indicator
Indicator showing how the SAP system calculates the price of a business process or activity type for a cost center
CUSTOMER 188
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Save your entries.
Result You have now planned the activity outputs of the cost centers as well as the prices for this activity.
Change Activity Type / Price Planning Next (Budget) Year Use The purpose of this activity is to plan the activity output of cost centers, and the prices of those activities for the following year (budget year). Prerequisites Cost centers, and activity types must have been created.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Planning → Activity Output/Prices → Change
Transaction Code
KP26
On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Initial screen, enter the necessary data, and choose Overview Screen. Field name
Description User actions and values Comment
Version
See following table
From Period
1
To Period
12
Fiscal year
+ 1
Cost center
See following table
See following table
To Or group Activity Type (AT To How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 189
Field name
Description User actions and values Comment
Or group Entry: Form-based
Select
3.
On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Overview screen, enter the necessary data.
4.
Save your entries. You can use the example data from section Change Activity Type/Price Planning Actual Year. To copy the plan data from year to year you could also use transaction KP97 (Copy Planning).
4.3.9.1.3 Cost Centers and Groups Cost Centers Use In this activity, the cost centers for manufacturing are created. Prerequisites Cost center categories must be defined. The cost center standard hierarchy must be created. All Cost centers are assigned to controlling area A000. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu
Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Master Data → Cost Center → Individual Processing → Create
Transaction Code
KS01
On the Create Cost Center: Initial screen, make the following entries and choose Master Data: CUSTOMER
190
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field
User Action or Values
Controlling Area
A000
Cost Center
37101321
3.
On the Create Cost Center: Basic screen, choose the Basic data tab.
4.
Make the following sets of entries: All Cost Centers are valid from 01.01.2006 to 31.12.9999. Cost Center
Name
37101321 Services/ Consulting 5.
Description
Person CCResponsible Cat.
Hier. Area
Comp Code
Services/ Consulting
SAP
0001
3710
F
Save your entries.
Result You created cost centers.
Assigning Functional Areas and Profit Centers to Cost Centers Use In this step, you make additional settings for a functional area in cost centers. If you change the functional area, future postings are made using the new functional area. The change made to the functional area has no effect on postings that have already been made. You have to repost any documents that have already been posted. Changes to the functional area can lead to inconsistencies if documents are reversed. If subsequent to the functional area being changed, documents posted before this change are then reversed. The reversal document may in some cases be posted under the new functional area. You should only carry out this procedure when testing the configuration. If you decide to carry it out in a productive system, do so with special care! Profit Centers must be assigned to all cost centers, which exist in the client. Because of different scope selections, it is possible that some of the following listed cost centers do not exist or alternatively that cost centers exist which are not maintained in the list. If the listed cost center does not exist: no further actions necessary. How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 191
Cost centers exist in the client, but are not listed below: add profit center depending from the scope. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Centers Individual Processing Change
Transaction Code
KS02
2.
If required, in the Controlling Area field, enter A000 and choose Continue.
3.
On the Change Cost Center Initial screen, in the Cost center field, enter 37101321 and Enter.
4.
On the Change Cost Center: Basic screen, choose the Basic Data tab.
5.
Make the following entries: Field
User Action or Values
Functional Area
YB20
Profit Center
YB111
6.
In the field, enter YB20 and Enter.
7.
Save your entries.
Cost Center Groups: Values (Cost Centers) Use The purpose of this activity is to assign cost centers to the alternative cost center groups. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Center Group Change
Transaction Code
KSH2
On the Change Cost Center Group: Initial Screen, make the following entries and choose the Hierarchy button: CUSTOMER
192
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field
User Action or Values
Controlling Area
A000
Cost Center Group
3710130
3.
On the Change Cost Center Group: Structure screen, choose the Insert Cost Center button.
4.
In the left field, enter 37101321 and Enter.
5.
Save your entries.
4.3.9.1.4 Maintaining Required Planning Data Setting Planner Profile Use The following profile must be performed for activity type planning. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu
Accounting Controlling Planning Set Planner Profile
Transaction Code
KP04
On the Set Planner Profile dialog box, in the Planner profile field, enter SAPALL and choose Confirm Profile.
Changing Activity Type/Price Planning Actual Year Use The purpose of this activity is to plan the output of cost centers, and the prices.
Prerequisites Cost centers and activity types must exist.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 193
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu
Accounting → Controlling Cost Center Accounting → Planning → Activity Output/Prices → Change
Transaction Code
KP26
On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Initial screen, make the following entries and choose Overview Screen. Field name
3.
Description
User actions and values
Version
0
From Period
1
To Period
12
Fiscal year
Cost center
37101321
Activity Type (AT)
101
Entry: Form-based
Select
Comment
On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User actions and values
Distr. Key
1
Capacity
12000
Distr. Key
1
Price (Fixed)
50,00
Variable price
10,00
Price Unit
00001
Plan Price Indicator
1
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Repeat the above steps for the following data:
Comment
CUSTOMER 194
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Versi on
Cost Center
0
37101321
0
37101321
2 2 2
Activit y Type
Distr . Key
Cap.
Price (fixed )
Variabl e price
Price Unit
Plan Price Indicato r
102
1
1200 0
40
20
0000 1
1
8
1
1200 0
60
20
0000 1
1
101
1
1200 0
50
10
0000 1
1
102
1
1200 0
40
20
0000 1
1
8
1
1200 0
60
20
0000 1
1
37101321 37101321 37101321
Result You have now planned the activity outputs of the cost centers as well as the prices for this activity.
Changing Activity Type / Price Planning Next (Budget) Year Use The purpose of this activity is to plan the activity output of cost centers, and the prices of those activities for the following year (budget year). Prerequisites Cost centers, and activity types must have been created. Procedure Repeat the steps in the task, increasing the value in the Fiscal Year field by 1 (for example, change 2015 to 2016).
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 195
4.3.9.1.5 Assessments Use Assessment is used to allocate primary and secondary costs. The original cost elements are combined and allocated to the receiver cost center in an assessment cost element.
Defining Assessment Plan Use The following cycles have been defined for the plan assessment: Cycle
Segment
Sender
Tracing Factor
YP3710 Assessment Quality cost (plan)
NL- Quality costs for operations
37101401 Fixed Percentages
Receiver Cost center group 130 (manufacturing cost centers)
Prerequisites Assessment cost elements (cost element type 42) must be defined. Cost Element
Description
94202000
Quality Costs
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Planning → Allocations → Assessment → Define Assessment
Transaction Code
KSU7
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Initial screen, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User actions and values
Cycle
YP3710
Start Date
01.01. current year
Comment
CUSTOMER 196
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Header Data screen, enter the following data: Field name
Description User actions and values
Comment
Controlling Area
A000
Cycle
YP3710
Start Date From
01.01. current year
Start Date To
31.12. current year
Text
Assessment quality cost (plan)
Indicator: Iterative
Not Set
Object Currency
Not Set
Version
Version
2
4.
Choose Attach Segment.
5.
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, under Segment Header Data, make the following entries:
6.
7.
8.
9.
Segment Name
Text
100
Quality costs for operations
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Segment header tab, make the following entries: Segment
Assessment CEle
Sender rule
Share %
Plan value origin
100
94202000
Posted amounts
50,00
set
Segment
Receiver rule
100
Fixed Percentages
var.portion type
Scale neg. tracing fact.
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Senders/Receivers tab, make the following entries: Segment Sender Cost Center from
Sender Cost Element Group
Receiver Cost Center Group
100
10_CE
3710130
37101401
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Sender Values tab, make the following entries: Segment
Share %
Plan value origin
Version From
100
50,00
Set
2
On the Create Plan Assessment: Segment screen, on the Receiver Tracing Factor tab, make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 197
10.
Segment
Receivers
Portion/percent
Comment
100
37101301
50
Percent example only
100
37101302
50
Percent example only
Save your entries.
Result You defined the plan assessment cycle YP3710.
Defining Assessment Actual Use The following cycles have been defined for the actual assessment: Cycle
Segment
Sender
Tracing Factor
YA3710
100
Assessment Quality cost (actual)
Quality costs for operations
37101401 Fixed Percentages
Receiver Cost center group 130 (manufacturing cost centers)
Prerequisites Assessment cost elements (cost element type 42) must be defined. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Actual Postings → Period-End Closing → Assessment → Maintain Assessment → Create Actual Assessment
Transaction Code
KSU1
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Initial screen, make the following entries: Field name Cycle
Description
User actions and values
Comment
YA3710
CUSTOMER 198
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description
Start Date 3.
User actions and values
Comment
01.01. current year
Example
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Header Data screen, enter the following data: Field name
Description
User actions and values
Comment
Controlling Area
A000
Cycle
YA3710
Start Date From
01.01. current year
Example
Start Date To
31.12. current year
Example
Text
Ass. quality cost (actual)
Indicator: Iterative
Not Set
Object Currency
Set
4.
Choose Attach Segment.
5.
On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, under segment header data, make the following entries:
6.
7.
8.
Segment Name
Text
100
Quality costs for operations
On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Segment header tab, make the following entries: Segment
Assessment CEle
Sender rule
Share %
Actual value origin
100
94202000
Posted amounts
50,00
set
Segment
Receiver rule
100
Fixed Percentages
var.portion type
Scale neg. tracing fact.
On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Senders/Receivers tab, make the following entries: Segment Sender Cost Center From
Sender Cost Element Group
Receiver Cost Center Group
100
10_CE
3710130
37101401
On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Sender Values tab, make the following entries: Segment
Share %
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Actual value origin
Version From CUSTOMER 199
100 9.
10.
50,00
Set
0
On the Create Actual Assessment: Segment screen, on the Receiver Tracing Factor tab, make the following entries: Segment
Receivers
Portion/percent
Comment
100
37101301
50
Percent example only
100
37101302
50
Percent example only
Save your entries.
Result You have defined the actual assessment cycle YA3710.
4.3.9.1.6 Manual Rework If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Remarks
Add Cost element category to GL account
Yes
No
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Elements (COAr dependent) Select Cost Elements(CoAdependent) on Mast.data 1
Create Centers and Cost centers groups
Yes
No
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost centers and Cost centers group
CUSTOMER 200
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Change Activity Yes Type/Price Planning actual year
Manual action in target system / client required
Remarks
No
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost center/activity type
CO planner profile: Delete/change profile items
Yes
No
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Planner Profiles on Planning layouts
In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: 1. Logon to the source system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section. 3. Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. 4. The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. Remark: Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1. Logon to the target system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
4.3.9.1.7 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 201
Transaction Code
OKE7
2.
On the Transport Controlling settings.
3.
Select Objects as per table given above and click Include in Request.
4.
On pop-up window Prompt for Workbench Request, select the request then choose Continue E n t e r .
5.
Settings are included into the transport requests.
4.3.10
Activate Material Ledger (J72)
4.3.10.1
Configuration - On Premise
The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1. Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings. 2. Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace, and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by . 3. Additional settings that must be made covered either by automation, or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.
4.3.10.1.1 Enterprise Structure: Define Valuation Level 1.
2.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
SPRO
IMG Menu
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Enterprise Structure Definition Logistics - General Define Valuation Level
Make sure that Valuation level is a plant.
CUSTOMER 202
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.3.10.1.2 Controlling Activate Valuation Areas for Material Ledger 1.
2.
3.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
OMX1
IMG Menu
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Controlling General Controlling Multiple Valuation Approaches/Transfer Prices Basic Settings -> Check Material Ledger Settings ->Activate Valuation Areas for Material Ledger Activate Material Ledger
On the Change View "Activation of Material Ledger": Overview screen, make the following settings: Valuation Area
Company Code
ML Act.
Price Deter.
Price Det. Binding in Val Area
3710
3710
Select
2
Select
Save your settings
Assign Currency Types to Material Ledger Type 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
OMX2
IMG Menu*
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Controlling General Controlling -> Multiple Valuation Approaches/Transfer Prices -> Basic Settings -> Check Material Ledger Settings Assign Currency Types to Material Ledger Type
2.
On the Change View "Define material ledger type": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following settings:
4.
ML Type
CT from FI
CO Crcy Typ
Manual
Description
0000
Select
Select
Blank
Standard: CT from FI & Co.
Save your settings. Use the transaction code if the IMG path is not available.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 203
Assign Material Ledger Type 0000 to Valuation Area 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
OMX3
IMG Menu*
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Controlling General Controlling -> Multiple Valuation Approaches/Transfer Prices Basic Settings Check Material Ledger Settings Assign Material Ledger Types to Valuation Area
2.
On the Change View "Assignment of Material Ledger Types to Valuation Areas": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following settings:
4.
Valuation Area
Mat. ledger type
3710
0000
Save your settings. Use the transaction code if the IMG path is not available.
Define Material Update Structure 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
SPRO
IMG Menu
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Controlling Product Cost Controlling Actual Costing / Material Ledger Material Update Define Material Update Structure
2.
On the Change View "Define material update structure": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following settings: MUS
Name
0001
Standard
4.
Save your settings.
5.
Select the new entry and in the left pane, double click Material update structure.
6.
On the Change View "Maintain material update structure": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
7.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following settings: CUSTOMER
204
Localization objects - per Business Priority
8.
PCat
MTG
Cat
B+
Blank
ZU
V+
Blank
VN
Save your settings
Assign Material Update Structure 0001 to a Valuation Area 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
SPRO
IMG Menu
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Controlling Product Cost Controlling Actual Costing / Material Ledger Material Update Assign Material Update Structure to a Valuation Area
2.
On the Change View "Assign material update structure to a valuation area": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following settings:
4.
ValA
Matl Update Struct.
3710
0001
Save your settings.
4.3.10.1.3 Materials Management: Maintain Number Ranges for Material Ledger Documents 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
SPRO
IMG Menu
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Materials Management Valuation and Account Assignment Maintain Number Ranges for Material Ledger Documents
2.
On the Range Maintenance: Material ledger doc screen, choose Change Intervals.
3.
On the Maintain Intervals: Material ledger doc screen, make the following entries: Number Range
From No.
To No.
Extern
01
1000000000
1999999999
no
03
3000000000
3999999999
no
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 205
06
6000000000
6999999999
no
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back F 3 .
6.
Choose Change NR Status.
7.
On the Maintain Intervals: Material ledger doc screen, create the following entries:
8.
No
NR Status
01
0
03
0
06
0
Save your entries.
4.3.10.1.4 Run Report SAPRCKM_OBLIGATORY_SETTINGS 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
2.
SE38
On the ABAP Editor: Initial Screen, in the Program field, enter SAPRCKM_OBLIGATORY_SETTINGS and choose Execute.
4.3.10.1.5 Production Startup of Material Ledger Use In this activity, you execute production startup for the material ledger. Prerequisites Finalize the currency settings for CO and FI before executing this step. Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
2.
CKMSTART
On the Production Startup of Mat. Ledger screen, make the following entries: Field
User Action or Values
Plant
3710
Comments
CUSTOMER 206
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
Background processing
Deselect
Test run
Deselect
Choose Execute.
4.3.10.2 Manual Rework If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure, additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below: Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Run Report SAPRCKM_OBLIGATORY_SETTINGS
No
Yes
Production Start of Material Ledger
No
Yes
Remarks
In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: 1. Logon to the source system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section. 3. Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. 4. The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. 5. Remark: Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1. Logon to the target system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 207
4.3.11
Credit Management [local] (BD8)
4.3.11.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.3.11.1.1 Maintain Pricing Procedures Use This activity checks the control data settings for update and automatic credit check. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define and Assign Pricing Procedures Maintain pricing procedures
Transaction Code
V/08
2.
Choose Procedures row Y37101.
3.
Double click Control Data in Dialog Structure.
4.
In Change View “Control Data“: Overview screen. Change the following entry: Step
Step SuTot Descri ption
CalTy Description SuTot pe
900
Total Amou nt
4
5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose
A
Carry over price to KOMP-CMPRE (credit price)
Back.
CUSTOMER 208
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Result Usually, the net value plus taxes is used. This way the system is determined to use subtotal for credit pricing. The credit price is stored in field VBAP-CMPRE and used for update and credit check.
4.3.11.1.2 Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting Assigning Permitted Credit Control Areas to Company Code Use In this activity, you assign a credit control area to a company code. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Supply Chain Management → Credit Management → Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting and Sales and Distribution Integration with Accounts Receivables Accounting Assign Permitted Credit Control Areas to Company Code
Transaction Code
SM30 (Customizing Object T001CM)
2.
On the Change View “Permitted Credit Control Areas per Company Code”: Overview screen choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries: Company Code
Cred.contr.area
3710
A000
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
Result The credit control area is assigned to the company code.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 209
4.3.12 Sample Master Data for SAP Credit Management Processing [local] (BN8) 4.3.12.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.3.12.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 1.
2.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Settlement Management Environment Master Data Maintain Business Partner
Transaction code
BP
On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100005
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
KUNDE5
Form-of-Address Key
0003
Name 1 of organization
Inlandskunde NL 5
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
UKM000
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
BP role
FLCU00
BP Role Category
UKM000
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ING
IBAN (International Bank Account Number) Bank account
0005544999
CUSTOMER 210
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Industry System
0001
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B01
City
Apeldoorn
City postal code
7322 HR
Street
Korfstraat
House Number
2
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
0000000002
Language Key
NL
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
09990 4513-0
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
09990 25420-0
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
19000101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
19000101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 211
Field Name
Entry Value
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
I
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
DE
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
009
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
12100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
0001
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
1010-CUST5
Accounting clerk
01
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
01
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
Amsterdam
Delivery Priority
02
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
01
Terms of Payment Key
0004
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG
Partner counter
000
Default Partner
X
CUSTOMER 212
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
Save your entries.
4.3.12.1.2 Adding Credit Management Data in BP 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Settlement Management Environment Master Data Maintain Business Partner
Transaction code
BP
2.
On the Customer Master Data screen, select Business Partner is 37100005 and select the business role is UKM0000 SAP Credit Management.
3.
Choose Display Change F 6 to change the BP.
4.
Choose the Credit Profile tab.
5.
Create the following settings. Field Name
Entry Value
Rules
STANDARD
Check Rule
01
6.
Choose Credit Segment Data.
7.
Create the following settings.
8.
Field Name
Entry Value
Credit Segment
1000
Limit Defined
6
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 213
4.3.13
Asset Accounting [local] (J49)
4.3.13.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.3.13.1.1 Organizational Structures Basic Settings Check Country-Specific Settings Use The system uses the country-specific data in each company code that agrees with the country in the definition of the FI company code (FI Customizing). SAP provides the appropriate default settings for most countries. The standard defaults must be checked for the selected country. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Organizational Structures Check Country-Specific Settings
Transaction Code
OA08
2.
On the Change View: Asset Accounting: Country Information: Overview screen, select the relevant country NL and choose Details.
3.
On the Change View: Asset Accounting: Country Information: Details screen, check the following entries for your country (country key NL in this example). Field Name
Description User action and values
Country currency
EUR
Max. LVA amount: for posting
1.000,00
Net book value for dep. change
Comment
No entry
CUSTOMER 214
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
4.
Description User action and values
Comment
Post net book value
No selection
Capitalize AuC w/o down payment
No selection
Save your entries.
Result The country-specific settings are verified.
Chart of Depreciation Use A chart of depreciation is a directory of depreciation areas arranged according to business requirements. Each chart of depreciation contains the rules for the evaluation of assets that are valid in a specific country or economic area. Each company code defined in Asset Accounting must refer to a chart of depreciation.
Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation (Define Chart of Depreciation) Use SAP provides country-specific charts of depreciation with predefined depreciation areas (for example, 0DE for Germany). These charts of depreciation are only references for customer charts of depreciation and therefore cannot be used directly. When you create your own chart of depreciation, you must copy a reference chart of depreciation. When you create a chart of depreciation, the system copies all the depreciation areas from the standard chart of depreciation that you use as a reference. You must delete any depreciation areas you do not need from your chart of depreciation. The chart of depreciation 3710 has been created as a copy of the chart of depreciation 0DE.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 215
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Organizational Structures Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation/Depreciation Areas
Transaction Code
EC08
2.
If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation.
3.
On the Organizational object Chart of depreciation screen, choose copy org. object F6 .
4.
In the Copy dialog box, make the following entries, and choose Enter: Field Name
5.
Description
User action and values
From Chart of dep.
1010
To Chart of dep.
3710
Comment
Save your entries.
Result The chart of depreciation has been created.
Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation (Copy/Delete Depreciation Areas) Use You adjust scope and descriptions of the depreciation areas that were copied from the standard depreciation plan. The following depreciation areas are defined for chart of depreciation 3710: Depreciation Area
Description
01
Local GAAP
15
Local Tax
31
Local GAAP in Group Currency
32
IFRS in local currency
33
IFRS in group currency
CUSTOMER 216
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Use this procedure only if you are required to create depreciation areas or delete any depreciation area that is not relevant for your business. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Organizational Structures Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation/Depreciation Areas
Transaction Code
OADB
2.
If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Copy/Delete Depreciation Areas.
3.
In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field Name
Description
Chart of Depreciation
User action and values
Comment
3710
4.
To copy a depreciation area as a new one, in the Change View: Define Depreciation Areas: Overview dialog box, select the depreciation area entries, and choose Copy As… (F6).
5.
On the Change View Define Depreciation Areas: Details of Selected Set screen, change the Depre. area as needed, and choose Enter.
6.
To delete depreciation areas, in the Change View: Define Depreciation Areas: Overview dialog box, select the depreciation area entries, and choose Delete (Shift + F2).
7.
Save your entries.
Result The desired depreciation areas exist.
Define Depreciation Areas Use In this step, you define your depreciation areas. The depreciation areas used in the chart of depreciation 3710 have the following functions: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 217
Local GAAP (01) This area is the master area. Transactions for this depreciation area are posted directly to the general ledger. Local Tax (15) This area manages the special tax balance at the period end for the inventory valuation, and price planning. Local GAAP in Group Currency (31) This area is required to manage the parallel (group) currency set up at the general ledger level in financial accounting from the point of view of asset accounting. All values, and parameters have to be adapted from area 01 without changes. IFRS in Local Currency (32) IFRS in Group Currency (33)
Depreciation areas that are not needed should already have been deleted from the chart of depreciation, and new depreciation areas should have been defined, see section Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation (Define Depreciation Areas) above.
Prerequisites Set chart of depreciation 3710 with transaction OAPL.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Depreciation Areas Define Depreciation Areas
Transaction Code
OADB
2.
If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Define Depreciation Areas.
3.
If the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box appears, in the Work Area field, enter 3710 and choose Enter.
4.
On the Change View: "Define Depreciation Areas": Overview screen, select the depreciation area and choose Details. The required depreciation areas should already exist. If a depreciation area is missing, add the new depreciation area by copying it from an existing area. CUSTOMER
218
Localization objects - per Business Priority
5.
On the Change View: Define Depreciation Areas: Details screen, make the following entries: Depr . area
Real Depr. Area
Post to G/L
Acc.
Target Princ. Ledge r Group
1
1
LG
15
0
31
32 33
Diff. depr . Area
Cross Syst, Depr: Area
Acq. Net Value Book Value
Inv. Reval Grant .
2L
+
+
0
*
LG
2L
+
+
0
*
0
LG
2L
+
+
0
*
1
LG
0L
+
+
0
0
0
LG
0L
+
+
0
0
Complete assignment to accounting principle and target ledger group is required for all depreciation areas. Depr. area
Ord. Depr.
Special Depr.
Unpl. Depr.
Transf. Reserv.
Interest
Reval. ord. Depr.
1
-
0
-
0
0
*
15
-
0
-
0
0
*
31
-
0
-
0
0
*
32
-
0
-
0
0
0
33
-
0
-
0
0
0
Posting in G/L: 0 = Area Does Not Post 1 = Area Posts in Real Time 3 = Area Posts Depreciation Only 4 = Area Posts APC in Real Time, Depreciation Periodically Signs for Value Maintenance: + = Only Positive Values or Zero Allowed - = Only Negative Values or Zero Allowed 0 = No Values Allowed * = All Values Allowed 6.
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 219
Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation (Specify Description of Chart of Depreciation) Use In this activity, you specify the description for the chart of depreciation.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation option: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Organizational Structures Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation/Depreciation Areas
Transaction Code
OAP4
2.
If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Specify Description of Chart of Depreciation.
3.
On the Change View Chart of depreciation: Specify name: Overview screen, make the following entries and choose Enter. Field Name
Description
ChDep
Chart of 3710 depreciation
Description 4.
User action and values
Comment
Chart of Depreciation 3710
Example
Save your entries.
Result The description of the new chart of depreciation is defined.
Assign Chart of Depreciation to Company Code Use When you assign a chart of depreciation, you define a company code for Asset Accounting. The chart of depreciation 3710 has been assigned to the company code 3710.
CUSTOMER 220
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Prerequisites The company code must have been defined in Financial Accounting. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Organizational Structures Assign Chart of Depreciation to Company Code
Transaction Code
OAOB
On the Change View "Maintain company code in Asset Accounting": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User action and values
CoCd
Company Code
3710
Chrt dep
Chart of Depreciation
3710
Comment
Save your entries.
Result The chart of depreciation 3710 has been assigned to company code 3710.
Specify Number Assignment across Company Codes Use In this step, you define the company code for the assignment of the main asset number. In the FI-AA application, you can assign the main asset number also across company codes. Therefore, for every company code, you can determine from which (other) company code the number assignment is to be carried out. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 221
2.
3.
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Organizational Structures Specify Number Assignment Across Company Codes
Transaction Code
AO11
On the Change View “FI-AA: "Assignmt. to company code providing number range" screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User action and values
CoCd
Company Code
3710
No.CoCd
Company Code for Number Assignment
3710
Comment
Save your entries.
Result You have determined your own company code to be used for company code number assignment
Asset Classes Use Asset classes are the most important structuring elements for fixed assets. You can define any number of asset classes in the system. You can use them to structure your fixed assets according to different criteria. Asset classes are defined on client level. For further details see Configuration Guide for Building Block J48 (NL).
Define Number Range Interval (Asset Classes) Use An asset number uniquely identifies an asset. It always consists of a main asset number, and an asset sub number. Numbers can be assigned in the system externally or internally. With external number assignment, the user is responsible for assigning the numbers. The system displays only the defined number range interval, and issues an error CUSTOMER 222
Localization objects - per Business Priority
message if a number has already been assigned. With internal number assignment, the system assigns numbers sequentially. Most asset classes are defined to use internal number assignment as listed below. If required, the asset classes could be changed to use number ranges 01-09 with external number assignment for creation of legacy assets. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Organizational Structures Asset Classes Define Number Range Interval
Transaction Code
AS08
2.
On the Range Maintenance: Asset Number screen, in the Company code field, enter 3710.
3.
Choose the Change intervals button.
4.
On the Interval Maintenance: Number Range Object Asset Number, Subobject 3710 screen, make the following entries:
5.
No
From No.
To Number
Ext.
01
000000100000
000000199999
02
000000200000
000000299999
03
000000300000
000000399999
04
000000400000
000000499999
05
000000500000
000000599999
06
000000600000
000000699999
07
000000700000
000000799999
08
000000800000
000000899999
09
000000900000
000000999999
90
A
D
X
99
000000000001
000000099999
X
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 223
Depreciation Area Configure Asset Value Display Use In this step, you specify the short texts the system displays for the value fields in the asset value display transaction. You can specify particular value field texts for particular depreciation areas. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Information System Configure Asset Value Display
Transaction Code
OAWT
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, select Change short texts of value fields.
3.
On the Display View Depreciation areas: Overview screen, select the depreciation area 1.
4.
Choose Value field texts in the dialog structure.
5.
Make the following entries on the Change View Value field texts: Overview screen. No
Short Name
Description
0
APC
Acquisition value
1
APC
Acquisition value
2
Inv.supprt
Investment support
3
Revaluat.
Revaluation
11
Transf.res
Transfer reserve
12
Ord. dep.
Ordinary deprec.
13
Spec.dep.
Special depreciation
14
Unplnd.dep
Unplanned dep.
20
Revaluat.
Revaluation ord.dep.
21
Write-up
Write-up
30
Interest
Interest
31
Reserves
Trsfr cum.reserves
CUSTOMER 224
Localization objects - per Business Priority
No
Short Name
Description
32
Ord. dep.
Accum. ord. depr.
33
Spec.dep.
Cum.special dep.
34
Unplnd.dep
Cum.unplanned dep.
90
Net bk.val
Net book value
6.
Repeat the steps in the previous table for all depreciation areas.
7.
Save your entries.
Define Depreciation Area for Quantity Update Use In this activity, you specify which depreciation area you want to use for updating quantities. This setting is especially relevant if you are using collective low-value assets. In the standard system (that is, as long as you do not make any settings to the contrary), the system uses depreciation area 01 for the quantity update. This step ensures that the default setting is available. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Depreciation Areas Define Depreciation Area for Quantity Update
Transaction Code
S_EEI_69000025
2.
On the Determine Work Area: Entry screen, select Chart of Depreciation 3710.
3.
On the Change View "Setting Depreciation Area for Quantity Update": Overview screen, make sure that the Update Quantity indicator is active for Depreciation Area 1 Local GAAP.
4.
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 225
Define Depreciation Areas (Specify Area Type) Use Depreciation areas are assigned to a type, which describes the primary purpose of the depreciation area. When you create a chart of depreciation, the system copies this typing from the reference chart of depreciation.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Depreciation Areas Define Depreciation Areas
Transaction Code
OADC
2.
If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Specify Area Type.
3.
On the Change View "Actual depreciation areas: area type": Overview screen, make the following entries:
4.
Area Name of Depreciation Area
Type Description
01
Local GAAP
01
Valuation for trade bal. sheet
15
Local Tax
03
Valuation for tax bal. sheet (diff. from trade bal. sheet)
31
Local GAAP in Group Currency
01
Valuation for trade bal.sheet
32
IFRS in Local Currency
06
Group valuation
33
IFRS in Group Currency
06
Group valuation
Save your entries.
4.3.13.1.2 Integration with the General Ledger Use The system settings and entries you make in this section are required for the integration of Asset Accounting with the General Ledger:
CUSTOMER 226
Localization objects - per Business Priority
1. Depreciation areas that post depreciation/APC automatically to the General Ledger 2. G/L accounts that are relevant for Asset Accounting (reconciliation accounts and other accounts that are posted to automatically) 3. Screen layout controls for G/L accounts 4. Default input tax indicator for transactions not subject to tax 5. Specifications for periodic posting of depreciation to the General Ledger. Prerequisites The depreciation areas that post their APC transactions and/or depreciation to the general ledger are specified as described in the previous sections.
Specify Financial Statement Version for Asset Reports Use In this step, you determine for each depreciation area which financial statement version the system is to use as a default. This default applies when the financial statement version is contained in the sort version used for a given report. In company code 3710, financial statement version 3730 has been assigned to all depreciation areas.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Integration with General Ledger Accounting Specify Financial Statement Version for Asset Reports
Transaction Code
OAYN
2.
On the Change View: "Company code selection": Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Assign financial statement version.
4.
On the Change View: "Assign financial statement version": Overview screen, make the following entries: Company Code
Area
Financial Statement Version
3710
01
3730
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 227
5.
3710
15
3730
3710
31
3730
3710
32
3730
3710
33
3730
Save your entries.
Specify Document Type for Posting of Depreciation Use To post the depreciation with the depreciation posting run, you have to specify a document type and assign it to the company code. This document type must use internal number assignment and be used exclusively by the depreciation posting run. Document type AF is assigned to company code 3710. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Integration with General Ledger Accounting Post Depreciation to General Ledger Accounting Specify Document Type for Posting of Depreciation
Transaction Code
AO71
2.
If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Specify Document Type for Posting of Depreciation.
3.
On the Change View “FI-AA: “Document Type for posting depreciation”: Overview screen, make the following entries:
4.
Field Name
Description
User action and values
CoCode
Company Code
3710
Doc.type
Document Type
AF
Comment
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 228
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Specify Intervals and Posting Rules Use In this step, you define the posting rules for the depreciation areas that post depreciation values to Financial Accounting.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Integration with General Ledger Accounting Post Depreciation to General Ledger Accounting Specify Intervals and Posting Rules
Transaction Code
OAYR
2.
On the Change View "Company code selection": Overview screen, select the Company Code 3710.
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Posting rules.
4.
On the Change View “Posting rules”: Overview screen, select the depreciation area, and choose Details.
5.
On the Change View "Posting rules": Details screen, make the following entries: Field Name
6.
User action and values
Comment
Depreciation area
01
Select
Monthly posting
X
Activate
Post revaluation
X
Select
User action and values
Comment
Depreciation area
32
Select
Monthly posting
X
Activate
Make the following entries: Field Name
7.
Description
Description
Save your entries.
Result The following settings have been made for company code 3710:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 229
Deprec. Area
Monthly Posting
01 32
Annual Posting
Period Interval
Post revaluation
X
001 (monthly)
X
X
001 (monthly)
Specify Account Assignment Types for Account Assignment Objects Use In this step, you assign account assignment types to the account assignment objects.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Additional Account Assignment Objects Specify Account Assignment Types for Account Assignment Objects
Transaction Code
ACSET
2.
On the Company Code: Overview screen, select the Company Code 3710.
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click the Depreciation Area.
4.
On the Display View “Depreciation Area” Overview screen, select the depreciation area listed in the following table.
5.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Account Assignment Objects.
6.
On the Account Assignment Objects Overview screen, make the following entries for account assignment type:
7.
Company Code
Depr. Area
Acct.Asgn . Object
Trans. Type
Acct Assignmnt Type
Acc.Assgnt
3710
01
KOSTL
*
01 APC Value Posting
X
3710
01
KOSTL
*
02 Depreciation Run
X
3710
32
KOSTL
*
X
3710
32
KOSTL
*
X
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 230
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Result In chart of depreciation 3710, it is possible to post stock value with Cost Center in Area 01.
4.3.13.1.3 General Valuation Use In this section, you make all configurations that concern the valuation of fixed assets.
Depreciation Areas Specify Transfer of APC Values Use In this step, you specify the reference depreciation area that provides values to another depreciation area. The system transfers the posting amounts of any transactions that affect acquisition and production costs (APC) from this area to the dependent area. You can determine whether this transfer is mandatory or optional. If you only define optional transfer, then you can enter the posting values for that dependent depreciation area during posting. These transfer rules ensure that certain depreciation areas manage identical APC values. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Depreciation Areas Specify Transfer of APC Values
Transaction Code
OABC
On the Change View "Depreciation areas: Rules for value takeover": Overview screen, make the following entries: Chart of Depreciation
Depreciation Area
ValAd
3710
01
00
3710
15
01
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Ident.
CUSTOMER 231
3.
Chart of Depreciation
Depreciation Area
ValAd
Ident.
3710
31
01
X
3710
32
00
3710
33
32
x
Save your entries.
Specify Transfer of Depreciation Terms Use In this step, you specify how the depreciation terms for a depreciation area are adopted from another depreciation area. You can specify if the adoption of depreciation terms is optional or mandatory. If you specify an optional transfer, then you can change the proposed depreciation terms of the dependent depreciation area in the asset master record. In case of a mandatory transfer, you cannot maintain any depreciation terms of the dependent depreciation area in the asset master record. In this way, you can ensure that depreciation is uniform in certain depreciation areas. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Depreciation Areas Specify Transfer of Depreciation Terms
Transaction Code
OABD
On the Change View "Depreciation areas: Rules for takeover of deprec. terms": screen, make the following entries: Chart of Depreciation
Depreciation Area
TTr (Terms Transfer)
3710
01
00
3710
15
3710
31
01
3710
32
00
3710
33
32
Identical
X
x
Save your entries. CUSTOMER
232
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Determine Depreciation Areas in the Asset Class Use In this step, you define asset classes per chart of depreciation. You can also determine default depreciation terms (depreciation key and useful life) for each depreciation area used in your asset classes. Depending on the definition in the screen layout control determined here as well, these depreciation terms are offered either as optional or mandatory defaults when you create an asset master record. The following list only shows the default values for the depreciation key and useful life in depreciation areas 01 and 20. The default values for the remaining depreciation areas are not listed, since they are the same as the default values for depreciation area 01. Some asset classes might have been set up without default values. When you create a fixed asset for one of those asset classes, you have to enter the depreciation key and useful life. The asset class defaults always have to be revised when the system is set up. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Determine Depreciation Areas in the Asset Class
Transaction Code
OAYZ
2.
On the Change View "Asset class": Overview screen, select an asset class.
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Depreciation areas.
4.
On the Change View "Depreciation areas": Overview screen, enter the following data for the asset classes: Chart of Depreciatio n
Asset Class
Depreciat Depreciatio ion Area n Key
3710
1000
01
0000
2000
3710
1000
15
0000
2000
3710
1000
31
0000
2000
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Planned Useful Life in Years (Use)
Planned Useful Life in Periods (Per)
Layout
CUSTOMER 233
Chart of Depreciatio n
Asset Class
Depreciat Depreciatio ion Area n Key
Planned Useful Life in Years (Use)
3710
1000
32
0000
2000
3710
1000
33
0000
2000
3710
1100
01
LINS
025
2000
3710
1100
15
LINS
025
2000
3710
1100
31
LINS
025
2000
3710
1100
32
LINS
025
2000
3710
1100
33
LINS
025
2000
3710
1200
01
3710
1200
15
3710
1200
31
3710
1200
32
3710
1200
33
3710
1500
01
3710
1500
15
3710
1500
31
3710
1500
32
3710
1500
33
3710
2000
01
LINS
008
2000
3710
2000
15
LINS
008
2000
3710
2000
31
LINS
008
2000
3710
2000
32
LINS
008
2000
3710
2000
33
LINS
008
2000
3710
3000
01
LINS
2000
3710
3000
15
LINS
2000
3710
3000
31
LINS
2000
3710
3000
32
LINS
2000
3710
3000
33
LINS
2000
3710
3100
01
LINS
006
Planned Useful Life in Periods (Per)
Layout
2000
CUSTOMER 234
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Chart of Depreciatio n
Asset Class
Depreciat Depreciatio ion Area n Key
Planned Useful Life in Years (Use)
3710
3100
15
LINS
006
2000
3710
3100
31
LINS
006
2000
3710
3100
32
LINS
006
2000
3710
3100
33
LINS
006
2000
3710
3200
01
LINS
003
2000
3710
3200
15
LINS
003
2000
3710
3200
31
LINS
003
2000
3710
3200
32
LINS
003
2000
3710
3200
33
LINS
003
2000
3710
3210
01
LINS
003
2000
3710
3210
15
LINS
003
2000
3710
3210
31
LINS
003
2000
3710
3210
32
LINS
003
2000
3710
3210
33
LINS
003
2000
3710
4000
01
0000
2000
3710
4000
15
0000
2000
3710
4000
31
0000
2000
3710
4000
32
0000
2000
3710
4000
33
0000
2000
3710
4001
01
0000
2000
3710
4001
15
0000
2000
3710
4001
31
0000
2000
3710
4001
32
0000
2000
3710
4001
33
0000
2000
3710
5000
01
GWG
1
2000
3710
5000
15
GWG
1
2000
3710
5000
31
GWG
1
2000
3710
5000
32
GWG
1
2000
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Planned Useful Life in Periods (Per)
Layout
CUSTOMER 235
5.
Chart of Depreciatio n
Asset Class
Depreciat Depreciatio ion Area n Key
Planned Useful Life in Years (Use)
3710
5000
33
GWG
3710
6000
01
LINS
2000
3710
6000
15
LINS
2000
3710
6000
31
LINS
2000
3710
6000
32
LINS
2000
3710
6000
33
LINS
2000
3710
6100
01
LINS
2000
3710
6100
15
LINS
2000
3710
6100
31
LINS
2000
3710
6100
32
LINS
2000
3710
6100
33
LINS
2000
3710
8200
01
LINS
005
2000
3710
8200
15
LINS
015
2000
3710
8200
31
LINS
005
2000
3710
8200
32
0000
2000
3710
8200
33
0000
2000
3710
8300
01
LINS
2000
3710
8300
15
LINS
2000
3710
8300
31
LINS
3710
8300
32
LINS
3710
8300
33
LINS
3710
9000
01
3710
9000
15
3710
9000
31
3710
9000
32
3710
9000
33
000
Planned Useful Life in Periods (Per)
Layout
1
2000
2000 2000
000
2000
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 236
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Specify Low-Value Asset Class Use During every acquisition posting, the system checks the maximum low-value asset (LVA) amount, providing that the appropriate LVA indicator is set in the asset class concerned.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Amount Specifications (Company Code/Depreciation Area) Specify Max. Amount for LowValue Assets + Asset Classes
Transaction Code
OAY2
2.
If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Specify LVA Asset Classes.
3.
On the Change View "Asset class": Overview screen, select the asset class listed below (one after the other).
4.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Low-val. asset check.
5.
On the Change View: "Low-val. asset check": Overview screen, make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 237
Asset Class
Chart of Depreciation
Depreciation Area
LVA Indicator
1000
3710
01
0
1000
3710
15
0
1000
3710
31
0
1000
3710
32
0
1000
3710
33
0
1100
3710
01
0
1100
3710
15
0
1100
3710
31
0
1100
3710
32
0
1100
3710
33
0
1200
3710
01
0
1200
3710
15
0
1200
3710
31
0
1200
3710
32
0
1200
3710
33
0
1500
3710
01
0
1500
3710
15
0
1500
3710
31
0
1500
3710
32
0
1500
3710
33
0
2000
3710
01
0
2000
3710
15
0
2000
3710
31
0
2000
3710
32
0
2000
3710
33
0
3000
3710
01
0
3000
3710
15
0
3000
3710
31
0
3000
3710
32
0
3000
3710
33
0
3100
3710
01
0
CUSTOMER 238
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3100
3710
15
0
3100
3710
31
0
3100
3710
32
0
3100
3710
33
0
3200
3710
01
0
3200
3710
15
0
3200
3710
31
0
3200
3710
32
0
3200
3710
33
0
3210
3710
01
0
3210
3710
15
0
3210
3710
31
0
3210
3710
32
0
3210
3710
33
0
4000
3710
01
0
4000
3710
15
0
4000
3710
31
0
4000
3710
32
0
4000
3710
33
0
4001
3710
01
0
4001
3710
15
0
4001
3710
31
0
4001
3710
32
0
4001
3710
33
0
5000
3710
01
2
5000
3710
15
2
5000
3710
31
0
5000
3710
32
0
5000
3710
33
0
6000
3710
01
0
6000
3710
15
0
6000
3710
31
0
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 239
6000
3710
32
0
6000
3710
33
0
6100
3710
01
0
6100
3710
15
0
6100
3710
31
0
6100
3710
32
0
6100
3710
33
0
8200
3710
01
0
8200
3710
15
0
8200
3710
31
0
8200
3710
32
0
8200
3710
33
0
8300
3710
01
0
8300
3710
15
0
8300
3710
31
0
8300
3710
32
0
8300
3710
33
0
9000
3710
01
0
9000
3710
15
0
9000
3710
31
0
9000
3710
32
0
9000
3710
33
0
CUSTOMER 240
Localization objects - per Business Priority
6.
Save your entries.
Specify Max. Amount for Low-Value Assets Use In this step, you define the maximum amount for low-value assets (LVAs) for each company code and depreciation area. The system checks the maximum amount during each acquisition posting, provided that the corresponding LVA indicator is set in the relevant asset class. The following amounts have been defined for low-value assets for the depreciation areas 01 and 15 in company code 3710: Maximum LVA amount
1.000,00 EUR
Maximum LVA amount for purchase orders for assets
1.190,00 EUR
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Amount Specifications (Company Code/Depreciation Area) Specify Max. Amount for LowValue Assets + Asset Classes
Transaction Code
OAYK
2.
If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Specify amount for low value assets.
3.
On the Change View "Company code selection": Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.
4.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Amount for low-value assets.
5.
On the Change View "Amount for low-value assets": Overview screen, make the following entries: Company Code
Area LVA Amount
Maximum LVA Amount for Purchase Order
3710
01
1.000,00
1.190,00
3710
15
1.000,00
1.190,00
3710
31
0,00
0,00
3710
32
0,00
0,00
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 241
3710 6.
33
0,00
0,00
Save your entries.
Specify Rounding of Net Book Value and/or Depreciation Use You can specify how net book values at year end, depreciation and replacement values are to be rounded. You make the specifications for each depreciation area and company code. Net book value at year end and arithmetic rounding has been set for all real depreciation areas of company code 3710. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Amount Specifications (Company Code/Depreciation Area) Specify Rounding of Net Book Value and/or Depreciation
Transaction Code
OAYO
2.
On the Change View "Company code selection:" Overview screen select Company Code 3710.
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Rounding specifications.
4.
On the Change View "Rounding specifications": Overview screen, select the depreciation area (see following table) and choose Details.
5.
On the Change View "Rounding specifications": Details screen, make the following entries for each depreciation area: Are a
Net book value at year end
Autom. Calcul. Depr.
Replacemen Arithm. Round. t value
01
X
15
X
31
X
32
X
33
X
Round Round up down
CUSTOMER 242
Localization objects - per Business Priority
6.
Save your entries.
Define Depreciation Areas for Foreign Currencies Use In Asset Accounting, you can manage depreciation areas in any currency. You can use the values from these areas for consolidation and other evaluation purposes. Depreciation areas representing valuation in group currency must be managed in the group currency of the company code.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Currencies Define Depreciation Areas for Foreign Currencies
Transaction Code
OAYH
2.
On the Change View "Company code selection:" Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Depreciation area currency.
4.
On the Change View "Depreciation area currency": Overview screen, make the following entries: Area Name of depreciation area
Crcy
01
Local GAAP
EUR
15
Local Tax
EUR
31
Local GAAP in Group Currency
Comment
2nd local currency of your Company Code, see transaction OB22 Example: USD
32
IFRS in local currency
33
IFRS Group Currency
2nd local currency of your Company Code, see transaction OB22 Example: USD
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 243
5.
Save your entries.
Specify the Use of Parallel Currencies Use If you use parallel currencies for your company code, you can also assign the same currency type to the relevant depreciation areas in asset accounting. You can use the values from these areas for consolidation and other evaluation purposes. Depreciation areas representing valuation in a parallel currency should be managed in the currency type of the parallel currency.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) General Valuation Currencies Specify the Use of Parallel Currencies
Transaction Code
S_EEI_69000068
On the Change View "Set Up Paralel Currencies": Overview screen make the following entries: Area Name of depreciation area 01
Local GAAP
15
Local Tax
31
Local GAAP in Group Currency
Crcy type/val.view
Comment
Currency type of your parallel currency, see transaction OB22 Example: 30 Group Currency
32
IFRS in local currency
33
IFRS Group Currency
Currency type of your parallel currency, see transaction OB22 Example: 30 Group Currency
CUSTOMER 244
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
Save your entries.
4.3.13.1.4 Depreciation Use In the following section, you make system settings for fixed asset depreciation. You can set your chart of accounts using transaction OAPL
Calculation Methods Use In this step, you define calculation methods that are assigned to a depreciation key.
Define Declining-Balance Methods Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Depreciation Valuation Methods Depreciation Key Calculation Methods Define Declining-Balance Methods
Transaction Code
AFAMD
On the Change View “Declining-Balance Method”: Overview screen, make the following entries for chart of depreciation 3710: Decl.-bal.
Description of the method
Dec. factor
Max.perc.
001
0.00x / 0.0000% / 0.0000%
0,00
0,00
002
2.00x /20.0000% / 0.0000%
2,00
20,0000
003
2.50x /25.0000% / 0.0000%
2,50
25,0000
004
3.00x /30.0000% / 0.0000%
3,00
35,0000
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 245
Maintain Period Control Methods Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
AFAMP
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Depreciation Valuation Methods Depreciation Key Calculation Methods Maintain Period Control Methods
On the Change View “Period Control”: Overview screen, make the following entries for chart of depreciation 3710: Prd.c.met h
Description
Acq
Add
Ret
Tm
001
01/01/02/02
01
01
02
02
002
04/06/02/02
04
06
02
02
003
01/06/02/02
01
06
02
02
004
06/06/02/02
06
06
02
02
005
06/06/08/08
06
06
08
08
Save your entries.
Define Multi-Level Methods Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
AFAMS
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Depreciation Valuation Methods Depreciation Key Calculation Methods Define Multi-Level Methods
On the Change View “Multilevel Method”: Overview screen, make the following entries for chart of depreciations 3710:
CUSTOMER 246
Localization objects - per Business Priority
M-lev. Description of the method meth
Vali Dpe.by dity fisc.year start
001
0.0000%
2
Not selected
002
0.0000%
2
Not selected
003
10.0000%/ 5.0000%/ 2.5000%
2
Not selected
004
3.5000%/ 2.0000%/ 1.0000%
2
Not selected
005
5.0000%/ 2.5000%/ 1.2500%
2
Not selected
006
7.0000%/ 5.0000%/ 2.0000%/ 1.2500%
2
Not selected
007
2.0000%
2
Not selected
008
2.5000%
2
Not selected
009
4.0000%
2
Not selected
010
0.0000%
2
Not selected
011
10.0000%
1
Not selected
012
10.0000%
1
Not selected
013
0.0000%
2
Not selected
014
60.0000%/70.0000%/80.0000%/90.0000%/1 00.0000%
3
Not selected
015
60.0000%
3
Not selected
016
100.0000%
3
Not selected
017
20.0000%
3
Not selected
018
0.0000%
2
Not selected
019
75.0000%/ 0.0000%
3
Not selected
020
0.0000%/ 0.0000%
3
Not selected
021
15.0000%
1
Not selected
022
40.0000%
1
Not selected
023
---
3
Not selected
024
---
3
Not selected
025
2.0000%
3
Not selected
026
0.0000%
3
Not selected
027
2.0000%/ 2.0000%
3
Not selected
028
50.0000%
3
Not selected
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 247
M-lev. Description of the method meth
Vali Dpe.by dity fisc.year start
029
40.0000%
3
Not selected
030
20.0000%
3
Not selected
031
25.0000%
3
Not selected
032
---
3
Not selected
033
50.0000%
3
Not selected
034
60.0000%/ 0.0000%/100.0000%
2
Not selected
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Levels.
4.
Check that the values for current year are maintained according to the description of the methods.
5.
Save your entries.
Maintain Depreciation Keys Use In this step, you maintain depreciation keys by assigning calculation methods to them. When your chart of depreciation was created as a copy of the country reference chart of depreciation, the depreciation keys were also copied from the reference chart of depreciation. Only active depreciation keys can be assigned to the fixed assets. Check that all the required depreciation keys are activated. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Depreciation Valuation Methods Depreciation Key Maintain Depreciation Key
Transaction Code
AFAMA
On the Change View “Depreciation Key”: Overview screen, check that the following depreciation keys exist and their status is set to X Active: CUSTOMER
248
Localization objects - per Business Priority
DepKy
Name for whole Depreciation
Status
0000
No depreciation and no interest
X Active
DG20
Declining balance 2 x
X Active
DG25
Declining balance 2.5 x
X Active
DG30
Declining balance 3 x
X Active
GD10
Buildings decl.bal.10.0/ 5.0 / 2.5 %
X Active
GD35
Buildings decl.bal.3.5/ 2.0 / 1.0 %
X Active
GD50
Buildings decl.bal. 5.0 / 2.5 / 1.25 %
X Active
GD70
Buildings decl.bal. 7.0 / 5.0 / 2.0 / 1.25 %
X Active
GL20
Buildings straight-line 2%
X Active
GL25
Buildings straight-line 2.5%
X Active
GL40
Buildings straight-line 4%
X Active
GWG
LVA 100 % Complete write off
X Active
GWGS
Low value asset tax depreciation
X Active
LINA
Str.-line frm acq.value pro rata w/curb + intrst
X Active
LINB
Straight-line acq.value pro rata to zero, with int
X Active
LINC
Str.-line acq. val. pro rata w/o curb w/ inter.
X Active
LINI
Str.-line/Acquis. val./pro rata/to 0/no interest
X Active
LINJ
Str.-line/Acquis. val./annual rule/to 0/no int.
X Active
LINK
Str.-line frm acq.value to zero without interest
X Active
LINR
Str.-line frm rem.life to book value zero
X Active
LINS
Str.-line over rem.life pro rata to zero
X Active
LINU
Str.-line over rem useful life/annual rule/to 0
X Active
MANU
Manual depreciation only
X Active
S7DA
Spec.dep §7d Environ.protection (60/10/10/10/10%)
X Active
S7DB
Spec.dep. §7d Environ.protection AuC (60%)
X Active
S7DC
Spec.dep §7d Environ.prot. supp.entries after 1992
X Active
S7GD
Spec.dep. §7g and decl.bal.ordinary dep. 3 x
X Active
S7GL
Spec.dep. §7g and str.-line ord.dep. First-yr.conv
X Active
SFE1
Spec.dep. §82 R&D immobile goods (15%)
X Active
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 249
DepKy
Name for whole Depreciation
Status
SFE4
Spec. dep. §82 R&D moveable goods (40%)
X Active
SFEB
Spec.dep. §82 R&D immobile goods (15%)
X Active
SFG4
Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (50%) moveable goods
X Active
SFGN
Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (50&) subsequent APC buildings
X Active
SMAN
Manual special deprec. and str-line ord. deprec.
X Active
SNFB
Spec.dep.§4 SSL (50%) immovable assets (new)
X Active
SNFG
Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (40%) movable assets (new)
X Active
SNFU
Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (40%) movable assets (1996)
X Active
SNFV
Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (20%) imov.asts under 5 yr(1996)
X Active
SNFW
Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (25%) residential bldgs (1996)
X Active
STCK
Unit-of-production deprec. (seasonal activity)
X Active
4.3.13.1.5 Transactions Use In this step, you define the transaction types for asset transactions. You can also specify that only certain depreciation areas will be proposed for posting for certain transaction types. The standard transaction types are used, which means that no new transaction types have to be created
Allow Down Payment/Transfer Transaction Types in Asset Classes Use In this step, you determine the asset classes for which postings are to be allowed with the transaction type groups for down payments and transfers.
CUSTOMER 250
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Transactions Acquisitions Allow Down Payment Transaction Types in Asset Classes
Transaction Code
OAYB
2.
On the Display View "Transaction type group selection": Overview screen, select transaction type group 15 (and later 16).
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Specification of asset classes.
4.
On the Change View "Specification of asset classes": Overview screen, enter the relevant asset classes.
5.
Save your entries.
Result The following entries should be made for chart of depreciation 3710: TT G
Name for the Transaction Type Group
Class
Asset Class Description
15
Down payment
4000
Assets under Construction
4001
AuC as Investment Measure
4000
AuC as Investment Measure
4001
Assets under Construction
16
Down Paymt Bal. frm Prev. Years
Assign Settlement Profile to Company Code Use In this step, you assign settlement profiles for settling assets under construction. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Transactions Capitalization of Assets under Construction Define/Assign Settlement Profiles
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 251
Transaction Code
OAAZ
2.
If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Assign Settlement Profile to Company Code.
3.
Assign Company Code 3710 to settlement profile YB00AI.
4.
Save your entries.
4.3.13.1.6 Asset Data Transfer Set Company Code Status Use Status 2 (test company code with data transfer always allowed) has been assigned to company code 3710. After the go live, status 0 (Asset Data Transfer Completed) should be set. The productive indicator prevents data in the company code being deleted by programs for deleting test data.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Asset Data Transfer Set Company Code Status
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87009070
On the Change View "FI-AA: Set status of the company code": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User action and values
CoCd
Company code
3710
Status
3.
2
Comment
Test company code with data transfer always allowed
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 252
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Result Test status is set for asset accounting. You can still delete your test data.
Specify Sequence of Depreciation Areas Use In this step, you determine the sequence in which the system presents the depreciation areas for the asset data transfer transaction.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Asset Data Transfer Specify Sequence of Depreciation Areas
Transaction Code
OAYE
2.
On the Change View "Company code selection": Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Determine sequence.
4.
On the Change View "Determine Sequence": Overview screen, enter the sequence for depreciation areas in ascending order:
5.
Company Code
Seq. Number for Legacy Data Transfer
Depreciation Area
Name of depreciation area
3710
01
01
Local GAAP
3710
02
15
Local Tax
3710
03
31
Local GAAP in Group Currency
3710
04
32
IFRS in Local Currency
3710
05
33
IFRS in Group Currency
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 253
Specify Transfer Date/Last Closed Fiscal Year Use In this step, you determine the transfer date for the legacy data transfer. This date determines the posting status to be used for the transfer (postings up to this date are included in the transfer), not the actual date the data transfer is carried out. This setting also determines whether you want to perform the transfer during the fiscal year (with transfer of posted transactions/depreciation in the current fiscal year) or at the end of the fiscal year (without transactions). The system automatically derives the last closed fiscal year from the transfer date. The transfer date 12/31/ is proposed for company code 3710, in other words, the values are transferred for fiscal year . If no data transfer is carried out during the fiscal year, the current fiscal year first has to be opened using the Fiscal Year Change function before the data transfer is carried out. If no fiscal year change is carried out, the system outputs the error message AY 252 Current fiscal year xxxx has to be after transfer date xx/xx/xxxx when the legacy data is created.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Asset Data Transfer Parameters for Data Transfer Date Information Specify Transfer Date/Last Closed Fiscal Year
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87009072
On the Change View "FI-AA: Date of Legacy Data Transfer": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field Name
3.
Descriptio n
User action and values
Company Code
3710
Take-Over Date
31.12./
Comment
Select current year -1
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 254
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Recalculate Depreciation for Previous Years Use You can recalculate the accumulated depreciation from the past if a new depreciation area is to be created or if the values from a depreciation area are to be recalculated in the system. This indicator has not been set in any depreciation areas. Before starting the asset data transfer, you should decide if you want the system to recalculate the accumulated depreciation. You may want to choose this option if the values are either not available or not accurate in the legacy system.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Asset Data Transfer Parameters for Data Transfer Options Recalculate Depreciation for Previous Years
Transaction Code
OAYF
2.
On the Change View "Company code selection": Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Calculate accumulated depreciation and make the required settings:
4.
Ar.
Name of depreciation area
01
Local GAAP
15
Local Tax
31
Local GAAP in Group Currency
32
IFRS in Local Currency
33
IFRS in Group Currency
Calcul.
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 255
4.3.13.1.7 Preparations for Going Live Process Asset Views Use In addition to the standard SAP ERP authorization functions, the Asset Accounting component provides the asset view, which offers additional authorization protection. The asset view authorization object (A_A_VIEW) controls master data maintenance to a certain extent. You can use this object to assign users limited views of asset data and asset values. To create asset master records you need at least one asset view. You have to use standard view 1 (asset accounting) to be able to create complete asset master records. All depreciation areas can be maintained with asset view 1 (= Asset Accounting). Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Asset Accounting (New) Preparations for Going Live Authorization Management Process Asset Views
Transaction Code
ANSICHT
2.
On the Change View "Asset View": Overview screen, select the entry for asset view 1 (Asset Accounting).
3.
In the Dialog Structure, double click Authorization for Depreciation Areas.
4.
On the Change View "Authorization for Depreciation Areas": Overview screen, mark the Authorization Maintenance for all depreciation areas.
5.
View
Chart of Depr.
Depr. Area
Maintenance
1
3710
01
select
1
3710
15
select
1
3710
31
select
1
3710
32
select
1
3710
33
select
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 256
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.3.13.1.8 Period End Closing In the following section you check the fiscal year control (open and close FY) for asset accounting. The actual fiscal year change is performed via balance carry forward in FI transaction FAGLGVTR.
Year End Closing of Previous Year Use You use the year-end closing program to close the fiscal year for one or more company codes from an asset accounting perspective. Once the fiscal year is closed, you can no longer post or change values within asset accounting (for example, by recalculating depreciation). The fiscal year to be closed is always the year following the last closed fiscal year. You cannot close the current fiscal year.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Accounting Financial Accounting Fixed Assets Periodic Processing Year-End Closing Execute
Transaction Code
AJAB
On the Year-end closing Asset Accounting screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Company Code
Company Code
Fiscal year to be closed Test run
Comment
3710
One of the past years, like last year. If you set this indicator, the program is started in test mode.
3.
From the application menu, choose Program Execute in background.
4.
In the view Background Print Parameters screen, make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 257
Field Name
Description
Output Device
User action and values
Comment
For example LODE
5.
Choose Continue E n t e r .
6.
In the Start Time box, choose Immediate, and save your entries.
7.
The message Background
job was scheduled for program RAJABS00 is displayed.
You can monitor the job and spool separately via transaction codes SMX (job) and SP01 or SP02 (spool) or collectively via the Schedule Manager Monitor, transaction code SCMO (select Application Financial Accounting) or ARAL (select Object FIAA).
4.4 Localization objects for Controlling 4.4.1Basic Overhead Cost Controlling [local] (J18) 4.4.1.1
Configuration - On Premise
The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1. Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings. 2. Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by . 3. Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.
4.4.1.1.1 Overhead Controlling Use In this step, all the Customizing settings from the Central Cost Center Accounting building block are copied to the development client. CUSTOMER 258
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure Access the Customizing activity as described and make the settings according to the table values listed in this documentation.
Organizational Elements Maintaining the Controlling Area Use Activate the following Controlling components: Cost Centers Order Management Commitments Management Projects Sales Orders with Commitments Management Cost Objects
Maintaining Controlling Area - Activate Components/Control Indicator Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling General Controlling Organization Maintain Controlling Area Maintain Controlling Area (Choose Activity Screen)
Transaction Code
OKKP
2.
On the Change View: “Basic Data” Overview screen, select controlling area A000. Do not double click.
3.
On the Change View: “Basic Data” Details screen, double click Activate Components/Control Indicators.
4.
If several fiscal year intervals exist, double click the latest year in this list.
5.
On the Change View: “Activate Components/Control Indicators”: Details screen, make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 259
Field name
6.
Description User action and values
Comment
Cost centers
Component active
Order management
Component active
Commit. Management
Component active
Profit Analysis
Component not active
Acty-Based Costing
Component not active
Profit center Acctg.
No selection
Projects
Set
Sales Orders
Set
Cost Objects
Set
Real Estate Mgmt.
No selection
Not active
W. Commitment Mgt
Set
Ind. Commitment Management with Sales Orders is Active
All currencies
Set
Variances
Set
Company Code validation
Set
Building block J53 activates profitability analysis
Not active
SD Order Processing is Active
Applies only if several company codes are assigned to the controlling area
Save your entries.
Result You have created and maintained the controlling area A000.
CUSTOMER 260
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Maintaining Controlling Area - Assign Company Code Use All company codes used are to be assigned to the controlling area. If the company code 3710 is already assigned to controlling area A000, the following step can be skipped. These entries are assigned in building block J47. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling General Controlling Organization Maintain Controlling Area Maintain Controlling Area
Transaction Code
OKKP
2.
On the Change View: “Basic Data” Overview screen, select controlling area A000. Do not double click.
3.
On the Change View: “Basic Data” Overview screen, in the Controlling Area pane, double click Assignment of company codes (right-hand side of the screen).
4.
On the Change View: “Assignment of Company Codes”: Overview screen, from the application toolbar, choose New Entries.
5.
On the New Entries: Overview of added entries screen, make the following entries:
6.
Field name
Description
User action and values
Comment
CoCd
Company Code
3710
Enter your company code
Save your entries.
Assign Document Type Mapping Variants to Company Codes
1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Ledgers Integration of Controlling with Financial Accounting Check and Define Default Values for Postings in Controlling
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 261
Transaction Code 2.
SPRO
On the “Change View “ Default Values for Posting in Controlling”: Overview screen, assign Doc Type Mapping Var to company code Company Code
DocType Mapping Var.
3710
000000A000
Define Ledger for CO-Version
1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Ledgers Integration of Controlling with Financial Accounting Define Ledger for CO Version
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the “Change View “ Ledger From Which CO Reads Actual Data”: Overview screen assign Doc Type Mapping Var to company code Company Code
Ledger
Version
3710
0L (already mapped from FI setting)
0
Add Cost element category to GL account Use In this step, you create the cost elements via G/L account. You can create a secondary cost element of either an assessment or activity allocation type. In the Simple Finance approach, the Chart of Accounts now covers all balance sheet accounts, P&L accounts and related cost elements. Therefore, the maintenance to create or change a G/L account (FI) or cost element (CO) is provided in single activity. This step covers assignment of primary and secondary cost element category. Procedure
1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options:
CUSTOMER 262
Localization objects - per Business Priority
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Master Data G/L Accounts G/L Account Creation and Processing Edit G/L Account (Individual Processing) Edit G/L Account Centrally
Transaction Code
FS00
2.
On the Edit G/L Account Centrally screen, enter GL account and company code from the table below and choose Change.
3.
On the Control Data tab maintain cost element category (CElem category) as given in table below
4.
Save your entries. G/L Account
Company code
CElem cat.
75002200
3710
01
75002300
3710
01
75008000
3710
01
75009000
3710
01
75009900
3710
01
Cost Element Groups: Values (Cost Elements) Use The purpose of this activity is to assign all cost elements to one of the cost element groups. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Element Group Change
Transaction Code
KAH2
2.
On the Change Cost Element Group: Initial Screen, enter the cost element group and choose Hierarchy.
3.
On the Change Cost Element Group: Structure screen, choose Insert Cost Element.
4.
Enter the minimum and the maximum value of cost element range to be assigned.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 263
5.
Save your entries.
6.
Make the following sets of entries: Cost Element Group
From Value
To Value
6300_CE
75002200
75002200
6300_CE
75002300
75002300
6300_CE
75008000
75008000
6300_CE
75009000
75009000
6300_CE
75009900
75009900
Basic Master Data Use Master data is imported using application transactions or eCATTs (extended Computer Aided Test Tools). Some of the master data is required for configuration, a description of the data used appears in the following example.
Prerequisites If a Set Controlling Area dialog box displays, enter the following data: Field Name
User actions and values
Controlling Area
A000
Cost Elements and Groups Creating Cost Centers Use A cost center is the smallest responsibility area in an enterprise for which costs are planned and accrual of costs is tracked separately. Prerequisites Cost center categories must be defined. The cost center standard hierarchy must be created. CUSTOMER 264
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Center Individual Processing Create
Transaction Code
KS01
2.
On the Create Cost Center: Initial screen, enter the necessary data, and choose Master Data.
3.
On the Create Cost Center: Basic creen, enter the necessary data, and save your entries. All Cost Centers are valid from 01.01.2006 to 31.12.9999. Cost Center
Name
Description
Person CC Hier. Comp Responsible Cat. Area Code
Financials & Financials and 37101101 Admin Administration SAP
W 0001
37101601 Marketing
Marketing
SAP
9
0001 3710
37101602 Sales
Sales
SAP
V
0001 3710
3710
Build. & Buildings and 37101750 Maintenance Maintenance SAP
H 0001 3710
Other Other Income 37101801 Inc.&Expense & Expenses SAP
W 0001 3710
Result You have created cost centers.
Creating Alternative Groups: Cost Centers Cost center groups enable the controller to address cost centers by providing the group name instead of single cost center names, for example, in Customizing or reporting. In reporting, this step allows an analysis of controlling key figures on an aggregate level.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 265
Cost Center Groups: Header and Texts Use Cost center groups are created, and texts are maintained.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Center Group Create
Transaction Code
KSH1
2.
On the Create Cost Center Group: Initial screen, provide Cost Center Group, and choose Enter.
3.
On the Create Cost Center Group: Structure screen, enter the description field that is ready for input, and save your entries.
4.
Repeat this step for the following entries: Cost Center Group
Description
3710000
Netherlands
3710110
Shared Services
3710160
Marketing
3710170
Sales
3710180
Other Income & Expense
Result You have created the cost center groups.
Cost Center Groups: Values (Cost Centers) Use The purpose of this activity is to assign cost centers to the alternative cost center groups.
CUSTOMER 266
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Center Group Change
Transaction Code
KSH2
2.
On the Change Cost Center Group: Initial screen, provide a cost center group, and from the application toolbar, choose Hierarchy.
3.
On the Change Cost Center Group: Structure screen, and from the application toolbar, choose the Insert Cost Center button.
4.
Provide the minimum and maximum values of the cost center range to be assigned.
5.
Make the following sets of entries:
6.
Cost Center Group
From Value
To Value
3710110
37101101
37101101
3710110
37101750
37101750
3710160
37101601
37101601
3710170
37101602
37101602
3710180
37101801
37101801
Save your entries.
Result You assigned cost centers to the alternative cost center groups.
Cost Center Groups: Lower Level Sets (Cost Center Groups) Use The purpose of this activity is to assign the cost center groups one to another to build up an alternative cost center hierarchy. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 267
SAP Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Center Group Create
Transaction Code
KSH1
2.
On the Create Cost Center Group: Initial screen, enter the upper level node of the cost center hierarchy (father node), and choose Hierarchy.
3.
On the Create Cost Center Group: Structure screen, from the application toolbar, choose the Lower Level button.
4.
Enter the key of the lower level cost center group, and save your entries.
5.
Make the following entries: Group Upper level
Group Lower level
3710
3710110
3710
3710160
3710
3710170
3710
3710180
Result You created the alternative cost center hierarchy.
Cost Center Groups: Company Group to Controlling Area Group Use The purpose of this activity is to assign the cost center groups one to another to build up an alternative cost center hierarchy.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Center Group Change
Transaction Code
KSH2
On the Change Cost Center Group: Initial screen, enter the upper level node of the cost center hierarchy (father node), and choose Hierarchy. CUSTOMER
268
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
On the Change Cost Center Group: Structure screen, from the application toolbar, choose the Lower Level button.
4.
Enter the key of the lower level cost center group, and save your entries.
5.
Make the following entries:
6.
Group Upper level
Group Lower level
A000
3710
Save your entries.
Result You assigned the company level cost center group to controlling are group.
Assignment Functional Areas to Cost Centers Use In this step, you make additional settings for a functional area in cost centers. If you change the functional area, future postings are made using the new functional area. The change made to the functional area has no effect on postings that have already been made. You have to repost any documents that have already been posted. Changes to the functional area can lead to inconsistencies if documents are reversed. If subsequent to the functional area being changed, documents posted before this change are then reversed. The reversal document may in some cases be posted under the new functional area. You should only carry out this procedure when testing the configuration. If you decide to carry it out in a productive system, do so with special care! Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Centers Individual Processing Change
Transaction Code
KS02
2.
If required, enter Controlling Area A000.
3.
On the Change Cost Center Initial screen, provide the cost center, and choose Enter.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 269
4.
On the Change Cost Center: Basic screen, select the Basic Data tab, and enter the functional area in the Functional Area field.
5.
Save your entries. Provide the following data for SAP Best Practices cost center master data: Cost Center
Functional Area
37101101
YB40
37101601
YB35
37101602
YB30
37101750
YB40
37101801
YB40
Assign Profit Centers to Cost Centers Use Profit Centers are to be assigned to all cost centers, which exist in the client. Because of different scope selections, it is possible that some of the following listed cost centers do not exist, or alternatively, that cost centers exist which are not maintained in the list. If the listed cost center does not exist: no further actions are necessary. If cost centers exist in the client, but are not listed below: add profit center depending on the scope.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu
Accounting Controlling Cost Center Accounting Master Data Cost Center Single Processing Change
Transaction Code
KS02
2.
On the Cost Center Change: Entry View screen, provide the necessary data, and choose Master Data.
3.
On the Change Cost Center: Basic screen, provide the necessary data. Key
Profit Center
37101101
YB600
CUSTOMER 270
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Key
Profit Center
37101601
YB600
37101602
YB600
37101750
YB700
37101801
YB900
Save your entries.
Result Profit centers are assigned to all cost centers.
4.4.1.1.2 Configuration with Use of CO Master Data Actual Postings Editing Automatic Account Assignment - Defining Account Assignment Use When you create accounting postings, the system proposes a corresponding cost accounting-relevant object if a default account assignment is configured for the account involved. You could use, for example, the default account assignment for the following business transactions: Transferring price differences posted in Purchasing as the result of different prices during invoice receipt. Revaluating material stocks. Transferring inventory differences. If you use the Logistics components, it makes sense to use the default account assignment for those cost elements that are automatically posted to from the Logistics modules (logistical income statement accounts). Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 271
IMG Menu
Controlling Cost Center Accounting Actual Postings Manual Actual Postings Edit Automatic Account Assignment
Transaction Code
OKB9
2.
On the Change View “Default account assignment”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: CoCd Company Code
Cost Elem. Cost Element
Cost Ctr Cost Center
Acct. assignment detail
3710
44000000
37101602
3710
44001000
37101602
3710
52001000
1
3710
52003000
1
3710
52011000
1
3710
52013000
1
3710
52030000
1
3710
52031000
1
3710
52033000
1
3710
52041000
1
3710
52042000
1
3710
52043000
1
3710
52044000
1
3710
52045000
1
3710
52046000
1
3710
52060000
3710
52501000
1
3710
52503000
1
3710
52511000
1
3710
52513000
1
3710
52530000
1
3710
52531000
1
3710
52532000
1
37101101
CUSTOMER 272
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
CoCd Company Code
Cost Elem. Cost Element
Cost Ctr Cost Center
Acct. assignment detail
3710
52541000
1
3710
52542000
1
3710
52543000
1
3710
52580000
37101801
3710
52080000
37101801
3710
52544000
1
3710
54051000
1
3710
54053000
1
3710
62000000
3710
65008500
1
3710
65400000
1
3710
70040000
37101101
3710
71000000
37101101
3710
71100000
37101101
3710
72010000
37101101
3710
72020000
37101101
3710
72040000
37101101
3710
72510000
37101101
3710
72520000
37101101
3710
72540000
37101101
3710
71050000
37101101
37101101
Save your entries.
Result You have defined automatic account assignment for reasonable accounts.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 273
Editing Automatic Account Assignment- Details per Valuation Area Use If valuation area is set to mandatory in a previous step, cost centers are to be assigned on valuation area level.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Cost Center Accounting Actual Postings Manual Actual Postings Edit Automatic Account Assignment
Transaction Code
OKB9
2.
On the Change View “Default account assignment”: Overview screen, select the cost element, and choose Detail per business area/valuation area.
3.
On the Change View: “Detail per business area/valuation area”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
Make the following entries: CoCd Company Code
Cost Elem. Cost Element
ValA Valuation Area
Cost Ctr Cost Center
3710
52001000
3710
37101201
3710
52003000
3710
37101201
3710
52011000
3710
37101201
3710
52013000
3710
37101201
3710
52030000
3710
37101201
3710
52031000
3710
37101201
3710
52033000
3710
37101201
3710
52041000
3710
37101201
3710
52042000
3710
37101201
3710
52043000
3710
37101201
3710
52044000
3710
37101201
3710
52045000
3710
37101201
3710
52046000
3710
37101201
CUSTOMER 274
Localization objects - per Business Priority
5.
CoCd Company Code
Cost Elem. Cost Element
ValA Valuation Area
Cost Ctr Cost Center
3710
52501000
3710
37101201
3710
52503000
3710
37101201
3710
52511000
3710
37101201
3710
52513000
3710
37101201
3710
52530000
3710
37101201
3710
52531000
3710
37101201
3710
52532000
3710
37101201
3710
52541000
3710
37101201
3710
52542000
3710
37101201
3710
52543000
3710
37101201
3710
52544000
3710
37101201
3710
54051000
3710
37101201
3710
54053000
3710
37101201
3710
65008500
3710
37101201
3710
65400000
3710
37101201
Save your settings.
Define and Activate Substitution for Cost-of-Sales Accounting Use In this IMG activity, you must activate the substitution for the functional area in documents.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation option: Transaction Code
SM30 (Customizing Object V_T001Q_FI_0006)
IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tools Validation/Substitution Define and Activate Substitution for Cost–of-Sales Accounting
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 275
2.
3.
On the Change View “Substitution for Cost-of-Sales Accounting”: Overview screen, make the following entries: CoCd
CallPnt
Substitution
Activtn level
3710
Functional Area
DUMMY
1
Save your entries.
Result You have now activated the substitution for Cost of Sales Accounting.
4.4.1.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Maintain Substitution for Cost of Sales Accounting
Yes
No
Add Cost element category to GL account
Yes
No
Remarks
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Elements (COAr dependent) Select Cost Elements(CoAdependent) on Mast.data 1
Assign All Cost Elements to Cost element Group
Yes
No
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport.
CUSTOMER 276
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Remarks
Select Cost Elements Group on Mast.data 1 Create Cost Centers
Yes
No
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Center Group on Mast.data 1
KSH2 Group names to Controlling area
Yes
No
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Center Group on Mast.data 1
Assign Functional Areas to Cost Centers
Yes
No
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Center Group on Mast.data 1
Assign Profit Center to Cost Centers
Yes
No
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Centers Group on Mast.data 1
Define Cost Center Groups - Values in Sets
Yes
No
Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost CenterGroup on Mast.data 1
If a manual transport is possible, proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the source system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 277
3.
To select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request, choose Table View Transport. If this is not possible, see the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.
4.
The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information.
If manual action in the target system / client is required, proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the target system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
4.4.1.2.1 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu Transaction Code
OKE7
2.
On the Transport Controlling settings select objects as per table given above and click include in Request.
3.
On Prompt for Workbench Request dialog box, select the request then choose Continue E n t e r .
4.
Settings are included into the transport requests.
CUSTOMER 278
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.4.2
Delta Basic Overhead Cost Controlling [local] (BE2)
4.4.2.1
Configuration – On Premise
4.4.2.1.1 Internal Orders and Groups Create Internal Order – New Use Internal orders are created for use in the CO area. Prerequisites Order type Y9A0 exists.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Accounting Controlling Internal Orders Master Data Special Functions Order Create
Transaction Code
KO01
2.
On the Create Internal Order: Initial screen, enter the Controling area A000 and the Order type Y9A0 and choose Master Data.
3.
On the Create Internal Order: Master Data screen, choose the Assignments tab, and enter the following data:
4.
Order
Description
Company Code
Object Class
9A0000003700
Accrual order
3710
Overhead
Save your entries.
Result You created the internal order.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 279
4.4.2.1.2 Accrual Calculation Maintaining Overhead Structure - Credit objects for overhead cost elements Use There are costs that occur only once a year, although they are incurred throughout all periods of a year. Accrual calculation provides for an even distribution of such costs over all periods. You must define accrual parameters. These parameters are usually identical for the plan accrual and the actual accrual. You define an overhead percentage rate for accruing the additional employee benefit costs. Reference cost elements are the costs for wages and salaries. The accrued costs are credited to an order with category Y9A0 (Internal orders: Accrual). Prerequisites Cost elements used for accrual by surcharge: Cost Element
Description
Cost Element Category
Valid from To
61061000
Payroll - Benefits
3
01.01.2006 31.12.9999
61020000
Payroll - Bonus
3
01.01.2006 31.12.9999
61010000
Payroll - Other Personnel Expenses
3
01.01.2006 31.12.9999
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Cost Center Accounting Planning Planning Aids Accrual Calculation Percentage Method Maintain Overhead Structure
Transaction Code
KSAZ
2.
On the Maintain CO-OM Accrual Calculation: Overhead Struc. Overview screen, choose the Create Overhead structure button F 7
3.
In the Create Overhead Structure dialog box, make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
Comment
CUSTOMER 280
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Overhead Structure
YBL
Description
Sum wages and salaries
4.
Save your entries.
5.
On the Maintain CO-OM Accrual Calculation: Overhead Struc. Detail screen, double click Overhead Structure YBL and create the following entries: Row
Base
110 120 190 210 220 230
Y-B1 Y-B2
O/H rate
Description
From
To
Credit
Y-Z1 Y-Z2 Y-Z3
Wages Salaries Sum wages and salaries Vacation bonus paid Yearly bonus Misc. Personnel Costs
110 190 190 190
120 190 190 190
Y11 Y12 Y13
If you create the O/H rate, choose Dependency Controlling Area/Overhead Type 1010. 6.
Select the row and choose Goto Calculation Base (or double click the selected Base entry).
7.
On the Maintain CO-OM Accrual Calculation: Calculation Base Detail screen, to define the details of the calculation base, double click the calculation base and make the following entries: Base
From Cost Element
To Cost Element
Y-B1
61051000
61051000
Y-B1
61103000
61103000
Y-B2
61052000
61052000
Y-B2
61100000
61100000
8.
Save your entries.
9.
From the menu, choose Goto Overhead rate (or double click the selected O/H rate entry).
10.
On the Maintain CO-OM Accrual Calculation: Overhead Controlling Area/Overhead screen, make the following entries: CO Area
O/H rate
Dependency
Valid from
Valid to
Plan overhead
Act. Overhead*
A000
Y-Z1
01. 2010
12. 2030
3%
3%
A000
Y-Z2
Controlling area/overhead type Controlling area/overhead type
01. 2010
12. 2030
3%
3%
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 281
CO Area
O/H rate
Dependency
Valid from
Valid to
Plan overhead
Act. Overhead*
A000
Y-Z3
Controlling area/overhead type
01. 2010
12. 2030
3%
3%
The overhead rates have been selected at random and do not correspond to genuine requirements. Overhead rates cannot be transported and have to be maintained manually in Customizing. 11.
Save your entries.
12.
Choose Goto Credit (or double click the selected Credit entry).
13.
On the Maintain CO-OM Accrual Calculation: Credit Detail screen, make the following entries:
14.
Controlling CoCode Credi t Area
Desc.
A000
3710
Y11
A000
3710
Y12
A000
3710
Y13
Cost Center
Valid to
Cost Element
Order
Vacation bonus paid Yearly bonus
12. 2027
610610 00
9A000000370 0
12. 2027
610200 00
9A000000370 0
Misc. Personn el Costs
12. 2027
610100 00
9A000000370 0
Save your entries.
Result The overhead structure has been defined.
4.4.2.1.3 Assessments Define Assessment - Allocations: Cycles Use Assessment is used to allocate primary and secondary costs. The original cost elements are combined and allocated to the receiver cost center in an assessment cost element. The following cycles have been defined for the plan assessment: CUSTOMER 282
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Cycle
Segment
Sender
Tracing Factor
Receiver
YP3720
100
37101750
Cost center
Ass. shared facility (plan)
buildings & maintenance cost
BUILD. & MAINTENANCE
Area in square meters Stat.key figure 1002
group 3710 (37101750 and 37101801 set to factor 0%)
Prerequisites Assessment cost elements (cost element type 42) must be defined. Cost Element
Description
94201000
Buildings & Maintenance
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Cost Center Accounting Planning Allocations Assessment Define Assessment
Transaction Code
KSU7
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Initial screen, make the following entries: Field name
3.
Description
User actions and values
Controlling Area
A000
Cycle
YP3720
Start Date
01.01.2015
Comment
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Header Data screen, enter the following data: Field name
Description
User actions and values
Controlling Area
A000
Cycle
YP3720
Start Date From
01.01.2015
Start Date To
31.12.2099
Text
S17 Assess Quality cost (plan)
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Comment
CUSTOMER 283
Field name
Description
User actions and values
Indicator: Iterative
Not Set
Object Currency
x
Version
2
Comment
4.
Choose the Attach Segment button.
5.
On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, in the Segment header field, make the following entry:
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Segment Name
Text
100
buildings & maintenance cost
On the Segment Header tab, make the following entries: Segment
Assessment CEle
Sender rule
Share %
Plan value origin
100
94201000
Posted amounts
100,00
set
Segment
Receiver rule
Var.portion type
scale neg. tracing fact.
100
Variable portions
Plan Stat key figures
No scaling
Choose the Senders/Receivers tab, and make the following entries: Segment Sender Cost Center from
Sender Cost Element from
Receiver Cost Center group
100
10_CE
3710
37101750
Choose the Sender Values tab, and make the following entry: Segment
Share %
Plan value origin
Version From
100
100,00
Set
2
Choose the Receiver Tracing Factor tab, and make the following entry: Segment
Var.portion type
Scale neg. tracing fact.
Stat. key figure from
100
Plan Stat Key Figures
No scaling
1002
Choose the Receiver Weighting Factors tab, and make the following entries: Cost Center
Factor Segment 100
37101101
100
37101201
100
37101202
100
Other segments
CUSTOMER 284
Localization objects - per Business Priority
11.
Cost Center
Factor Segment 100
37101301
100
37101302
100
37101401
100
37101501
100
37101601
100
37101602
100
37101701
100
37101750
0
37101801
0
37101901
100
Other segments
Save your entries.
Result You have defined the plan assessment cycles YP3720.
4.4.2.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Remarks
KO01 Create Internal Order New
No
Yes
Follow step as per from this guide and create manually in target system
Maintain Overhead Structure - Maintain OH Rates
No
Yes
Follow step as per from this guide and create manually in target system
If manual transport is possible, proceed as follows: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 285
1.
Logon to the source system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.
3.
To select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request, choose Table View Transport. If this is not possible, see the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.
4.
Release the created transport request and import it into the target system / client. Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information.
If manual action in the target system / client is required, proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the target system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
4.4.2.2.1 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
OKE7
2.
On the Transport Controlling settings screen, select objects per the table above and choose Include in Request.
3.
In the Prompt for Workbench Request dialog box, select the request and choose Continue E n t e r
4.
Settings are included into the transport requests.
4.4.3
Profitability Analysis [local] (J53)
4.4.3.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.4.3.1.1 Create Actual Assessments CCA to CO-PA Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Profitability Analysis Flows of Actual Values Transfer of Overhead Assess Cost Center Costs / Process
CUSTOMER 286
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Costs Define Structure of Cost Center Assessment / Process Cost Assessment Transaction Code 2.
KEU1
On the CO-PA Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Initial screen view, make the following entries: Field Name Value Cycle
Comments
YA3710
Start Date 01.01. For example, if current year is 2016, enter 01.01.2015 3.
Choose Execute.
4.
On the CO-PA Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Header Data view, make the following entries: Field Name
Value
To
31.12.9999
Text
NL-Actual Assessment CO-PA
Sender Select. Type
2
CO-Area
A000 (or your CO Area)
TF basis
2 Account-based Profitability Analysis
5.
Choose Attach segment.
6.
On the CO-PA Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment view, make the following entries:
7.
Tab Segment Header:
8.
Field Name
Value
Segment Name
YA3710-1 Marketing
Assessment CElem
94222000
Sender values, Rule
Posted amounts
Sender values, Share in %
100
Receiving tracing factor, Rule
Fixed Percentage
Tab Senders/Receivers (if the product groups are not implemented, do this step later) Field Name
Value
Sender, Cost Center Group
3710160
Receiver, Company code
3710
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 287
9.
Tab Receiver Tracing Factor Field Name
Value
Portion/percent
100
10.
Save your entries.
11.
Repeat the steps above for the following values: Field
Value Segment 2
Value Segment 3
Segment Name
YA3710-2 Admin. Overhead
YA3710-3 Sales
Assessment CElem
94224000
94225000
Sender values, Rule
Posted amounts
Posted amounts
Sender values, Share in %
100
100
Receiving tracing factor, Rule
Fixed percentages
Fixed percentages
Sender, Cost Center Group
3710110
3710170
Receiver
Company Code; for example, 3710
Company Code; for example, 3710
Receiver Tracing Factor, Receivers Portion/Percent
100
100
Field
Value Segment 4
Value Segment 5
Segment Name
YA3710-4 NonOperating Expense
YA3710-5 NonOperating Income
Assessment CElem
94226000
94227000
Sender values, Rule
Posted amounts
Posted amounts
Sender values, Share in %
100
100
Receiving tracing factor, Rule
Fixed percentages
Fixed percentages
Sender, Cost Center Group
3710180
3710180
Sender, Cost Element Group
6200_CE
6100_CE
Receiver, Company Code
3710
3710
Receiver Tracing Factor, Receivers Portion/Percent
100
100
Field
Value Segment Value Segment 7 6
CUSTOMER 288
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Segment Name
YA3710-6 Taxes
YA3710-7 Other Income and Expenses
Assessment CElem
94228000
94229000
Sender values, Rule
Posted amounts
Posted amounts
Sender values, Share in %
100
100
Receiving tracing factor, Rule
Fixed percentages
Fixed percentages
Sender, Cost Center Group
3710180
37101801
Sender, Cost Element
6300_CE
10_CE
Sender, Company code
3710
3710
Receiver Tracing Factor, Receivers 100 Portion/Percent
100
4.4.3.1.2 Activate Profitability Analysis Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Profitability Analysis Flows of Actual Values Activate Profitability Analysis
Transaction Code
KEKE
On the Change View “CO-PA: Active Flag for Profitability Analysis”: Overview screen, make the following entries: COAr Name
From FY
Op.Concern Active Status
A000 Best Practices A000 3.
3
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 289
4.4.4 Profitability Analysis for Manufacturing/Trading [local] (BEF) 4.4.4.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.4.4.1.1 Create additional assessment segments for Trading/manufacturing in Actual Assessments CCA to CO-PA Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Profitability Analysis Flows of Actual Values Transfer of Overhead Assess Cost Center Costs / Process Costs Define Structure of Cost Center Assessment / Process Cost Assessment
Transaction Code
KEU2
2.
On dialog box choose Activity, choose Change Actual Assessment, and select Choose.
3.
On the CO-PA Change Actual Assessment Cycle: Initial screen view, make the following entries: Field Name Value Cycle
Comments
YA3710
Start Date 01.01. For example, if current year is 2015, enter 01.01.2014 4.
Choose Execute.
5.
On the CO-PA Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Header Data view, choose Attach segment.
6.
On the CO-PA Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment view, make the following entries:
7.
Tab Segment Header: Field Name
Value
Segment Name
YA3710-9 Stores
Assessment CElem
94221000
Sender values, Rule
Posted amounts
CUSTOMER 290
Localization objects - per Business Priority
8.
Sender values, Share in %
100
Receiving tracing factor, Rule
Fixed Percentage
Tab Senders/Receivers (if the product groups are not implemented, do this step later) Field Name
Value
Sender, Cost Center Group
3710120
Receiver, Company Code From
3710
Tab Receiver Tracing Factor Field Name
Value
Portion/percent
100
9.
Save your entries.
10.
Repeat the steps for the following values: Field
Value Segment Value Segment 11 10
Segment Name
YA3710-10 R&D
YA3710-11 Quality Management
Assessment CElem
94223000
94224000
Sender values, Rule
Posted amounts
Posted amounts
Sender values, Share in %
100
100
Receiving tracing factor, Rule
Fixed percentages
Fixed percentages
Sender, Cost Center Group
3710150
3710140
Receiver, Company Code From
3710
3710
Receiver Tracing Factor, Receivers Portion/Percent
100
100
Field
Value Segment 12
Segment Name
YA3710-12 Manufacturing OH
Assessment CElem
94221000
Sender values, Rule
Posted amounts
Sender values, Share in %
100
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 291
Receiving tracing factor, Rule
Fixed percentages
Sender, Cost Center Group
3710130
Receiver, Company Code From
3710
Receiver Tracing Factor, Receivers 100 Portion/Percent 11.
Save your entries.
4.4.5
Product Cost Planning [local] (BE5)
4.4.5.1
Configuration – On-Premise
4.4.5.1.1
Costing Sheet
Defining Credits Use Credits are used in the Costing Sheet and contain information about the credited sender and the cost element for the overhead posting.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Product Cost Planning Basic Settings for Material Costing Overhead Costing Sheet: Components Define Credits
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
To create a credit, choose New Entries.
3.
Enter a three-character key and a name for the new credit as shown in the following table: Data records: Credit
Name
YN1
Credit Material 1-NL
CUSTOMER 292
Localization objects - per Business Priority
YN2
Credit Product. 1-NL
YN3
Credit Admin-NL
YN4
Credit Sales-NL
4.
Save your entries and go to detail for every Credit.
5.
Select the row and choose Detail.
6.
From the Dialog Structure on the left side of the screen, choose Credits Details.
7.
In the Set Controlling Area dialog box, select the relevant controlling area (for example, A000) and choose Enter.
8.
On the Change View "Details": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
9.
Create details for every Credit according to the following data records: Credit
Co Area
Valid to
Cost Elem.
Fxd %
Cost Center
YN1
A000
12/31/9999
94111000
*
37101201
YN2
A000
12/31/9999
94112000
*
37101301
YN3
A000
12/31/9999
94113000
*
37101101
A
12/31/9999
YN4 10.
000
* 94114000
37101101
Save your entries.
Definition of Costing Sheets – Costing Sheets and Rows Use The Costing Sheet calculates Overhead surcharges to standard cost estimates and production orders. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Product Cost Planning Basic Settings for Material Costing Overhead Define Costing Sheet
Transaction Code
SPRO
Choose New Entries and create the following Costing Sheets: Costing Sheet
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Description
CUSTOMER 293
3710PC
Costing Sheet Production-NL
3710PP
Costing Sheet Planning-NL
3.
Select the corresponding Costing Sheet and double click Costing sheet rows.
4.
Enter your costing sheet as shown in the table:
5.
Costing Sheet
Row Base
3710PC
100
3710PC
109
3710PC
200
3710PC
209
3710PC
300
3710PP
100
3710PP
109
3710PP
200
3710PP
209
Overhead rate
Y001
Description
From To
(enter manually)
Credit
Row
Material Y371
Y002
Material overhead
YN1 100
Production Y372
Production overhead
YN2 200
Production overhead
Y001
Material Y371
Y002
Material overhead
100
YN1
Production Y372
Production overhead
YN2 200
3710PP
300
Costs of goods manufactured
3710PP
305
Y373
Administration ovh
300
YN3
3710PP
306
Y374
Sales overhead
300
YN4
Save your entries.
Defining Percentage Overhead Use An overhead rate specifies the conditions under which overhead is applied to an object.
CUSTOMER 294
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Product Cost Planning Basic Settings for Material Costing Overhead Costing Sheet: Components Define Percentage Overhead Rates
Transaction Code
KZZ2
2.
The following OH rates are already created in BB J50, in this step we maintain percentage for each plant.
3.
Overview of the new O/H rates: O/H rate
Name
Dependency
Description
Y371
Material overhead
D020
Overhead Type/Plant
Y372
Production overhead
D020
Overhead Type/Plant
Y373
Administration ovh
D020
Overhead Type/Plant
Y374
Sales overhead
D020
Overhead Type/Plant
4.
From the Dialog Structure on the left side of the screen, choose Overhead rate Details.
5.
On the Change View "Details": Overview screen, choose New Entries and specify the individual overhead rates for every overhead rate.
6.
Each record consists of a validity period, a percentage rate and several condition fields that are taken from the condition tables.
7.
Create details for every Overhead Rate according to the following data records: O/H rate
Valid from
Valid to
Y371
01/01/2015 12/31/2015
Y371
CO Area
Ovrhd Plant Percentage type
A000
1
3710 50.00
A000
2
3710 50.00
01/01/2015 12/31/2015 Y371
01/01/2016 12/31/2016
A000
1
3710 50.00
Y371
01/01/2016 12/31/2016
A000
2
3710 50.00
Y371
01/01/2017 12/31/2017
A000
1
3710 70.00
Y371
01/01/2017 12/31/2017
A000
2
3710 70.00
Y371
01/01/2018 12/31/2018
A000
1
3710 70.00
Y371
01/01/2018 12/31/2018
A000
2
3710 70.00
Y371
01/01/2019 12/31/2019
A000
1
3710 70.00
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 295
O/H rate
Valid from
Y371
CO Area
Ovrhd Plant Percentage type
01/01/2019 12/31/2019
A000
2
3710 70.00
Y372
01/01/2015 12/31/2015
A000
1
3710 100.00
Y372
01/01/2015 12/31/2015
A000
2
3710 100.00
Y372
01/01/2016 12/31/2016
A000
1
3710 100.00
Y372
01/01/2016 12/31/2016
A000
2
3710 100.00
Y372
01/01/2017 12/31/2017
A000
1
3710 100.00
Y372
01/01/2017 12/31/2017
A000
2
3710 100.00
Y372
01/01/2018 12/31/2018
A000
1
3710 100.00
Y372
01/01/2018 12/31/2018
A000
2
3710 100.00
Y373
01/01/2015 12/31/2015
A000
1
3710 50.00
Y373
01/01/2015 12/31/2015
A000
2
3710 50.00
Y373
01/01/2016 12/31/2016
A000
1
3710 50.00
Y373
01/01/2016 12/31/2016
A000
2
3710 50.00
Y373
01/01/2017 12/31/2017
A000
1
3710 50.00
Y373
01/01/2017 12/31/2017
A000
2
3710 50.00
Y373
01/01/2018 12/31/2018
A000
1
3710 50.00
Y373
01/01/2018 12/31/2018
A000
2
3710 50.00
Y374
01/01/2015 12/31/2015
A000
1
3710 65.00
Y374
01/01/2015 12/31/2015
A000
2
3710 65.00
Y374
01/01/2016 12/31/2016
A000
1
3710 65.00
Y374
01/01/2016 12/31/2016
A000
2
3710 65.00
Y374
01/01/2017 12/31/2017
A000
1
3710 65.00
Y374
01/01/2017 12/31/2017
A000
2
3710 65.00
Y374
01/01/2018 12/31/2018
A000
1
3710 65.00
Y374
01/01/2018 12/31/2018
A000
2
3710 65.00
8.
Choose Enter.
9.
Save your entries.
Valid to
CUSTOMER 296
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Define Accounts for Splitting the Cost of Goods Sold Use In this activity, you can refine the settings for COGS postings to split the COGS amount and post it to different accounts according to the cost component elements that are used in the underlying costing sheet. This step assign each company code COGS Scheme.
Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Periodic Processing Integration Materials Management Define Accounts for Splitting the Cost of Goods Sold
Transaction Code
SM34 (Customizing Object FCOC_COGS_SCHEME)
2.
On the Change View "Splitting Scheme": Overview screen, select schema 0YA000 and double click Company Code Assignment.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
CoCd
Valid From
Scheme
3710
01.01.2014
0YA000
Save your entries.
Define Valuation Variants Use The Valuation Variant controls various parameters regarding the valuation of input items for the object for which costs are being determined.
Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Product Cost Planning Material Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure Costing Variant: Components Define Valuation Variants
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 297
Transaction Code
OKK4 SM30 (Customizing Object V_CK05)
2.
On the Change View "Valuation Variants" screen, double click variant 0Y1
3.
On the Change View "Valuation Variants": Details screen, select Create.
4.
On Change View“ Valuation Variants (Organizational-Unit-Dependent) screen, click New Entries F 5
5.
Make the following entries and keep other settings unchanged: Field
User Action or Values
Valuation variant
0Y1
Plant
3710
Overhead tab-Costing Sheet
3710PC
Comments
6.
Save your entries C t r l + S .
7.
Repeat the above steps for Valuation Variants 0Y2 and Overhead tab-Costing Sheet 3710PP for plant 3710.
Costing Variants-Activate Controlling area split Use In this transaction, you activate cost component split in controlling area currency. Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Product Cost Planning Material Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure Define Costing Variants
Transaction Code
OKKN
2.
On the Change View "Costing Variants", screen, double click variant PPC1.
3.
On the Change View "Costing Variants", screen, choose the Assignments tab.
4.
Choose Cost Comp Split in Contr Area Currency.
5.
Make the following entries: Field
User Action or Values
Company Code
3710
Additional CCS
X
Comments
CUSTOMER 298
Localization objects - per Business Priority
6.
Save your entries.
4.4.5.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Remarks
KZZ2 Defining Percentage Overhead
No
Yes
Follow step as per from this guide and create manually in target system
If manual transport is possible, proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the source system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.
3.
To select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request, choose Table View Transport. If this is not possible, see the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.
4.
Release the created transport request and import it into the target system / client. Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information.
If manual action in the target system / client is required, proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the target system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 299
4.4.6
Cost Object Controlling – by Order [local] (BE7)
4.4.6.1
Configuration – On Premise
4.4.6.1.1 Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery Use This activity determines the valuation of material transferred from a production order to stock. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Cost Object Controlling Product Cost by Order Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery
Transaction Code
SPRO
Make the following entries: Valuation Area
3710
Valuation Variant
0Y1
Save your entries.
Define Cost-Accounting-Relevant Default Values for Order Types and Plant Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Cost Object Controlling Product Cost by Order Manufacturing Orders Define Cost-Accounting-Relevant Default Values for Order Types and Plants
CUSTOMER 300
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Default Values for Order Cost Estimate”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Confirm the information message.
4.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field
Description
Plant
3710
Order Type
CPOM
Default Rule
PP1
RA Key 5.
User action and Values
Results Analysis Key
Comment
MBMF01
Save your entries.
Define Posting Rules for Settling Work in Process Use For each RA Category, a P/L and a balance sheet account is defined, where the calculated WIP is posted to when the WIP is transferred to Financial Accounting. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Cost Object Controlling Product Cost by Order Period-End Closing Work in Process Define Posting Rules for Settling WIP
Transaction Code
OKG8
2.
Choose New entries.
3.
Make the following entries: CO Area
Compan y Code
RA versio n
RA categor y
Rec numbe r
P/L Acct
BalSheetAcc t
A00 0
3710
0
WIPR
0
5420000 0
13200000
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Acct Prin c
CUSTOMER 301
A00 0 4.
3710
0
RUCR
0
5404000 0
24098600
Save your entries.
Define Default Variance Keys for Plants Use The Variance Key is part of the order header and controls variance calculation. The system selects the value set by this step as default value when a material master is created. From the material master, the variance key is then transferred to the order when an order for the material is created.
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Cost Object Controlling Product Cost by Order Period End Closing Variance Calculation -> Define Default Variance Keys for Plants
Transaction Code
OKVW
Make the following entries: Plant
Variance Key
3710
000001
Save your entries.
Valuation Variants for Product Costing Use The Valuation Variant controls various parameters regarding the valuation of input items for the object for which costs are being determined.
Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER
302
Localization objects - per Business Priority
IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Product Cost Planning Material Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure Costing Variant: Components Define Valuation Variants
Transaction Code
OKK4 SM30 (Customizing Object V_CK05)
2.
On the Change View "Valuation Variants" screen, double click variant 0Y1.
3.
On the Change View "Valuation Variants": Details screen, choose Create.
4.
On the Change View “Valuation Variants (Organizational-Unit-Dependent)" screen, choose New Entries F 5
5.
Make the following entries (keep other settings unchanged):
6.
Field
User Action or Values
Valuation variant
0Y1
Plant
3710
Overhead tab-Costing Sheet
3710PC
Comments
Save your entries.
4.4.7
Cost Object Controlling – by Period [local] (BE9)
4.4.7.1
Configuration – On-Premise
4.4.7.1.1 Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery Use This activity determines the valuation of material transferred from a production order to stock. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Cost Object Controlling Product Cost by Order Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 303
Transaction Code 2.
3.
SPRO
Make the following entries: Valuation Area
3710
Valuation Variant
0Y1
Save your entries.
Defining Cost-Accounting-Relevant Default Values for Order Types and Plants Use This activity configures various settings that are transferred to the order when an order of the respective plant/type is created. Prerequisites Costing Variants, RA Keys Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Transaction Code 2.
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Cost Object Controlling Product Cost by Period Product Cost Collectors Define Cost-Accounting-Relevant Default Values for Order Types and Plants SPRO
Make the following entries: Plant Order Type
Default Rule
Prel./Vers. Cstg
Simul. Costing
RA key
3710 YBMR
STR
PSRM
PYRM
MBMF03
CUSTOMER 304
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Valuation Variants for Product Costing Use The Valuation Variant controls various parameters regarding the valuation of input items for the object for which costs are being determined.
Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling Product Cost Planning Material Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure Costing Variant: Components Define Valuation Variants
Transaction Code
OKK4 or SM30 (Customizing Object V_CK05)
2.
On the Change View "Valuation Variants", screen, double click variant 0Y1.
3.
On the Change View "Valuation Variants": Details screen, choose Create.
4.
On the Change View “Valuation Variants (Organizational-Unit-Dependent)" screen, choose New Entries F 5
5.
Make the following entries: Field
User Action or Values
Valuation variant
0Y1
Plant
3710
Overhead tab-Costing Sheet
3710PC
Comments
6.
Repeat the above steps for Valuation variant 0Y7 and Costing sheet 3710PC
7.
Save your entries.
4.5 Localization objects for Material Managements 4.5.1 Output Management - MM [local] (J21) 4.5.1.1 Configuration of Output Management MM – Local Data (for On-premise)
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 305
4.5.1.1.1 Output Condition Record: Invoice Verification The purpose of this activity is to create an output condition record for invoice verification.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP ECC Menu Invoice
Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification Message Determination Maintain Conditions Create Condition: Invoice Verification
Transaction Code
MRM1
2.
On the Create Output-Condition records: Invoice Verification screen, enter output type EINK and choose Enter.
3.
Choose Key combination and select CoCode, Blocking Reason: Price in the Key Combination dialog box. Choose Enter.
4.
On the Create Condition records (Mail to Purchasing): Fast Entry screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name
Description
Company Code
User Action and Values
Comment
3710
BlockR Pr.
Blocking reason: price
select
Funct
Partner function
ME
Medium
Message transmission medium
7
Date/time
Dispatch time
4
Language
It is possible to insert the designated language key in which you: Display texts Enter texts Print documents. Example: for English EN
5.
Save your entries. CUSTOMER
306
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Result The condition records are created. For the following output types, the output messages are generated automatically: EINK.
4.5.1.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
3.1.1 Output Condition Records: Invoice Verification
No
Yes
Remarks
In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the source system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.
3.
Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.
4.
The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.
Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the target system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 307
4.5.2
Materials Management - Settings [local] (J05)
4.5.2.1
Logistics General
4.5.2.1.1 Maintaining Company Codes for Materials Management 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics General Material Master Basic Settings Maintain Company Codes for Materials Management
Transaction Code
OMSY
On the Change View “Materials Management View on Company Codes”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Entry Value
Company Code
3710
Year
Period
12 (Last period of previous year)
ABp - Allow Posting to Previous Period (Backposting)
X
Save your entries.
4.5.2.1.2 Define Attributes of Material Types Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics – General Material Master Basic Settings Material Types Define Attributes of Material Types
Transaction Code
OMS2
2.
On the Change View “Material Types”: Overview screen, select Material Type MAT.
3.
Enter the Acct cat. Reference with 0005 for material type MAT.
4.
Double click Quantity/value updating, and make the following entries for the settings of your plant 3710: CUSTOMER
308
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Plant
Qty Updating
Value Update
3710
Select
Select
5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose Back.
7.
On the Change View “Material Types”: Overview screen, Select Material Type SERV.
8.
Enter the Acct cat. Reference with 0006 and choose Initial Status for material type SERV.
9.
Save your entries
4.5.2.2
Configuration of Materials Management
4.5.2.2.1 MRP Settings Create MRP Controller 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation path: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Master Data Define MRP Controllers
Transaction Code
OMD0
2.
On the Change View “MRP Controllers”: Overview screen, choose New Entries F 5 .
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Entry Value
Plant
3710
MRP Controller
001
Description
MRP Controller 001
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
Activate MRP and Set Up Planning File 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation path: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Planning File Entries Activate MRP and Set Up Planning File
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 309
Transaction Code
OMDU
1.
On the Activation screen, choose Material Requirements planning.
2.
On the Change View “Activate Requirements Planning”: Overview screen, enter the following data: Plnt
Plant name
Activate requirements planning
3710
Leave unchanged
X
3.
Save your entries.
4.
Choose Back.
4.5.2.2.2 Purchasing Set Tolerance Limits for Price Variance 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order Set Tolerance Limits for Price Variance
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002196
2.
On the Change View “Tolerance Limits”: Overview screen, choose the New Entries button.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Tolerance Key
PE
Company Code
3710
Amounts in
EUR
Lower Limit Absolute/ Do not check
Selected
Absolute/ Check limit
Not selected
Percentage/ Do not check
Not selected
Percentage/ Check limit
selected
Tolerance limit %
20,00
Upper Limit Absolute/ Do not check
Selected
CUSTOMER 310
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Absolute/ Check limit
Not selected
Percentage/ Do not check
Not selected
Percentage/ Check limit
selected
Tolerance limit %
10,00
4.
Save your settings.
5.
Repeat the above steps for maintenance of the following tolerance key: Field Name
Entry Value
Tolerance Key
SE
Company Code
3710
Amounts in
EUR
Lower Limit Do not check
Selected
Upper Limit Do not check
Not selected
Check limit
Selected
Tolerance limit %
10,00
Taxes in Procurement Setting Tax Indicator for Material Use In this step, you maintain the tax indicators that you wish to assign to materials. You do this for each country of destination. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Taxes Set Tax Indicator for Material
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002112
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 311
2.
On the Change View “Determination of Tax Code: Maintain Material Indicator: Overview” screen, choose New entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries. Dst. Country
Material
Description
NL
0
Material 0%
NL
1
Material 100%
NL
2
Material 50% exempt
NL
7
Service 100%
4.
Save your settings.
5.
Choose Back F 3 .
Result The tax indicators are created.
Setting Tax Indicator for Plant Use In this step, you maintain the tax indicators that you wish to assign to materials. You do this for each country of destination.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Taxes Set Tax Indicator for Plant
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002111
2.
On the Change View “Determination of Tax Indicator: Maintain Plant Indicator: Overview” screen, choose New entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries.
4.
Dst. Country
Plant Tax ID
Description
NL
0
Exempt
NL
1
Taxable
Save your settings. CUSTOMER
312
Localization objects - per Business Priority
5.
Choose Back F 3 .
Result The tax indicators are created.
Setting Tax Indicator for Account Assignment Use In this step, you maintain the tax indicators that you wish to assign to materials. You do this for each country of destination. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Taxes Set Tax Indicator for Account Assignment
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002110
2.
On the Change View “Determine Tax Code: Maintain Account Assignment Indicator: Overview” screen, choose New entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Dst. Country
Account Assignment ID
Description
NL
0
Exempt
NL
1
Taxable
4.
Save your settings.
5.
Choose Back F 3 .
Result The tax indicators are created.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 313
Assigning Tax Indicators for Plant Use In this step, you maintain the tax indicators that you wish to assign to materials. You do these for each country of destination.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Taxes Assign Tax Indicators for Plants
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002103
On the Change View “Assignment of Tax Indicator to Plant”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Plant
Plant Tax ID
Description
Plant_1 (3710)
1
Taxable
3.
Save your settings.
4.
Choose Back F 3
Result The tax indicators are created.
Assigning Tax Indicators for Account Assignments Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Taxes Assign Tax Indicators for Account Assignments
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002096
2.
On the Change View “Assignment of Tax Indicator to Account Assignment Category”: Overview” screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries: CUSTOMER
314
Localization objects - per Business Priority
A
DstC
AcAsg
NL
0
4.
Save your settings.
5.
Choose Back F 3 .
4.5.2.2.3 ERP-Pricing Define Condition Types Use The purpose of this activity is to define condition types.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Conditions Define Price Determination Process Define Condition Type
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002211
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, select Define Condition Types.
3.
On the Change View “Conditions: Condition Types” Overview screen, select New Entries and make the following entries: Cond.Typ e TTX1
4.
Condition class Non-Deductible Tax
Calculation type
Cond.categor y Tax
Taxes
Fixed amount
Save your entries.
Result You have created a new condition type for Pricing.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 315
Define Calculation Schema Use The condition maintenance group bundles condition tables and types for condition maintenance. This defines a special view for condition maintenance.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Conditions Define Price Determination Process Define Pricing Procedure
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002220
2.
On the Change View “Schemas” Overview screen, select New Entries and create the procedure A37001.
3.
Double click Control data.
4.
Make the following entries:
5.
Procedure
Step
Cond. Type
A37001
20
PPR0
A37001
60
PMP0
A37001
100
A37001
200
DRG1
A37001
210
DRN1
A37001
220
DRQ1
A37001
230
DRV1
A37001
240
DRW1
A37001
300
Sum Surcharges/Discounts
A37001
700
Net Amount
A37001
850
A37001
900
A37001
910
Description (enter only the missing ones)
Gross Amount
TTX1 Total Amount DCD1
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 316
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Result You have created the new calculation schema.
Define Schema Group for Purchasing Organizations Use In this step, you define schema groups for your purchasing organization. These allow you to group together purchasing organizations that use the same calculation schema. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Conditions Define Price Determination Process Define Scheme Groups
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002219
2.
On the Choose Activity information screen, choose Schema Groups for Purchasing Organizations.
3.
On the Change View “Schema Groups for Purchasing Organizations”: Overview screen, maintain the following entries: Schema Grp Purch. Org
Description
3710
Pur. Org. 3710 (The Netherlands)
4.
Save your entries.
Result The Standard schema for purchase organizations has been defined.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 317
Define Schema Group - Assignment of Schema Group to Purchasing Organization Use In this step, you assign purchasing transactions and processes to a calculation schema; that is, you specify the cases in which a certain schema is used for standard purchase orders (depending on the schema group of the vendor and the purchasing organization).
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Conditions Define Price Determination Process Define Scheme Group
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002219
2.
In the Choose Activity information screen, choose Assignment of Schema Group to Purchasing Organization.
3.
On the Change View: “Assignment of Schema Group to Purchasing Organization” Overview screen, maintain the following entries:
4.
Purch. Org
Schema group Purch. Org
Comment
3710
3710
[3710/3710]
Save your entries.
Result The assignment of the Group for Calculation Schema (Purchasing Organization) to the Purchasing Organization has been defined.
Define Schema Determination Use In this step, you assign purchasing transactions and processes to a calculation schema; that is, you specify the cases in which a certain schema is used for standard purchase orders (depending on the schema group of the vendor and the purchasing organization).
CUSTOMER 318
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Conditions Define Price Determination Process Define Schema Determination
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002218
2.
In the Choose Activity information screen, choose Determine Calculation Schema for Standard Purchase Orders.
3.
On the Change View: “Assignment of Schema Group to Purchasing Organization” Overview screen, maintain the following entries: Schema GrpPOrg
Sch.Grp Vndr
Proc.
Description
3710
01
A37001
Services/Materials (NL)
3710
(leave blank)
A37001
Services/Materials (NL)
Result The assignment of the Group for Calculation Schema (Purchasing Organization) to the Purchasing Organization has been defined.
4.5.2.2.4 Tax Condition Records Creating Tax Conditions Records Use The purpose of this activity is to create condition records for automatic determination of the tax code in a purchase document. Prerequisites The access sequence 0003 for the condition TTX1 is maintained. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 319
SAP ECC Menu
Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Taxes Create
Transaction Code
MEK1
2.
Enter the condition type TTX1
Non-Deductible Tax and
choose Enter.
3.
Choose the key combination Taxes: Material, Plant and Origin and choose Enter.
4.
Create an entry for each possible combination of Tax indicator for material, Tax Indicator: Plant and Tax indicator: Import and assign in column Tax the tax code, which should be determined for the appropriated combination. Entries for Netherlands (Country key NL): Taxind. Mat.
Taxind. Plant
Import
Tax Key
0
0
0 no import
A8
0
0
1 import
A8
0
0
2 within EC
A8
0
1
0
A8
0
1
1
A8
0
1
2
A8
1
0
0
A8
1
0
1
A8
1
0
2
A8
1
1
0
AA
1
1
1
A8
1
1
2
E1
2
0
0
A8
2
0
1
A8
2
0
2
A8
2
1
0
A9
2
1
1
A8
2
1
2
E2
7
0
0
AC
7
0
1
AC
7
0
2
AC
7
1
0
AE
CUSTOMER 320
Localization objects - per Business Priority
7
1
1
AC
7
1
2
E1
Result The tax condition records have been created.
4.5.2.2.5 Valuation and Account Assignment Configure Price Change in Previous Period 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Materials Management Valuation and Account Assignment Configure Price Change in Previous Period
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002353
2.
On the Change View “Price Change in Previous Period, not in Current Period" screen, select Price carr.over (Price change: carried over from previous to current period) for each company code.
3.
Save your settings.
Group Together Valuation Areas Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Valuation and Account Assignment Account Determination Account Determination Without Wizard Group Together Valuation Areas
Transaction Code
OMWD
2.
On the Change View “Acct Determination for Val. Areas”: Overview screen, enter Val.Grpg Code (Valuation Grouping Code) 0001 for valuation area 3710.
3.
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 321
4.5.2.2.6 Logistics Invoice Verification Access the customizing activities as outlined in the BC Set output documentation below and adjust the settings according to the respective table values listed.
Maintaining Default Values for Tax Codes Use In this step, you define for each company code which tax codes the SAP System suggests when you enter incoming invoices. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification Incoming Invoice Maintain Default Values for Tax Codes
Transaction Code
OMR2
2.
On the Change View “Tax Defaults in Invoice Verification”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following data.
4.
CoCd
Defaults, domestic Tax Code
Default value unplanned delivery costs
3710 Company Code 3710
AA
AA
Save your entries.
Configure How Exchange Rate Differences are Treated Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification Incoming Invoice Configure How Exchange Rate Differences are Treated
CUSTOMER 322
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction Code 2.
3.
S_ALR_87002276
On the Change View "Treatment of Exch. Rate Differences": Overview screen, make the following settings: Field Name
User action and values
CoCd (Company code)
3710
ERD setting
No entry
RType
No entry
CurrType (Local Currency Type)
10
CCCurr
No entry
CurrType (Currency type 1 in ML currency)
30
MLCur1
No entry
CurrType (Currency type 2 in ML currency)
No entry
MLCur2
No entry
Save your settings.
Set Tolerance Limit Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification Invoice Block Set Tolerance Limits
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002392
2.
On the Change View “Tolerance Limits”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values for company code 3710. Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
AN
Company Code
3710
Do not check
X
4.
Save your settings.
5.
Repeat the above steps for all combinations of company codes and tolerance keys displayed by the following shortcuts:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 323
Company Code 3710 Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
AP
Company Code
3710
Absolute value: Do not check
X
Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
BD
Company Code
3710
Absolute value: Do not check Absolute value: Check limit
X
Value
2,56
Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
BR
Company Code
3710
Lower Limit Percentage Check Limit
X
Tolerance Limit %
25
Upper Limit Percentage Check Limit
X
Value
25
Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
BW
Company Code
3710
Percentage: Do not check (Lower limit) Percentage: Check limit (Lower limit)
X
Tolerance limit % (Lower limit)
5,00
Percentage: Do not check (Upper limit) Percentage: Check limit (Upper limit)
X
Tolerance limit % (Upper limit)
2,00
CUSTOMER 324
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
DQ
Company Code
3710
Lower Limit: Absolute- do not check
X
Value Lower limit: Percentage- Do not Check
X
Tolerance limit % Upper Limit: Absolute- Do not check
X
Value Upper Limit: Percentage- Do not Check
X
Tolerance limit %
Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
DW
Company Code
3710
Upper limit: Absolute Do not check
X
Check limit Value
Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
KW
Company Code
3710
Lower limit: Check limit
X
Value
10,23
Lower limit: Percentage- Check limit
X
Tolerance limit %
20,00
Upper Limit: Absolute-Check Limit
X
Value
5,11
Upper Limit: Percentage Check Limit
X
Tolerance Limit %
5,00
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 325
Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
PP
Company Code
3710
Lower limit: Absolute check limit
X
Value
10,23
Lower limit: Percentage- Check
X
Tolerance limit %
20,00
Upper Limit: Absolute- Check Limit
X
Value
5,11
Upper Limit: Percentage-Check Limit
X
Tolerance Limit %
5,00
Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
PS
Company Code
3710
Lower limit: Absolute check limit
X
Value
10,23
Lower limit: Percentage- check limit
X
Tolerance limit %
10,00
Upper Limit: Absolute- check Limit
X
Value
10,23
Upper Limit: Percentage-Check Limit
X
Tolerance Limit %
10,00
Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
ST
Company Code
3710
Upper Limit: Absolute- check limit
X
Value
51,13
Field Name
User action and values
Tolerance key
VP
CUSTOMER 326
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
User action and values
Company Code
3710
Lower limit: Percentage- Do not Check
X
Tolerance limit % Upper Limit: Percentage- Check limit
X
Tolerance Limit %
25,00
6.
Choose Back F 3 .
7.
Save your settings.
Editing PO Supplement Text in Invoice Verification Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification Incoming Invoice Edit PO Supplement Text in Invoice Verification
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002443
2.
On the PO Text Types screen, choose Order text general.
3.
On the Change View “PO Supplement”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
5.
Company Code
PO Text
3710
X
Save your settings.
PO Supplement Text: Parameters, Invoice Verification Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification Incoming Invoice Edit PO Supplement Text in Invoice Verification
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 327
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002443
2.
On the PO Text Types screen, select Notifiable Purchase Order Text Type.
3.
On the Change View “PO Supplement”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the PO Text Types screen, choose Notifiable order text types.
5.
Choose New Entries, and make the following entries:
6.
Company Code
ID
3710
F03
3710
F05
3710
F06
3710
F07
3710
F11
Save your entries.
Configuring Vendor-Specific Tolerances Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management ( Logistics Invoice Verification ( Incoming Invoice ( Configure Supplier-specific Tolerances
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002456
2.
On the Change View “Vendor-Specific Tolerances”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries for company code 3710: Field Name
User action and values
Company Code
3710
Tolerance Group
0001
Absolute lower limit: Check limit
X
Negative Lower limit Acceptance
-200,00
Percentage lower limit:
X
Check limit CUSTOMER 328
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Field Name
User action and values
Percentage Lower Acceptance limit
4,00%
Negative small difference: Check limit
X
Small difference
-10,00
Positive small difference: Check limit
X
Small difference
5,00
Absolute upper limit: Check limit
X
Positive Acceptance Upper limit
50,00
Percentage upper limit: check limit
X
Percentage upper acceptance limit
2,00%
Automatic invoice reduction. Absolute Upper limit: Check limit
X
Invoice reduction tolerance amount
40,00
Percentage upper limit: Check limit
X
Percentage Invoice reduction Tolerance
5,00%
Save your settings.
Setting Check for Duplicate Invoices Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification Incoming Invoice Set Check for Duplicate Invoices
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87099726
On the Change View “Duplicate Invoice Check”: Overview screen, choose New entries, and maintain the following values: Company Code
Check Co. Code
Check reference
Check Inv. Date
3710
X
X
X
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 329
4.5.3
Materials Management - Settings [local] (BR5)
4.5.3.1
Configuration for OP and CE
4.5.3.1.1 Settings for Logistics General Define Attributes for Material Types Use In this activity you define attributes for material types. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics – General Material Master Basic Settings Material Types Define Attributes of Material Types
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002312
2.
On the Change View “Material Types”: Overview screen, select Material Type FERT.
3.
Double click Quantity/value updating, and make the following entries for the settings of your Plant 3710: Plant
Qty Updating
Value Update
3710
Select
Select
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Repeat the above steps for the following material types. Material Type
Plant
Qty Updating
Value Update
HALB
3710
Select
Select
HAWA
3710
Select
Select
LEIH
3710
Select
Select
ROH
3710
Select
Select
Result The attributes of material types have been defined. CUSTOMER 330
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Define Special Procurement Types Use In this step, you define the special procurement keys which, in addition to the procurement type, control the procurement and storage of a material. The special procurement type always refers to a procurement type.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Consumption-Based Planning Master Data Define Special Procurement Type
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87000674
2.
On the Change View “Special Procurement”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Field Name
4.
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Sp.Pr. Type
30
Description
Subcontracting
Procurement Type
F
Special procurement
L
Save your entries.
Result The special procurement type 30 for subcontracting has been defined.
Activate Item Amount Check Use In this step, you determine whether the system blocks invoice items when their value exceeds a certain amount.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 331
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification Invoice Block Item Amount Check Activate Item Amount Check
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002407
On the Change View: “"Activate Block Due to Item Amount”": Overview screen make the following entries: CoCd
Check item amount
3710
X
Save your entries C t r l
Comment
+ S.
Result The activation item amount check has been defined.
Set Item Amount Check Use In this step, you determine whether the system blocks invoice items when their value exceeds a certain amount. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification Invoice Block Item Amount Check Set Item Amount Check
Transaction Code
S_ALR_87002420
On the Change View: "Invoice Verification: Amount Check": Overview screen make the following entries: CoCd
I
3710 3.
Save your entries C t r l
Text for Item Cat.
Goods receipt
Comment
X + S.
CUSTOMER 332
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Result Invoice verification amount check has been defined.
4.5.3.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Define Attributes for Material Types
No
Yes
Define Special Procurement Types
No
Yes
Activate Item Amount Check
No
Yes
Set Item Amount Check
No
Yes
Remarks
In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the source system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.
3.
Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.
4.
The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.
Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the target system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 333
4.5.4
Batch Management (BLH)
4.5.4.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.5.4.1.1 Batch Management General Internal Batch Number Assignment for Assigned Goods Receipt Use The purpose of this activity is to set the internal number allocation of batches at goods receipt to automatic. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics - General Batch Management Batch Number Assignment Activate Internal Batch Number Assignment
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
Choose the activity Internal Batch Number Assignment for Assigned Goods Receipt.
3.
On the Change View “Internal Batch Number Assignment for Assigned Goods Receipt” screen, enter the following information:
4.
Plant
Bch no. automatic f. GR w. acctAssg
Plant_1 (3710)
X
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 334
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.5.4.1.2 Configuration of Batch Management Configuration for Batch Management General Making Settings for Batch Where-Used List Use The purpose of this activity is to make the settings for the batch where-used list.
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics - General Batch Management Batch WhereUsed List Make Settings for Batch Where-Used List
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Batch Where-Used List: Overview screen, enter the following information. Plant
Description
BaWU synchron. posting
PLANT_1 (3710)
Production Plant
X
Save your entries.
Result You have made settings for the batch where-used list.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 335
Configuration for Batch Determination and Batch Check MM Batch Determination and Batch Check Defining Inventory Management Strategy Types (FIFO & Expiration Date) Use The purpose of this activity is to define the Inventory Management strategy types. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistic - General Batch Management Batch Determination and Batch Check Strategy Types Define Inventory Management Strategy Types
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Condit. type
YB11
Description
BP: Batch number
Access seq.
ME01
Comment
Selection Class
YB_BATCH
Sorting Sort sequence
YB_FIFO_SORT
Batch split No. of splits Changes allowed
Leave empty X
Quantity proposal Display UoM
A
CUSTOMER 336
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Comment
Dialog Batch Determin.
Leave empty
Qty proposal
Leave empty
3.
Save your entries.
4.
On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Condit. type
YB12
Description
BP: Expiration date
Access seq.
ME01
Comment
Selection Class
YB_EXP_DATE_002
Sorting Sort sequence
YB_EXP_DATE_SORT
Batch split No. of splits
3
Changes allowed
X
Quantity proposal Display UoM
B
Dialog Batch Determin.
X
Qty proposal 5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose Back F 3 .
Leave empty
Allocating IM Search Procedure/Activate Check Use The purpose of this activity is to allocate the IM search procedure and activate the check. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 337
2.
IMG Menu
Logistic - General Batch Management Batch Determination and Batch Check Batch Search Procedure Allocation and Check Activation Allocate IM Search Procedure /Activate Check
Transaction Code
OMCG
On the Change View “Search Procedures: batch determine. MM”: Overview screen, choose movement type 261 (GI for order) and make the following entries: MvT Movment Type Text 261
S Special Stock description
GI for order
3.
Save your entries.
4.
Choose Back F 3 .
Search
Check batch
YB0001 X
Result You have allocated the IM search procedure and activated the check.
PP Batch Determination and Batch Check Defining Production Order Strategy Types (FIFO & Expiration Date) Use The purpose of this activity is to define the process order strategy types.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistic - General Batch Management Batch Determination and Batch Check Strategy Types Define Production Order Strategy Types
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: CUSTOMER
338
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Condit. type
YB11
Description
BP: Batch number
Access seq.
C001
Comment
Selection Class
YB_BATCH
Sorting Sort sequence
YB_FIFO_SORT
Batch split No. of splits Changes allowed
Leave empty X
Quantity proposal Display UoM
A
Dialog Batch Determin.
Leave empty
Qty proposal
Leave empty
3.
Save your entries.
4.
On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 339
Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Condit. type
YB12
Description
BP: Expiration date
Access seq.
C001
Comment
Selection Class
YB_EXP_DATE_002
Sorting Sort sequence
YB_EXP_DATE_SORT
Batch split No. of splits
3
Changes allowed
X
Quantity proposal Display UoM
B
Dialog Batch Determin.
X
Qty proposal 5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose Back F 3 .
Leave empty
Result You have defined process order strategy types.
Defining Production / Process Order Search Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistic - General Batch Management Batch Determination and Batch Check Batch Search Procedure Definition Define Production Order Search Procedure
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Change View “Procedures”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries:
CUSTOMER 340
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure
Description
YB0001
BP: Search procedure
3.
Choose Back F 3 .
4.
Select your entry (for example, YB0001) and choose Control.
5.
Make the following entries: Step
Contr
CTyp
10
1
YB11
20
1
YB12
6.
Save your entries C t r l
7.
Choose Back F 3 .
+ S
Result You have defined a production order search procedure.
SD Batch Determination and Batch Check Defining Sales & Distribution Strategy Types (FIFO & Expiration Date) Procedure 1.
2.
Access the next activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistic - General Batch Management Batch Determination and Batch Check Strategy Types Define Sales & Distribution Strategy Types
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: Overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Condit. type
YB11
Description
BP: Batch number
Access seq.
SD01
Comment
Selection How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 341
Field Name Class
Description User Action and Values
Comment
YB_BATCH
Sorting Sort sequence
YB_FIFO_SORT
Batch split No. of splits Changes allowed
Leave empty X
Quantity proposal Display UoM
A
Dialog Batch Determin.
Leave empty
Qty proposal
Leave empty
3.
Save your entries.
4.
On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Condit. type
YB12
Description
BP: Expiration date
Access seq.
SD01
Comment
Selection Class
YB_EXP_DATE_002
Sorting Sort sequence
YB_EXP_DATE_SORT
Batch split No. of splits
3
Changes allowed
X
Quantity proposal Display UoM
B
Dialog Batch Determin.
X
Qty proposal 5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose Back F 3 .
Leave empty
CUSTOMER 342
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Result The SD batch search strategy types have been created.
Defining Sales and Distribution Search Procedure Use The purpose of this activity is to define batch search procedures for production orders in the areas Inventory Management, Warehouse Management, and Sales and Distribution. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistic - General Batch Management Batch Determination and Batch Check Batch Search Procedure Definition Define Inventory Management Search Procedure
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Change View “Procedures”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: Procedure
Description
YB0001
BP: Search procedure
3.
Select your entry (for example, YB0001) and choose Control data.
4.
Enter the following information: Step
Contr
CTyp
10
1
YB11
20
1
YB12
5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose Back F 3 .
Result You have defined an SD search procedure.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 343
Allocating SD Search Procedure/Activate Check Use The purpose of this activity is to allocate the IM search procedure and activates the check.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistic - General Batch Management Batch Determination and Batch Check Batch Search Procedure Allocation and Check Activation Allocate SD Search Procedure /Activate Check
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Search Procedure for Batches: Determination in Sales Docs screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:
4.
Sales Org.
Distribution Channel
Division Sales DocType
Search Procedure
Check Batch
3710
10
00
CBFD
YB0001
X
3710
10
00
CBMO
YB0001
X
3710
10
00
OR
YB0001
X
3710
10
00
CBRE
YB0001
X
3710
10
00
KB
YB0001
X
Save your entries.
Result You have allocated the SD search procedure and activated the check.
CUSTOMER 344
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.5.5
Serial Number Management (BLN)
4.5.5.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.5.5.1.1 Configuration Settings for Physical Inventory 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Settings for Physical Inventory
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change view “Settings for Physical Inventory” Overview screen, select the entry Plant_1 (3710) and choose Details.
3.
On the Change View “Settings for Physical Inventory” Details screen, make the following entry: Plant
Display Serial Nos
Print Serial Numbers
3710
X
++++++++++
4.
Choose Back.
5.
Save your entries.
4.5.5.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Material Master Settings
No
Yes
Remarks
In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 345
1.
Logon to the source system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.
3.
Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.
4.
The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.
Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the target system / client.
2.
Goto the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
4.5.6 Procurement & Consumption of Consigned Inventory (BMT) 4.5.6.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.5.6.1.1 Master Data Master Management Changing Material Master Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Change Immediately
Transaction Code
MM02
CUSTOMER 346
Localization objects - per Business Priority
2.
Choose Select view(s).
3.
Select the line MRP2.
4.
Maintain the material master with the following select criteria: Field Name
User Action and Values
Material
RM128
Plant
3710 (production plant)
Procurement Subscreen Special Procurement 5.
10 (consignment)
Save your entries.
Purchasing Create Purchase Info Record Use The purpose of this activity is to create the info records which are necessary to create the purchasing documents for the consignment material.
Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu
Logistics Material Management Purchasing Master Data Info Record ME11 Create
Transaction Code
ME11
Enter the data required on the Create Info Record: Initial screen. Enter the data as follows: Field Name
User Action and Values
Vendor
For example, (Vendor 01)
Material
For example, (Raw material)
Purchasing Organization
3710
Plant
3710 (production plant)
Info category:
“Consignment”
Choose Enter.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 347
4.
On the Create Info Record: General Data screen, choose Purch. Org. Data1.
5.
On the Create Info Record: Purch. Organization Data screen, enter the data as follows: Control Subscreen: Field Name
User Action and Values
Pl.Deliv.Time
For example,
Purch. Group
001
Standard Qty.
1000
GR-Bsd IV
“Set flag”
Net price
165
Currency Key
EUR
Price unit
100
Order price unit
PC
Tax Code
V1
Description
6.
Choose Enter. The system fills in the missing data from material master.
7.
Save your entries.
Result The consignment info record to RM128 and vendor 37300001 is created.
Creating Scheduling Agreement Use The purpose of this activity is to create the scheduling agreement for purchasing. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Outline Agreement Scheduling Agreement Create Vendor Known
Transaction Code
ME31L
Maintain the outline agreement with the following entries: CUSTOMER
348
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
User Action and Values
Description
Vendor
37300001
Agreement type
LP
Scheduling Agreement
Agreement Date
(propose)
Purch. Organization
3710
Purchasing group
001
Plant
3710
3.
Choose Enter.
4.
On the Create Scheduling agreement: Header data screen, make the following entries: Field Name
User Action and Values
Validity end
Description
5.
Choose Enter.
6.
On the Create Scheduling agreement: Item overview screen, make the following entries:
7.
Field Name
User Action and Values
Item cat.egory
K
Material
RM128
Target quantity
120 000
Description
Save your entries.
Maintain Source List Use The purpose of this activity is to maintain/create a source list for a material within a plant (here: for semi RAW material RAW128 (R128). Prerequisite The material RAW128 (R128) must already exist in the material master on plant level.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 349
2.
SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Source List Maintain
Transaction Code
ME01
On the Maintain Source List: Initial screen, make the following entries: Field Name
User Action and Values
Material
For example,
Plant
For example,
Description
Production plant
3.
Choose Enter.
4.
On the Maintain Source List: Overview screen, make the following entries: Field Name
User Action and Values
Description
Valid from
For example,
Today
Valid to
For example,
Date in the very future
Vendor
For example,
Relevant Vendor
POrg
For example,
Relevant Purchase Organization
OUn
For example, (will be set from the system)
Purchase order unit
Agmt
For example,
Relevant agreement number (here delivery schedule)
Item
For example,
Relevant item from delivery schedule
MRP
For example,
Source list usage in Materials planning
5.
Choose the source list line and go to Header Source list Check. A system message appears All source list records OK.
6.
Save your entries.
7.
Go back twice.
CUSTOMER 350
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.5.7Return to Vendor (BMZ) 4.5.7.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.5.7.1.1 Returns to Vendor Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Order Returns Order Returns to Vendor
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries: Cat
Type
SPlt
Del. Type Returns
F
NB
Plant_1 (3710)
RL
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
4.5.8 Sample Master Data Business Partners [local] (JA2) Both Material Management and Sales and Distribution are using the business partner master data. Please check which area is responsible for the configuration.
4.5.8.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.5.8.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP GUI Transaction
BP _Maintain Business Partner (Enter in the transaction call field)
Access via FIORI Launchpad in an OP (On Premise) environment: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 351
Business Role ID and
SAP_BR_BUPA_MASTER_SPECIALIST
Name
Master Data Specialist - Business Partner Data
Access via FIORI Launchpad in a CLOUD environment: Business Catalog Role ID
SAP_BCR_CMD_BP_MAINT_PC
and Name
Master Data - Business Partner
2.
Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment
3.
On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100001
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
KLANT1
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Binnenlandse klant 1
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ING
Bank account number
005544999
Industry System
1
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B01
City
Apeldoorn
City postal code
7322 HR
Street
Korfstraat
House Number
1
CUSTOMER 352
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
2
Language Key
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
+31 26 12345
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
+31 26 12345
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
19000101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
I
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 353
Field Name
Entry Value
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
0012100000
Terms of Payment Key
4
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST1
Accounting clerk
1
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
1
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
's-Hertogenbosch
Delivery Priority
2
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
1
Terms of Payment Key
4
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
4.
Save your entries.
5.
On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100002
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
KLANT2
Form-of-Address Key
3
CUSTOMER 354
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Name 1 of organization
Binnenlandse klant 1
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ABN
Bank account number
#009876543
Industry System
1
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL1
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B02
City
Arnhem
City postal code
3012 CL
Street
Keizersgracht
House Number
2
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
1
Language Key
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
+31 55 12345
Complete number: dialing code + number+extension
+31 55 12345
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 355
Field Name
Entry Value
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
I
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
NL
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
0012100000
Terms of Payment Key
4
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST2
Accounting clerk
1
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
1
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
's-Hertogenbosch
CUSTOMER 356
Localization objects - per Business Priority
6.
Field Name
Entry Value
Delivery Priority
2
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
1
Terms of Payment Key
4
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
Save your entries.
4.5.8.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors 1.
Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment. Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37300001
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
LEV01
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Binnenlandse leverancier NL 01
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
FLVN01
BP Role Category
FLVN01
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ABN
Bank account number
0544044150
Tax Number Category
NL
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B02
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 357
Field Name
Entry Value
City
Amsterdam
City postal code
1071 DG
Street
Honthorststraat
House Number
1
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
NH
Address time zone
CET
Language Key
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code +number
+31 71 5232 0
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
+31 71 5232 0
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
CUSTOMER 358
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Purchase order currency
EUR
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
21100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
4
Our account number with the vendor
3710-LEV01
Accounting clerk
1
Purchasing Organization
3710
Currency
EUR
Terms of Payment Key
4
Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification
X
Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)
1
Purchasing Group
1
Planned Delivery Time in Days
2
Shipping Conditions
1
Partner Function
LF
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
2.
Save your entries.
3.
On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37300002
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
LEV01
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Binnenlandse leverancier NL 02
BP: Legal form of organization
1
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 359
Field Name
Entry Value
BP role
FLVN01
BP Role Category
FLVN01
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ABN
Bank account number
0265425328
Tax Number Category
NL01
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B05
City
Leiden
City postal code
2311 CV
Street
Kerkstraat
House Number
2
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
DR
Address time zone
CET
Language Key
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
0592 362-0
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
05292 362-0
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
CUSTOMER 360
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Field Name
Entry Value
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
21100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
4
Our account number with the vendor
3710- LEV01
Accounting clerk
1
Purchasing Organization
3710
Currency
EUR
Terms of Payment Key
4
Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification
X
Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)
1
Purchasing Group
1
Planned Delivery Time in Days
3
Shipping Conditions
1
Partner Function
LF
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 361
4.5.8.1.3 Create Domestic Contacts for Business Partners Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP GUI Transaction
BP _Maintain Business Partner (Enter in the transaction call field)
Access via FIORI Launchpad in an OP (On Premise) environment: Business Role ID and
SAP_BR_BUPA_MASTER_SPECIALIST
Name
Master Data Specialist - Business Partner Data
Access via FIORI Launchpad in a CLOUD environment:
2.
Business Catalog Role ID
SAP_BCR_CMD_BP_MAINT_PC
and Name
Master Data - Business Partner
Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37910001
37910002
37910003
37910004
Business partner category
1
1
1
1
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
BP03
BP03
BP03
37910001
37910002
37910003
3791000
Search term 1 for business partner
4 Form-of-Address Key
1
2
1
2
First name of business partner (person)
Alina
Alexander
Barbara
Bernd
Last name of business partner (person)
Mueller
Linke
Meger
Fischer
Sex of business partner (person)
1
2
1
2
Business Partner: Correspondence Language
N
N
N
N
CUSTOMER 362
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
NL
NL
NL
BP role
BUP001
BUP001
BUP001
BUP001
BP Role Category
BUP001
BUP001
BUP001
BUP001
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
NL
NL
NL
City
Apeldoorn
Apeldoorn
Arnhem
Arnhem
City postal code
7322 HR
7322 HR
3012 C
3012 C
Street
Amerikastraat
Amerikastraat 1
Keizersgracht
Keizersgracht
House Number
1
2
1
2
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
GE
GE
GE
Address time zone
CET
CET
CET
CET
Language Key
N
N
N
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
NL
NL
NL
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
NL
NL
NL
Country ISO code
NL
NL
NL
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
X
X
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
09990 4513-0
09990 4513-0
09990 41252-0
09990 41252-0
Telephone no.: Extension
01
02
01
02
Complete number: dialing code + number+extension
09990 4513-12
09990 4513-32
09990 41252212
09990 41252221
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
1
1
1
Sequence Number
1
1
1
1
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 363
Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Communication Data: 10101 Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
10101
10101
Communication Data: 99991231 Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
99991231
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
X
X
X
E-Mail Address
alina.mueller alexander.linke barbara.meger bernd.fischer @37100001.com @37100001.com @37100002.com @37100002.com
Communication Data: 10101 Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
10101
10101
Communication Data: 99991231 Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
99991231
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
XXDEFAULT
XXDEFAULT
XXDEFAULT
Business Partner Number
37100001
37100001
37100002
37100002
37910005
37910006
37910007
3791008
Business Partner Number
4 Business Partner Relationship Category
BUR001
BUR001
BUR001
BUR001
Remark: In the UI transaction you need to create a "Relationship" of the BP-Employee to the indicated BP-Customers. The relationship type BUR001 is shown as “Is Employee of …” Validity Date (Valid To)
99991231
99991231
99991231
99991231
Validity Date (Valid From)
10101
10101
10101
10101
Function of partner
3
2
2
3
Department
3
2
2
3
CUSTOMER 364
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
First telephone no.: dialing code + number
05777- 4513-0
05777- 4513-0
026 41252-0
026 41252-0
First Telephone No.: Extension
12
32
212
221
E-Mail Address
alina.mueller alexander.linke barbara.meger bernd.fischer @37100001.com @37100001.com @37100002.com @37100002.com
Sales Organization
3710
3710
3710
3710
Distribution Channel
10
10
10
10
Division
0
0
0
0
Save your entries.
4.5.9 Trading Goods (HAWA) related sample master data [local] (BM7) 4.5.9.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.5.9.1.1 Creating Material Master – Organization Dependent Views for Trading Materials Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General) Immediately
Transaction code
MM01
On the initial screen, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field name
3.
Description User action and values
Material
Industry sector
M Mechanical Engineer
Material type
HAWA Trade materials
Note
In the Select View(s) dialog box, choose Views:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 365
4.
5.
General Plant Data / Storage 1 and 2: for all materials Material
Plant 1
TG10
3710
TG11
3710
TG12
3710
TG13
3710
TG14
3710
TG20
3710
TG21
3710
TG22
3710
Choose Enter.
General Plant Data / Storage 1/2 1.
Choose the Plant data/stor.1/2 tab, view entries and choose Enter to continue. Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Plant
Comment
3710
Stor. location
see table below for material- and plant-specific data
Material
Plant
Stor. Location
TG10
3710
371A;
TG11
3710
371A;371R
TG12
3710
371A;371R
TG13
3710
371A
TG14
3710
371A
TG20
3710
371A;371R
TG21
3710
371A;371R
TG22
3710
371A;371R
2.
Choose Enter to go to the second screen.
3.
Save your entries to go to the initial screen.
4.
On the initial screen, make the following entries and choose Enter:
CUSTOMER 366
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
5.
Description
User action and values
Material
Industry sector
M Mechanical Engineer
Material type
ROH Raw Materials
Note
see table below
In the Select View(s) dialog box, choose Views:
Sales Org. Data 1 and 2, Sales General Plant Data: for all materials Purchasing and Purchase Order Text: for all materials MRP views 1, 2, 3 and 4: for all materials Accounting 1 and 2: for all materials 6.
Choose Enter and make the following entries: Field name
7.
Description User action and values
Plant
3710
Stor. location
Sales Org.
3710
Distr.Channel
10
Material
Plant 1
Sales Org. 1
TG10
3710
3710
TG11
3710
3710
TG12
3710
3710
TG13
3710
3710
TG14
3710
3710
TG20
3710
3710
TG21
3710
3710
TG22
3710
3710
Note first create the materials for plant 3710, see table below for further plants first create the materials for sales organization 3710, see table below for further sales organizations
Choose Enter.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 367
Sales Data 1.
On the Sales: sales org. 1 tab page, make the following entries, and choose Enter: Field name
2.
Description User action and values
Delivering plant
3710
Tax classification ("TTX1")
1 for taxable
On the Sales: sales org. 2 tab page, make the following entries, and choose Enter: Field name
3.
Note
Description
User action and values
Acct assignment grp
01
Item category group
Note
On the Sales: General/plant tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Availability check
Y2
Trans. Grp
0001
LoadingGrp
0001
Batch Management
Profit Center
YB700
Note
set batch management indicator for materials TG21 and TG22
4.
On the Sales text tab page, enter the text that should appear on sales documents for this material.
5.
Choose the MRP tab page (ENTER does not work when the cursor is in a text field).
Purchasing Data 1.
On the Purchasing tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field name Purchasing group
Description User action and values
Note see table below for material- and plantspecific data
CUSTOMER 368
Localization objects - per Business Priority
2.
Material
Plant
Purchasing group
TG10
3710
001
TG11
3710
002
TG12
3710
002
TG13
3710
001
TG14
3710
002
TG20
3710
002
TG21
3710
002
TG22
3710
002
Choose the MRP1 tab page (ENTER does not work when the cursor is in a text field).
MRP Data 1.
On the MRP1 tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter. Field name
Description
MRP type
User action and values
Note
PD
see table below
VB Reorder point
0;
see table below
10 MRP controller
see table below
Lot size
EX
see table below
Material
Plant
MRP Type
Reorder Point
MRP controller
Lot Size
TG10
3710
PD
0
001
EX
TG11
3710
PD
0
001
EX
TG12
3710
VB
10
001
EX
TG13
3710
VB
10
001
EX
TG14
3710
PD
0
001
EX
TG20
3710
VB
10
001
EX
TG21
3710
VB
10
001
EX
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 369
TG22 2.
3710
VB
10
001
On the MRP2 tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter. Field name
Description
User action and values
Procurement Type
F
Special Procurement
blank;
Storage Location for External Procurement
3.
EX
Note
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
SchedMargin Key
000
Planned Delivery Time
Storage Location for External Procurement
Material
Plant
TG10
3710
8
TG11
3710
10
TG12
3710
10
TG13
3710
8
TG14
3710
10
TG20
3710
10
TG21
3710
10
TG22
3710
10
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Planned Delivery Time
On the MRP3 tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter. Field name
Description
User action and values
Strategy group
40
Total replenishment lead time
Material
Plant
Total repl. lead time
TG10
3710
5
Note
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
CUSTOMER 370
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Material
Plant
Total repl. lead time
TG11
3710
4
TG12
3710
4
TG13
3710
5
TG14
3710
4
TG20
3710
4
TG21
3710
4
TG22
3710
4
On the MRP4 tab page, view values and choose Enter.
Accounting Data Procedure 1.
On the Accounting 1 tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter. Field name
2.
Description
User action and values
Note
Price unit
1
Standard price
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Per. unit price
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Material
Plant
Standard price
Per. unit price
TG10
3710
13,00
13,00
TG11
3710
13,50
13,50
TG12
3710
13,50
13,50
TG13
3710
13,50
13,50
TG14
3710
13,50
13,50
TG20
3710
13,50
13,50
TG21
3710
13,50
13,50
TG22
3710
13,50
13,50
Select the second accounting screen
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 371
3.
Choose Enter.
4.
The Last data screen reached dialog box appears.
5.
Choose Yes to save your entries.
Result The trading materials are created.
4.5.10 BP-Customers and -Suppliers, Sample Master Data [local] (BN6) Both Material Management and Sales and Distribution are using the business partner master data. Please check which area is responsible for the configuration.
4.5.10.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.5.10.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 1.
2.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Settlement Management Environment Master Data Maintain Business Partner
Transaction code
BP
On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100003
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
Customer3
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Domestic NL 3
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
CUSTOMER 372
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
BP role
FLCU00
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ING
Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)
NL40INGB0005544499
Industry System
0001
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B03
City
Duivendrecht
City postal code
1114 AJ
Street
Oostweg
House Number
2
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
0000000002
Language Key
NL
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
20 570 1922
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
20 570 1923
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 373
Field Name
Entry Value
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
C
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
0012100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
NT30
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST3
Accounting clerk
01
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
01
CUSTOMER 374
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
Amsterdam
Delivery Priority
02
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
01
Terms of Payment Key
0004
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG (RE, RG, WE)
Partner counter
000
Default Partner
X
3.
Save your entries.
4.
On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100004
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
Customer 4
Form-of-Address Key
0003
Name 1 of organization
Domestic NL 4
BP: Legal form of organization
01
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
BP role
FLCU00
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ING
Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number) How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
NL40INGB0005544499 CUSTOMER 375
Field Name
Entry Value
Industry System
0001
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL161882268
City
Diemen
City postal code
1112 XN
Street
Diemerhof
House Number
10
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
0000000001
Language Key
NL
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
20 346 3400
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
20 346 3400
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
001
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
CUSTOMER 376
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
C
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
DE
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
009
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
12100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
0004
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST4
Accounting clerk
1
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
1
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
Amsterdam
Delivery Priority
02
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
1
Terms of Payment Key
0004
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 377
Field Name
Entry Value
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG (RE, RG, WE)
Partner counter
000
Default Partner
X
5.
Save your entries.
6.
On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100006
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
Customer 6
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Domestic NL 6 (Returns)
BP: Legal form of organization
01
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
BP role
FLCU00
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ABN
Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)
NL02ABNA0123456789
Industry System
0001
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B03
City
Amsterdam Zuid-Oost
City postal code
1101 HE
CUSTOMER 378
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Street
De Entree
House Number
123
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
0000000001
Language Key
NL
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
800 2487636
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
800 2487636
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
001
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
001
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 379
7.
Field Name
Entry Value
Purchase order currency
EUR
Account Number of Vendor or Creditor
373000006
External Interface: Tax Indicators
C
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
009
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
0012100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
0004
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST6
Accounting clerk
01
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
01
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
Amsterdam
Delivery Priority
02
Shipping Conditions
RE
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
01
Terms of Payment Key
0004
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG (RE, RG, WE)
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
Save your entries. CUSTOMER
380
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.5.10.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors Procedure 1.
2.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Settlement Management Environment Master Data Maintain Business Partner
Transaction code
BP
On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37300006
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
Supplier 6
Form-of-Address Key
0003
Name 1 of organization
Domestic NL 6 (Returns)
BP: Legal form of organization
01
BP role
FLVN01
BP role
FLVN00
BP Role Category
FLVN01
BP Role Category
FLVN00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ABN
Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)
NL02ABNA0123456789
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B03
City
Amsterdam Zuid-Oost
City postal code
1101 HE
Street
De Entree
House Number
123
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 381
Field Name
Entry Value
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Language Key
NL
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
DE
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
800 2487636
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
800 2487636
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Customer Number
37100006
Purchase order currency
EUR
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
009
CUSTOMER 382
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
Field Name
Entry Value
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
21100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
0001
Our account number with the vendor
3710-LIEF6
Accounting clerk
01
Purchasing Organization
3710
Currency
EUR
Terms of Payment Key
0001
Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification
X
Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)
01
Purchasing Group
001
Planned Delivery Time in Days
2
Shipping Conditions
01
Partner Function
LF
Partner counter
000
Default Partner
X
Save your entries.
4.5.11 Physical Inventory / Inventory Count and Adjustment (BMN) 4.5.11.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.5.11.1.1 Allow Freezing of Book Inventory Balance in Storage Location Use The purpose of this step is to allow freezing of book inventory balance in storage location.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 383
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Allow Freezing of Book Inventory Balance in Storage Location
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, enter Plant choosing Enter.
3.
On the Change View “Storage Locations”: Overview screen, choose Freeze book inv. SLoc for the storage locations shown below:
1 (3710)
and confirm
Storage Location Std. storage 1 (371A) Std. storage 2 (371B) Returns (371C) Shipping (371R) 4.
Save your entries.
4.5.11.1.2 Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences Use The purpose of this step is to define tolerances for physical inventory differences.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences
Transaction Code
OMJ2
2.
On the Maintain Phys. Inv. Tolerance Employee screen choose Physical inventory tolerance group.
3.
On the Change View Tolerance Groups for Persons Processing Inventory Differences screen, select New Entries. CUSTOMER
384
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
5.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the values shown below: Field
Value
Phys.inv.tolerance group
0001
Company Code
3710
Diff. Amount per phys.inv.doc
100.000,00
Diff. Amount per phys.inv. item
10.000,00
Save your entries.
4.5.11.1.3 Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences Use The purpose of this step is to define tolerances for physical inventory differences. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences
Transaction Code
OMJ2
2.
On the Maintain Phys. Inv. Tolerance Employee screen choose User Name.
3.
On the Change View “Allocate User--> Phys. Inv. Tolerance Gr.": Overview.” screen, make the following entries:
4.
Field
Value
User name
*
Phys.inv.tolerance grp
0001
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 385
4.5.12 General materials (MAT) related sample master data sLog/Local (J51) 4.5.12.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.5.12.1.1 Create Material Master 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Fiori Application
2.
Manage Material
On the Material screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Basic Data Material
TG0011
Material Group
L001 – Trading Material
Generic Item Group Category
NORM – Standard Item
Basic Data Details Material Description
Handelsware, PD, Normaler Handel
Base Unit of Measure
PC
Net Weight
0,900 KG
Gross Weight
1,000 KG
Transportation Group
0001
Plants Plant
3710
Availability Check
SP
Loading Group
0001
Procurement Type
F
Purchasing Group
001
Scheduling Margin Key
000
Profit Center
YB110
Period Indicator
M
Plant: Material Requirements Planning MRP Type
PD
CUSTOMER 386
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
MRP Controller
001
Lot Size
EX
Plant: Storage Locations Storage Location
371A
Storage Location
371B
Distribution Chains Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Item Category Group
NORM
Distribution Chain: Sales Delivering Plant
3710
Accounting Assignment Group
01
Item Category Group
NORM
Distribution Chain: Tax Country
NL
Tax Category
TTX1
Tax Classification
1
Valuation Area Plant Valuation Class
3100
Material Price Determination Control
2
Currency (Company Code Currency)
EUR
Standard price (Company Code Currency)
20.00
Price Unit (Company Code Currency)
1
Price Control (Company Code Currency)
V
Currency (Group Currency)
USD
Standard price (Group Currency)
25.00
Price Unit (Group Currency)
1
Price Control (Group Currency)
V
3.
Save your entries.
4.
On the Material screen, create the following settings:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 387
Field Name
Entry Value
Basic Data Material
TG0011
Material Group
L001 – Trading Material
Generic Item Group Category
NORM – Standard Item
Basic Data Details Material Description
Handelsware, Bestellpunkt, Normaler Handel
Base Unit of Measure
PC
Net Weight
0,900 KG
Gross Weight
1,000 KG
Transportation Group
0001
Plants Plant
3710
Availability Check
SP
Loading Group
0001
Procurement Type
F
Purchasing Group
001
Scheduling Margin Key
000
Profit Center
YB110
Period Indicator
M
Plant: Material Requirements Planning MRP Type
PD
MRP Controller
001
Lot Size
EX
Plant: Storage Locations Storage Location
371A
Storage Location
371B
Distribution Chains Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Item Category Group
NORM
CUSTOMER 388
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Distribution Chain: Sales Delivering Plant
3710
Accounting Assignment Group
01
Item Category Group
NORM
Distribution Chain: Tax Country
NL
Tax Category
TTX1
Tax Classification
1
Valuation Area Plant
5.
Valuation Class
3100
Material Price Determination Control
2
Currency (Company Code Currency)
EUR
Standard price (Company Code Currency)
20.00
Price Unit (Company Code Currency)
1
Price Control (Company Code Currency)
V
Currency (Group Currency)
USD
Standard price (Group Currency)
25.00
Price Unit (Group Currency)
1
Price Control (Group Currency)
V
Save your entries.
4.5.12.1.2 Create Info Records Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Fiori Application
Create Info Records
On the Create Info Records screen, create the following settings:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 389
Field Name
Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
002
001
002
3710
3710
3710
I_INCO1
EXW
EXW
EXW
I_INCO2
VENDOR
VENDOR
VENDOR
I_EKGRP I_EKORG
Purchasing Organization
I_INFOCA T
Info record Category Indicator
NORMB
NORMB
NORMB
I_LIFNR
Vendor's account number
37300001
37300001
37300002
I_MATNR
Material Number
TG0011
TG0012
TG0011
I_MWSKZ
AA
AA
AA
I_NETPR
30.00
40.00
35.00
I_NORBM
10
100
10
I_PEINH
1
1
1
I_UEBTO
10
10
10
I_UNTTO
10
10
10
I_WAERS
EUR
EUR
EUR
3710
3710
3710
X
X
X
I_WERKS
Plant
I_XERSN 2.
Save your entries.
3.
On the Create Info Records screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
001
001
001
3710
3710
3710
I_INCO1
EXW
EXW
EXW
I_INCO2
VENDOR
VENDOR
VENDOR
I_EKGRP I_EKORG
Purchasing Organization
I_INFOCA T
Info record Category Indicator
NORMB
NORMB
NORMB
I_LIFNR
Vendor's account number
37300002
37300001
37300002
CUSTOMER 390
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
I_MATNR
Material Number
TG0012
TG0001
TG0001
I_MWSKZ
AA
AA
AA
I_NETPR
45.00
10
10
I_NORBM
100
10
10
I_PEINH
1
1
1
I_UEBTO
10
10
10
I_UNTTO
10
10
10
I_WAERS
EUR
EUR
EUR
3710
3710
3710
X
X
X
I_WERKS
Plant
I_XERSN 4.
Save your entries.
4.5.12.1.3 Condition Maintenance Purch. Prices Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Fiori Application
2.
Edit Info Record
On the Edit Info Record screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Application as Condition Technique
M
M
M
Condition Maintenance Group
0MMP010001
0MMP010001
0MMP010001
Maintenance Context
AMMP010001 AMMP010001 AMMP010001
Condition Type
PPR0
PPR0
PPR0
Purchasing Organization
3710
3710
3710
Vendor Account Number
37300001
37300002
37300001
0
0
0
Purchasing info record category How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 391
3.
Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Material Number
TG0011
TG0011
TG0012
Plant
3710
3710
3710
Condition Rate
30.00
35.00
40.00
Condition Currency
EUR
EUR
EUR
Condition Pricing Unit
1
1
1
Calculation Type for Condition
C
C
C
Usage for Condition Technique
PR
PR
PR
Condition Table
SAP017
SAP017
SAP017
On the Edit Info Record screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Application as Condition Technique
M
M
M
Condition Maintenance Group
0MMP010001
0MMP010001
0MMP010001
Maintenance Context
AMMP010001 AMMP010001 AMMP010001
Condition Type
PPR0
PPR0
PPR0
Purchasing Organization
3710
3710
3710
37300002
37300001
37300002
Purchasing info record category
0
0
0
Material Number
TG0012
TG0001
TG0001
Plant
3710
3710
3710
Condition Rate
45.00
10.00
10.00
Condition Currency
EUR
EUR
EUR
Condition Pricing Unit
1
1
1
Calculation Type for Condition
C
C
C
Usage for Condition Technique
PR
PR
PR
Vendor Account Number
CUSTOMER 392
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Condition Table
SAP017
SAP017
SAP017
Save your entries.
4.5.12.1.4 Condition Maintenance Sales Prices Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Fiori Application
2.
3.
Edit Info Record
On the Edit Info Record screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Application as Condition Technique
V
V
Condition Maintenance Group
0SDP020001 0SDP020001
Maintenance Context
GCM
GCM
Condition Type
PPR0
PPR0
Sales Organization
3710
3710
Distribution Channel
10
10
Material Number
TG0011
TG0012
Condition Rate
50.00
60.00
Condition Currency
EUR
EUR
Usage for Condition Technique
PR
PR
Condition Table
SAP304
SAP304
Condition Pricing Unit
1
1
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 393
4.5.13
Sample Master Data Ariba Integration [local] (J88)
4.5.13.1
Configuration - On Premise
The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1.
Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings.
2.
Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by .
3.
Additional settings that must be made covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.
4.5.13.1.1 Create Domestic Vendors Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: UI
2.
Manage Supplier Master Data (Transaction /bp)
On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings:
CUSTOMER 394
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37300080
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
LIEF80
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Domestic NL (Ariba Network)
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
FLVN01 / FLVN00
BP Role Category
FLVN01 / FLVN00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
50070024
Bank account number
240202
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
058-2884114
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
058-2884114
Sequence Number
1
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Flag: Connected to an SAP System
3
Sequence Number
1
BUS_EI_ADDRESS_TASK
I
City
Leeuwarden
City postal code
8938 AR
Street
Mercuriusweg
House Number
10
Region (State, Province, County)
4
Address time zone
CET
Language Key
D
2-Character SAP Language Code
DE
City file test status
C
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 395
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
21100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
I
Terms of Payment Key
1
Our account number with the vendor
3710-LIEF80
Planning group
3.
Accounting clerk
1
Purchasing Organization
3710
Currency
EUR
Terms of Payment Key
1
Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification
X
Purchasing Group
001
Planned Delivery Time in Days
2
Shipping Conditions
1
Partner Function
LF
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
Save your entries.
4.5.13.1.2 Create Info Record Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: UI
2.
Create Info Record (ME11)
On the Maintain Material Prices screen, create the following settings:
CUSTOMER 396
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description
Entry Value
I_APLFZ
1
I_EKGRP
0001
I_EKORG
Purchasing Organization
3710
I_INCO1
EXW
I_INCO2
VENDOR
I_INFOCAT
Info record Category Indicator
NORMB
I_LIFNR
Vendor's account number
37300080
I_MATNR
Material Number
TG0011
I_NETPR
20
I_NORBM
10
I_PEINH
1
I_UEBTO
10
I_UNTTO
10
I_WAERS
EUR
I_WERKS
Plant
I_XERSN
3710 X
3.
Save your entries.
4.
On the Maintain Material Prices screen, create the following settings:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 397
Field Name
Description
Entry Value
I_APLFZ
10
I_EKGRP
0001
I_EKORG
Purchasing Organization
3710
I_INCO1
EXW
I_INCO2
VENDOR
I_INFOCAT
Info record Category Indicator
NORMB
I_LIFNR
Vendor's account number
37300080
I_MATNR
Material Number
TG0012
I_NETPR
20
I_NORBM
100
I_PEINH
1
I_UEBTO
10
I_UNTTO
10
I_WAERS
EUR
I_WERKS
Plant
3710
I_XERSN 5.
X
Save your entries.
4.5.13.1.3 Map Company Codes for Log. Invoice Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: IMG Menu
Integration with Other SAP Components SAP Business Suite Integration Component for Ariba Application-Specific Settings SAP ERP Integration Component for Ariba Define SAP-ERP Specific Mapping Settings Define Mapping Settings for Invoices
2.
In the dialog box, double click Incoming Invoice: Map Company Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification.
3.
On the Change View “Incoming Invoice: Map Company Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification” screen, create the following entry: Vendor
Name of Partner in cXML
37300080 Company Code 3710
Company Code 3710
CUSTOMER 398
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Save your entries.
4.5.13.1.4 Map Tax Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: IMG Menu
Integration with Other SAP Components SAP Business Suite Integration Component for Ariba Application-Specific Settings SAP ERP Integration Component for Ariba Define SAP-ERP Specific Mapping Settings Define Mapping Settings for Invoices
2.
In the dialog box, double click Incoming Invoice: Map Tax Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification.
3.
On the Change View “Incoming Invoice: Map Company Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification” screen, create the following entry: Vendor
Tax Category in cXML
Tax rate in cXML
Country Tax Code
____(blank)
Vat
0
NL
A8
____(blank)
Vat
21
NL
AA
____(blank)
Vat
6
NL
A9
37300080
Vat
0
NL
A8
37300080
Vat
21
NL
AA
6
NL
A9
37300080) Vat
Remark: “vat” has to be entered in lower case!!! 4.
Save your entries.
4.5.14 BP-Customers and -Suppliers CPD, Sample Master Data [local] (BRC) 4.5.14.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.5.14.1.1 Create CPD Customers 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Settlement Management Environment Master Data Maintain Business Partner
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 399
Transaction code 2.
BP
On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100273
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
CPDS
Search term 1 for business partner
CPD NL
Form-of-Address Key
0003
Name 1 of organization
Domestic Customer NL CPD
BP: Legal form of organization
01
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
FLCU00
BP role BP role BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
FLCU00
BP Role Category BP Role Category Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys IBAN (International Bank Account Number) Industry System Industry sector Tax Number Category Business Partner Tax Number City
Leeuwarden
City postal code
8938 AR
Street House Number Country Key
NL
CUSTOMER 400
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Region (State, Province, County) Address time zone Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered Language Key
NLD
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number Complete number: dialing code + number + extension Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
19000101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
19000101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
C
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 401
3.
Field Name
Entry Value
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
009
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
12100000
Payment methods
T
Terms of Payment Key
0001
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CPD
Accounting clerk
01
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
01
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
Leeuwarden
Delivery Priority
02
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
01
Terms of Payment Key
0001
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG
Partner counter
000
Default Partner
X
Save your entries.
4.6 Localization objects for Sales and Distribution
CUSTOMER 402
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.6.1 Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local] (J94) 4.6.1.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.6.1.1.1 ERP Tax Define Tax Access Sequence Use This activity defines access sequences. The access sequence is a search strategy, which the SAP System uses to search for condition records valid for a condition type. For example, you can define for a price that the SAP System first searches for a customerspecific price and then for a price list price.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Transaction code
SPRO
IMG menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define Access Sequences
2.
Double click Maintain Access Sequences.
3.
Accept the warning dialog box.
4.
Choose New Entries.
5.
Make the following entries: Field name
Description
User action and values
AcSq
TTX1
Description
Tax on Sales or Purchases
6.
Choose Enter.
7.
Double click Accesses.
8.
Choose New Entries.
9.
Make the following entries:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Note
CUSTOMER 403
Field name
Description
User action and values
No.
10
Table
002
Requirement
7
10.
Choose Enter.
11.
Save your entries.
12.
Choose Back.
Note
Define Tax Condition Types Use This activity defines condition types. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define Condition Types
Transaction Code
SPRO
Table / Delivery Class
T685 / Dev. Class E
BBID Task / File
VV_T685A_VA_VV_T685A_VA_J94.TXT
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Maintain Condition Types.
3.
Choose New Entries.
4.
Make the following entries: Source
TTX1 5.
Target
Output Tax TTX1
Comment 1.) Shared CT by SFS and PBP 2.) Delete old CT-Key from name Output Tax Output Tax (MWST)
Make the following entries: Field Name Condition Type
Description
User Action and Values
Comment
TTX1
CUSTOMER 404
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Description
Output Tax
Access Sequence
TTX1
Comment
Control data 1 Cond. Class
D
Calculat.type
A
Condition Category
D
Rounding Rule
blank
Group condition Group cond.
X
Changes which can be made Manual entries
D
Amount/percent Item condition
X
Delete Master data Delete fr. DB Control data 2 Qty conversion Test determination TextDetPrc Text ID 6.
Save your entries.
7.
Choose Back.
Result You created a new condition type.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 405
Define Tax Determination Rules Use In this section, you define the rules for tax calculation.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Taxes Define Tax Determination Rules
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Tax: Tax Category by Country”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, maintain the following: Tax Country NL
4.
The Netherlands
Sequence
Tax Category
1
TTX1
Output Tax
Save your entries.
Define Tax Relevancy of Master Records for Customer Taxes Use In this section, you define the tax relevance for customers and materials for each tax category. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Taxes Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records Customer Taxes Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View Customer Taxes: Overview screen choose New Entries F 5 .
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, maintain the following: Tax categ.
Tax class
Description
CUSTOMER 406
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
TTX1
0
Tax Exempt
TTX1
1
Liable for Taxes
Save your entries.
Define Tax Relevancy of Master Records for Material Taxes Use In this section, you define the tax relevance for customers and materials for each tax category. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Taxes Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records Material Taxes Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View Material Taxes: Overview screen, choose New Entries F 5 .
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, maintain the following:
4.
Tax categ.
Tax class
Description
TTX1
0
No tax
TTX1
1
Full tax
TTX1
2
Half tax
TTX1
7
Full tax Service
Save your entries.
4.6.1.1.2 Maintain Tax Condition Records Use In this activity you create Tax Condition records for the specific country. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 407
2.
IMG Menu
N/A
Transaction Code
VK15
BBID
J94
Task / File
SMB99_VK15_O200_J01_J94.TXT
On the Create Condition Records screen, make the following entries and choose Execute: Field
Input Value
Condition Type
TTX1
Table
002
3.
On the Create Output Tax Condition (TTX1): Fast Entry screen, in the Country field, enter NL.
4.
To create the Tax Condition Records for Netherlands, make the following entries: Cond.Type Country TaxClassI
TaxClassiI Amount Currency Tax Code
Customer Material
5.
TTX1
NL
0
0
0.000
%
A0
TTX1
NL
0
1
0.000
%
A0
TTX1
NL
1
0
0.000
%
A0
TTX1
NL
1
1
21.000
%
A2
TTX1
NL
0
7
0.000
%
A0
TTX1
NL
1
7
21.000
%
A6
Save your entries.
4.6.2 Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local] (BD2) 4.6.2.1
Configuration – Cloud Edition
4.6.2.1.1 SD Business Partner Configuration Define Sales Districts 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
OVR0
CUSTOMER 408
Localization objects - per Business Priority
IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Master Data Business Partners Customers Sales Define Sales Districts
2.
On the Change View “Customers: Sales Districts”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following data: Sales district
District name
NL0001
Northern Netherlands
NL0002
Southern Netherlands
NL0003
Western Netherlands
NL0004
Eastern Netherlands
NL0005
Middle Netherlands
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
4.6.2.1.2 LIS Configuration Assign Update Group at Header Level Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics – General Logistics Information System (LIS) Logistics Data Warehouse Updating Updating Control Settings: Sales Update Group Assign Update Group at Header Level
Transaction Code
OVRO
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries: Field Name
User action and values
Sales Org
3710
Dist Channel
10
Division
00
Customer Stats Group
1
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 409
Field Name
User action and values
StatGrpSales Doc
01
Update Group
000001
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose
6.
Repeat the above steps, using a StatGrpSalesDoc of 02 and an Update Group of 000002.
Back.
Assign Update Group at Item Level Use In this activity, you make all the necessary settings at item level for the Sales Information System. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics General Logistics Information System (LIS) Logistics Data Warehouse Updating Updating Control Settings: Sales Update Group Assign Update Group at Item Level
Transaction Code
OVRP
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries: Field Name
User action and values
Sales Org
3710
Dist Channel
10
Division
00
Customer Stats Group
1
CustGroupMaterial
1
StatGrpSales Doc
01
StatGrpDocumentItm
1
Update Group
000001
CUSTOMER 410
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose
6.
Repeat the above steps, using the following data:
Back.
Field Name
One
Two
Three
Sales Org
3710
3710
3710
Dist Channel
10
10
10
Division
00
00
00
Customer Stats Group
1
1
1
CustGroupMaterial
1
1
1
StatGrpSales Doc
01
02
02
StatGrpDocumentItm
02
01
02
Update Group
000002
000001
000002
4.6.3 Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local] (J04) 4.6.3.1
Configuration - On Premise
The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1.
Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings.
2.
Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by .
3.
Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 411
4.6.3.1.1 SD Core Configuration and Logistics Execution Order Scheduling Defining Floats (Scheduling Margin Key) Use The purpose of this step is to define the scheduling margin key. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Scheduling Define Scheduling Margin Key
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Margins for scheduling”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
Plant Key Name 1
Opening Period
Float After Production
Float Before Production
Release Period
3710 000
000
000
000
000
3710 001
010
001
002
005
Save your entries.
Assigning G/L Accounts Use This activity allocates G/L accounts for revenue account determination. You have to make the allocation for every access sequence you have defined beforehand. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER
412
Localization objects - per Business Priority
IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment Costing Revenue Account Determination Assign G/L Accounts
Transaction Code
VKOA
2.
On the Assign G/L Accounts screen, double click Table 1.
3.
On the Change View “Cust Grp/MaterialGrp/AcctKey”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
Maintain the following data for C001 Table: App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. AAG AAG ActKy G/L acct V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 01
01
ERL
0041000000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 01
01
ERS
0044002000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 01
02
ERL
0041000000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 01
02
ERS
0044002000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 01
03
ERL
0041000000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 01
03
ERS
0044002000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 02
01
ERL
0041001000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 02
01
ERS
0044002100
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 02
02
ERL
0041001000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 02
02
ERS
0044002100
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 02
03
ERL
0041001000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 02
03
ERS
0044002100
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 03
01
ERL
0041001500
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 03
02
ERL
0041001500
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 03
03
ERL
0041001500
5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose Back.
7.
Repeat the steps for Table C002 with the following data:
Provision acc.
App
CndTy.
ChAc
SOrg.
AAG
ActKy
G/L acct
V
KOFI
YCOA
3710
01
ERL
0041000000
V
KOFI
YCOA
3710
01
ERS
0044002000
V
KOFI
YCOA
3710
01
YB2
0044003000
V
KOFI
YCOA
3710
02
ERL
0041001000
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Provision acc.
0012550000
CUSTOMER 413
8.
9.
10.
App
CndTy.
ChAc
SOrg.
AAG
ActKy
G/L acct
Provision acc.
V
KOFI
YCOA
3710
02
ERS
0044002100
0012550000
V
KOFI
YCOA
3710
02
YB2
0044003100
V
KOFI
YCOA
3710
03
ERL
0041001500
V
KOFI
YCOA
3710
03
ERS
0044002200
V
KOFI
YCOA
3710
03
YB2
0044003200)
0012550000
Repeat the steps for Table C003 with the following data: App CndTy.
ChAc
SOrg. AAG ActKy G/L acct
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 01
ERL
0041000000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 02
ERL
0041000000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710 03
ERL
0041000000
Provision acc.
Repeat the steps for Table C004 with the following data: App
CndTy.
ChAc
SOrg.
G/L acct
V
KOFI
YCOA
3710
0041000000
Provision acc.
Repeat the steps for Table C005 with the following data: App CndTy.
ChAc
SOrg.
ActKy
G/L acct
V
YCOA
3710
VST
0012600000
KOFI
11.
Save your entries.
12.
Choose Back.
Provision acc.
Availability Check Availability Check: Defining Checking Groups Default Value Use This activity defines the checking group that the system proposes when you create a new material master record. You can overwrite the default value for the checking group in the material master record. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
CUSTOMER 414
Localization objects - per Business Priority
IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check With ATP Logic or Against Planning Define Checking Groups Default Value
Transaction Code
SM30 (Customizing Object V_TMVFU)
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following data: Material Type
Plant
Availability Check
SERV
3710
NC
MAT
3710
SR
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
Availability Check: Define Default Settings Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check With ATP Logic or Against Planning Define Default Settings
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following data: Sales Org.
Distr. Chl
Division
Fixed date and qty
Avail.check rule
3710
10
00
leave empty
C
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 415
4.6.3.1.2 Sales Order Processing I Sales Organizations - Assigning Order Type Use In this menu option, you allocate the allowed order types to each sales area group. If all sales order types are allowed for each of your sales area, you do not need to make any entries. If you wish to check allowed sales document types, you must set up common sales areas. You must define common sales organizations, common distribution channels, and common divisions. If, for example, you defined common divisions, then you must also define common distribution channels and sales organizations. For this specific step, you enter your group sales organization in the sales organization field. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Documents Header Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types
Transaction Code
OVAO
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Combine Sales Organizations.
3.
On the Change View: Sales Organizations – Assign Order Type: Overview screen, make the following entries: Sales Organization
Reference Sales Organization
3710
leave it blank
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
Distribution Channel by Sales Organization - Assign Order Type Use In this menu option, you allocate the allowed order types to each sales area group. CUSTOMER 416
Localization objects - per Business Priority
If all sales order types are allowed for each of your sales area, you do not need to make any entries. If you wish to check allowed sales document types, you must set up common sales areas. This action means you must define common sales organizations, common distribution channels, and common divisions. If, for example, you defined common divisions, you must also define common distribution channels and sales organizations. Set the respective group distribution channel in the distribution channel field.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Documents Header Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types
Transaction Code
OVAM
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Combine Distribution Channels.
3.
On the Change View: Distribution by Sales Org – Assign Order Type”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Sales Organization
Reference Distribution Channel
3710
leave it blank
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
Divisions by Sales Organization - Assign Order Type Use In this menu option, you allocate the allowed order types to each sales area group. If all sales order types are allowed for each of your sales area, you do not need to make any entries. If you wish to check allowed sales document types, you must set up common sales areas. You must define common sales organizations, common distribution channels, and common divisions. If, for example, you defined common divisions, then you must also define common distribution channels, and sales organizations. Enter your group division in the division field.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 417
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Documents Header Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types
Transaction Code
OVAN
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Combine Divisions.
3.
On the Change View: Divisions by SalesOrg – Assign Order Type”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Sales Organization
Reference Division
3710
leave it blank
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
4.6.3.1.3 Country Specific Sale from Stock Pricing ERP Condition Technique Maintain Pricing Procedure Use In this activity, you define the pricing procedure to be used. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define and Assign Pricing Procedures
Transaction Code
SPRO
Table / Delivery Class
T685 / Dev. Class E
In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Maintain Pricing Procedures. CUSTOMER
418
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
On the Change View “Procedures”: Overview screen, select the entry for procedure A10002 Materials (Germany), and choose Copy As…
4.
Overwrite the procedure name with A37002, description Materials choose Enter.
5.
In the dialog box, choose Copy all.
6.
Save your entries.
7.
Choose Back.
8.
Save your entries.
9.
Afterwards in procedure A37002 condition types are available as follows:
Usage
Application CT
Step
A
V
PCO1
10
[A37002/10/PCO1]
A
V
PPR0
20
[A37002/20/PPR0]
A
V
PMP0
60
[A37002/60/PMP0]
A
V
A
V
DPG1
120
[A37002/120/DPG1]
A
V
DCM1
130
[A37002/130/DCM1]
A
V
DC01
140
[A37002/140/DC01]
A
V
DM01
150
[A37002/150D/M01]
A
V
DPG2
160
[A37002/160/DPG2]
A
V
DPG3
170
[A37002/170/DPG3]
A
V
DPG4
180
[A37002/180/DPG4]
A
V
DPG5
190
[A37002/190/DPG5]
A
V
DRG1
200
[A37002/200/DRG1]
A
V
DRN1
210
[A37002/210/DRN1]
A
V
DRQ1
220
[A37002/220/DRQ1]
A
V
DRV1
230
[A37002/230/DRV1]
A
V
DRW1 240
A
V
300
A
V
A
V
A
V
100
PNP0
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Gross Amount
850
Comment
[A37002/100/Gross A]
[A37002/240/DRW1] Sum Surcharges /discounts
310 700
TTX1
Description
(Netherlands), and
[A37002/300/Sum Su] [A37002/310/PNP0]
Net Amount 1
[A37002/700/Net A1] [A37002/850/TTX1] CUSTOMER 419
A
V
DRD1
899
A
V
A
V
DCD1
910
[A37002/910/DCD1]
A
V
PCIP
930
[A37002/930/DCIP]
A
V
900
950
[A37002/899/DRD1] Total Amount
Profit Margin
[A37002/900/Total A]
[A37002/950/Profit M
Remark: Naming convention for additional countries:
Assign Pricing Procedures (Determination in Sales Docs) Use In this activity, you define how the pricing procedure is determined.
CUSTOMER 420
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define and Assign Pricing Procedures
Transaction Code
OVKK
Table / Delivery Class
T683V / Dev. Class C
BBID Task / File
V_T683V_V_T683V_J04.TXT
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Define Pricing Procedure Determination.
3.
On the Change View “Pricing Procedures: Determination in Sales Docs.”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Sales DChl Division DoPr CuPP Org.
PriPr.
CTyp
Comment
3710 10
00
A
A37002 PPR0
Netherlands, Material,
3710 10
00
A
01
Netherlands, Material,
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
A37002 PPR0
4.6.3.1.4 Delivery and Transportation Schedule Define Schedule by Shipping Point Use In this step, you assign the working hours to the shipping point.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
IMG Logistic Execution Shipping v Basic Shipping Functions Scheduling Delivery Scheduling and
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 421
Transportation Scheduling Define Scheduling by Shipping Point Transaction Code 2.
OVLZ
Choose New Entries, and make the following entries: Field Name
3.
Description User Action and Values Comment
Shipping Point
3710
Factory calendar
NL
Determine load. time
C
Loading time w.days
0,50
Det.pick/pack time
C
Pick/pack time wrkdys
0,50
Choose Detail
Save your entries.
4.6.3.1.5 Routes Define Routes and Stages Use Routes are used for transport scheduling and for the execution of the scheduling. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
IMG Logistic Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Routes Define Routes Define Routes and Stages
Transaction Code
0VTC
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following data: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Route
Route Number
TR0001
Comment
CUSTOMER 422
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Description
Truck/0days lead time/1day transit time
Shipping Type
01 - Truck
Transit duration in calendar days
1,00
Comment
Transportation lead time in calendar days Factory cal
Factory calendar key
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back F 3
6.
Repeat the steps for the following data: Route
Route Description
Shipping Transit duration type in calendar days
TR0002 Truck/0days lead time/2days transit time
01
TR0100 Truck/1day lead time /0days transit time
01
TR0101 Truck/1day lead time /1day transit time
01
TR0102 Truck/1day lead time /2days transit time
01
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
99
Transportation lead time in calendar days
2,00
Factory calendar key
99
1,00
99
1,00
1,00
99
2,00
1,00
99
CUSTOMER 423
Define Transportation Zones Use This activity defines transportation zones according to country, and depending on your company's needs. Transportation zones represent delivery recipient (ship-to party) regions, or delivery shipper (vendor) regions.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Alternative IMG paths: Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Routes Route Determination Define Transportation Zones OR Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Routes Route Determination Define Transportation Zones OR Logistics Execution Transportation Basic Transportation Functions Routes Route Determination Define Transportation Zones
Transaction Code
OVR1
2.
On the Change View “Customers: Transportation Zones”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
Ctry
TranspZone
Description
NL
3700000001
Region North
NL
3700000002
Region South
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 424
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Maintain Country and Transportation Zone for Shipping Point Use In this IMG activity, you can assign countries and transportation zones for each shipping point.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
2.
IMG Logistic Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Routes Route Determination Maintain Country And Transportation Zone For Shipping Point
Choose New Entries, and make the following entries: Shipping Point
Country
Transportation Zone
3710
NL
3700000002
3.
Save your entries.
4.
Choose Back F 3
Maintain Route Determination Use In this step you define how the route is being determined by the system.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
2.
IMG Logistic Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Routes Route Determination Maintain Route Determination
Choose New Entries, and make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
CDep
Country of Depart
NL
DepZ
Departure Zone
3700000002
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Comment
CUSTOMER 425
Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
DstC
Destination Country
NL
RecZ
Transportation Zone
0000000001
Comment
3.
Select the new entry.
4.
Go to sub dialog Route Determination Without Weight Group (Order), and make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
SC
Shipping Condition
01
TGroup
0001
Proposed route
TR0002
SC
Shipping Condition
02
TGroup
0001
Proposed route
TR0100
SC
Shipping Condition
03
TGroup
0001
Proposed route
TR0001
SC
Shipping Condition
Comment
04
TGroup
0001
Proposed route
TR0102
5.
Choose Back F 3 .
6.
Choose New Entries, and make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
CDep
Country of Depart
NL
DepZ
Departure Zone
3700000002
DstC
Destination Country
NL
RecZ
Transportation Zone
0000000002
Comment
7.
Select the new entry.
8.
Go to sub dialog Route Determination Without Weight Group (Order), and make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
SC
Shipping Condition
01
TGroup
0001
Proposed route
TR0001
Comment
CUSTOMER 426
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
SC
Shipping Condition
02
TGroup
0001
Proposed route
TR0100
SC
Shipping Condition
9.
03
TGroup
0001
Proposed route
TR0001
SC
Shipping Condition
Comment
04
TGroup
0001
Proposed route
TR0101
Save your entries.
4.6.4 Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local] (BD5) 4.6.4.1
Configuration – Cloud Edition
4.6.4.1.1 SD Core Configuration and Logistics Execution Logistics Execution Assign Purchasing Data Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVFP)
IMG Menu
Logistics Execution Transportation Shipment Costs Settlement Assign Purchasing Data
Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data: TPPt
SCTy
POrg
PGr
Plnt
3710
0001
3710
001
3710
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 427
4.
Choose Back.
Pricing_Stock_Country_Specific_BL Maintain Pricing Procedure Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define and Assign Pricing Procedures
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Maintain Pricing Procedures.
3.
Choose New Entry and enter in Y37101.
4.
Select Pricing procedure Y37101, choose Control Data and make following entries: Condition Type
Manual only
Account Required Print Subtotal Statistical key
TTX1
A
PCIP
MWS B
DCD1
X X
DRD1
X
YZWR
ERS S
ERL #3
YBHD
X
S
#4
a
#2
ERF
PNP0
X
ERL
DRW1
X
a
YB3
DRV1
X
a
YB3
DRQ1
X
a
YB3
DRN1
X
a
YB3
DRG1
X
a
YB3
DPG5
a
YB2
DPG4
a
YB2
CUSTOMER 428
Localization objects - per Business Priority
DPG3
a
YB1
DPG2
a
YB2
DM01
a
YB1
YK07
X
YB2
DC01
a
YB2
DCM1
a
YB2
DPG1
a
YB2
a PMP0
X
ERL
PPR0 PCO1
#1
X
ERL
X
5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose Back.
B
ERL
Assign Pricing Procedures (Determination in Sales Docs) Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define and Assign Pricing Procedures
Transaction Code
OVKK
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Define Pricing Procedure Determination.
3.
On the Change View “Pricing Procedures: Determination in Sales Docs.”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Sales Org.
DChl
Division
DoPr
3710
10
00
Y1
3710
10
00
Y1
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CuPP
01
PriPr.
CTyp
Y37101
PPR0
Y37101
PPR0
CUSTOMER 429
Assign G/L Account Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Account Assignment Costing Revenue Account Determination Assign G/L Accounts
Transaction Code
VKOA
2.
On the Assign G/L Accounts screen, double click Table 5.
3.
On the Change View “Acct Key”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
Maintain the following data: App CndTy ChAc SOrg.
ActKy
G/L acct
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710
VST
12600000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710
ERF
52590000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710
YB1
44004000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710
YB3
44006000
V
KOFI
YCOA 3710
YB4
44005000
5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose Back.
Accruals Account
Availability Check Define Checking Groups Default Value Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements Availability Check Availability Check With ATP Logic or Against Planning Define Checking Groups Default value
Transaction Code
OVZ3
Choose New Entries. CUSTOMER
430
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
4.
Enter the following data: Material Type
Plant
Availability Check
FERT
3710
Y2
HAWA
3710
Y2
LEIH
3710
Y2
Save your entries.
Define Print Parameters Set Print Parameters Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics Execution Shipping Basic Shipping Functions Output Control Define print parameters shipping
Transaction Code
VP01SHP
2.
On the Maintain Print Parameters screen, locate and double click Delivery Note (LD00).
3.
Choose New Entries and maintain the following data: Ship Point
Output Device
Name
3710
LIST1S LD00
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
Suffix 1
Suffix 2
Immediate Release
LIEFER X
CUSTOMER 431
Define Print Parameters Define Print Parameters for Sales Header Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Output Control Define Print Parameters
Transaction Code
VP01
2.
On the Maintain Print Parameters screen, locate and double click Inquiry (AF00).
3.
Choose New Entries and maintain the following data: SOrg
Output Device
3710
Name
Suffix 1
LIST1S AF00
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
6.
Repeat the steps for the following data: CTyp SOrg. Output Device
Suffix 2
Immediate Release
ANFRAGE Checked
Name Suffix 1 Suffix 2
Immediate Release
AN00 3710 LIST1S AN00
ANGEBOT X
BA00 3710 LIST1S BA00
AUFTRAG X
CUSTOMER 432
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.6.4.1.2 SD Process Configuration I Sales Order Processing I Assign sales area to credit control area Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code
2.
OVFL
On the Change View “Sales Area: Allocation to Credit Control Area”: Overview screen, make the following entries in row CCAr: SOrg.
DChl
DV
CCAr
3710
10
00
A000
4.6.4.1.3 Master Data Output - condition records: Sales Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following transaction code: Transaction Code
2.
VV11
On the Create Output screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Description
Output Type
User Action and Values
Comment
AN00/BA00
3.
Choose Key Combination.
4.
Make the following entries: Output Sales Dispatch SalesDocType Function Medium Lang. Type Organization Time AN00
QT
SP
1
4
AN00
3710
OR
SP
1
4
BA00
3710
OR
SP
1
4
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 433
5.
Choose Communication and enter the required output device, choose Print Immediately and Release after Output.
Create condition records LD00 Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following transaction code: Transaction code
2.
VV21
On the Create Output screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Description
Output Type
User Action and Values
Comment
LD00
3.
Choose Key Combination.
4.
Enter the required customer.
5.
Make the following entries: Output Type
Shipping point
Partner Function
Medium
Dispatch Time
LD00
3710
SH
1
4
Lang.
6.
Choose Communication and enter the required output device, choose Print Immediately and Release after Output.
7.
Save your entries
4.6.4.2
Manual Rework
If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
Output Condition Records: Sales
No
Yes
Output Condition Records: LD00
No
Yes
Remarks
In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: CUSTOMER 434
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Logon to the source system / client. 1.
Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.
2.
Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.
3.
The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.
Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. 1.
In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows:
2.
Logon to the target system / client.
3.
Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
4.6.5 Sample Master Data Business Partners [local] (JA2) Both Material Management and Sales and Distribution are using the business partner master data. Please check which area is responsible for the configuration.
4.6.5.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.6.5.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP GUI Transaction
BP _Maintain Business Partner (Enter in the transaction call field)
Access via FIORI Launchpad in an OP (On Premise) environment: Business Role ID and
SAP_BR_BUPA_MASTER_SPECIALIST
Name
Master Data Specialist - Business Partner Data
Access via FIORI Launchpad in a CLOUD environment: Business Catalog Role ID
SAP_BCR_CMD_BP_MAINT_PC
and Name
Master Data - Business Partner
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 435
2.
Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment
3.
On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100001
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
KLANT1
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Binnenlandse klant 1
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ING
Bank account number
005544999
Industry System
1
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B01
City
Apeldoorn
City postal code
7322 HR
Street
Korfstraat
House Number
1
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
2
CUSTOMER 436
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Language Key
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
+31 26 12345
Complete number: dialing code + number +extension
+31 26 12345
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
19000101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
I
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
0012100000
Terms of Payment Key
4
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 437
Field Name
Entry Value
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST1
Accounting clerk
1
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
1
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
's-Hertogenbosch
Delivery Priority
2
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
1
Terms of Payment Key
4
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
4.
Save your entries.
5.
On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100002
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
KLANT2
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Binnenlandse klant 1
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
CUSTOMER 438
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ABN
Bank account number
#009876543
Industry System
1
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL1
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B02
City
Arnhem
City postal code
3012 CL
Street
Keizersgracht
House Number
2
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
1
Language Key
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code +number
+31 55 12345
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
+31 55 12345
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 439
Field Name
Entry Value
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
I
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
NL
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
0012100000
Terms of Payment Key
4
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST2
Accounting clerk
1
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
1
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
's-Hertogenbosch
Delivery Priority
2
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
1
Terms of Payment Key
4
CUSTOMER 440
Localization objects - per Business Priority
6.
Field Name
Entry Value
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
Save your entries.
4.6.5.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37300001
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
LEV01
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Binnenlandse leverancier NL 01
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
FLVN01
BP Role Category
FLVN01
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ABN
Bank account number
0544044150
Tax Number Category
NL
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B02
City
Amsterdam
City postal code
1071 DG
Street
Honthorststraat
House Number
1
Country Key
NL
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 441
Field Name
Entry Value
Region (State, Province, County)
NH
Address time zone
CET
Language Key
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
+31 71 5232 0
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
+31 71 5232 0
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
21100000
CUSTOMER 442
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
4
Our account number with the vendor
3710-LEV01
Accounting clerk
1
Purchasing Organization
3710
Currency
EUR
Terms of Payment Key
4
Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification
X
Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)
1
Purchasing Group
1
Planned Delivery Time in Days
2
Shipping Conditions
1
Partner Function
LF
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
7.
Save your entries.
8.
On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37300002
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
LEV01
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Binnenlandse leverancier NL 02
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
FLVN01
BP Role Category
FLVN01
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ABN
Bank account number
0265425328
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 443
Field Name
Entry Value
Tax Number Category
NL01
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B05
City
Leiden
City postal code
2311 CV
Street
Kerkstraat
House Number
2
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
DR
Address time zone
CET
Language Key
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
0592 362-0
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
05292 362-0
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
CUSTOMER 444
Localization objects - per Business Priority
9.
Field Name
Entry Value
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
21100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
4
Our account number with the vendor
3710- LEV01
Accounting clerk
1
Purchasing Organization
3710
Currency
EUR
Terms of Payment Key
4
Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification
X
Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)
1
Purchasing Group
1
Planned Delivery Time in Days
3
Shipping Conditions
1
Partner Function
LF
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
Save your entries.
4.6.5.1.3 Create Domestic Contacts for Business Partners Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP GUI Transaction
BP _Maintain Business Partner (Enter in the transaction call field)
Access via FIORI Launchpad in an OP (On Premise) environment: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 445
Business Role ID and
SAP_BR_BUPA_MASTER_SPECIALIST
Name
Master Data Specialist - Business Partner Data
Access via FIORI Launchpad in a CLOUD environment:
2.
Business Catalog Role ID
SAP_BCR_CMD_BP_MAINT_PC
and Name
Master Data - Business Partner
Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37910001
37910002
37910003
37910004
Business partner category
1
1
1
1
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
BP03
BP03
BP03
37910001
37910002
37910003
3791000
Search term 1 for business partner
4 Form-of-Address Key
1
2
1
2
First name of business partner (person)
Alina
Alexander
Barbara
Bernd
Last name of business partner (person)
Mueller
Linke
Meger
Fischer
Sex of business partner (person)
1
2
1
2
Business Partner: Correspondence Language
N
N
N
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
NL
NL
NL
BP role
BUP001
BUP001
BUP001
BUP001
BP Role Category
BUP001
BUP001
BUP001
BUP001
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
NL
NL
NL
City
Apeldoorn
Apeldoorn
Arnhem
Arnhem
City postal code
7322 HR
7322 HR
3012 C
3012 C
CUSTOMER 446
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Street
Amerikastraat
Amerikastraat 1
Keizersgracht
Keizersgracht
House Number
1
2
1
2
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
GE
GE
GE
Address time zone
CET
CET
CET
CET
Language Key
N
N
N
N
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
NL
NL
NL
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
NL
NL
NL
Country ISO code
NL
NL
NL
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
X
X
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
09990 4513-0
09990 4513-0
09990 41252-0
09990 41252-0
Telephone no.: Extension
01
02
01
02
Complete number: dialing code +number +extension
09990 4513-12
09990 4513-32
09990 41252212
09990 41252221
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
1
1
1
Sequence Number
1
1
1
1
Communication Data: 10101 Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
10101
10101
Communication Data: 99991231 Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
99991231
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
X
X
X
E-Mail Address
alina.mueller alexander.linke barbara.meger bernd.fischer @37100001.com @37100001.com @37100002.com @37100002.com
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 447
Field Name
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Entry Value
Communication Data: 10101 Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
10101
10101
10101
Communication Data: 99991231 Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
99991231
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
XXDEFAULT
XXDEFAULT
XXDEFAULT
Business Partner Number
37100001
37100001
37100002
37100002
37910005
37910006
37910007
3791008
Business Partner Number
4 Business Partner Relationship Category
BUR001
BUR001
BUR001
BUR001
Remark: In the UI transaction you need to create a "Relationship" of the BP-Employee to the indicated BP-Customers. The relationship type BUR001 is shown as "Is Employee of …" Validity Date (Valid To)
99991231
99991231
99991231
99991231
Validity Date (Valid From)
10101
10101
10101
10101
Function of partner
3
2
2
3
Department
3
2
2
3
First telephone no.: dialing code + number
05777- 4513-0
05777- 4513-0
026 41252-0
026 41252-0
First Telephone No.: Extension
12
32
212
221
E-Mail Address
alina.mueller alexander.linke barbara.meger bernd.fischer @37100001.com @37100001.com @37100002.com @37100002.com
Sales Organization
3710
3710
3710
3710
Distribution Channel
10
10
10
10
CUSTOMER 448
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Division 3.
0
0
0
0
Save your entries.
How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority
CUSTOMER 449
4.6.6
Free of Charge Delivery [local] (BDC)
4.6.6.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.6.6.1.1 Creating Condition Records for Output Type Use In this activity, you create the condition records for output type BA00.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Output→ Sales Document → Create
Transaction Code
VV11
2.
On the Create Output – Condition Records: Sales screen, enter the output type BA00 and choose Enter.
3.
On the Create Condition Records (Order Confirmation): Fast Entry screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Sales Organization
3710
Sales Document Type
CBFD
Function
SP
Comment
Partner Medium
1
Date/Time
4
Language 4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
CUSTOMER 450
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Result You created the output condition record for output type BA00 and sales document type CBFD.
4.6.7
Customer Returns [local] (BDF)
4.6.7.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.6.7.1.1 Creating Condition Records BA00 Use In this activity you create the condition records for output type BA00.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Output → Sales Document → Create
Transaction Code
VV11
2.
On the Create Output – Condition Records: Sales screen, in the Output Type field, enter BA00 and choose Enter.
3.
On the Create Condition Records (Order Confirmation): Fast Entry screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Sales Organization
3710
Sales Document Type
CBRE
Function
SP
Partner Medium
1
Date/Time
4
Language 4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
Comment
Result You have created the output condition record for output type BA00 and sales document type CBRE.
4.6.8 Returnable Packaging (LEIH) related sample master data [local] (BDZ) 4.6.8.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.6.8.1.1 Create Material Master – Organization Dependency View for Returnable Packaging Use In this activity, you create trading materials.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options: SAP menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General) Immediately
Transaction code
MM01
On the initial screen, make the following entries and press Enter: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Comment
Material
Industry sector
M Mechanical Engineer
Material type
LEIH Returnable Packaging
General Plant Data / Storage 1/2 3.
Choose the Plant data/stor.1/2 tab, view entries and choose Enter to continue. Field Name Plant
Description User Action and Values
Comment
3710
CUSTOMER 452
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Stor. location
Comment see table below for material- and plant-specific data
Material
Plant
Stor. location
RP001
3710
371A
RP001
3710
371R
4.
Choose Enter to go to the second screen.
5.
Choose Save to go to the initial screen.
6.
On the initial screen, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field Name
7.
Description
User Action and Values
Material
Industry sector
M Mechanical Engineer
Material type
HAWA trading goods
Material
Plant
Stor. location
RP001
3710
Comment
On the Select View(s) dialog box, select the following views and press Enter:
Sales Org. Data 1 and 2, Sales General Plant Data MRP views 1, 2, 3 and 4 Accounting 1 and 2 8.
Make the following entries and press Enter. Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Comment
Plant
3710
first create the materials for plant 1010, see table below for further plants
Stor. location
f
Sales Org.
3710
Distr.Channel
10
Material
Plant 1
Sales Org. 1
Sales Org. 2
Warehouse 1
Warehouse 2
RP001
3710
3710
Sales Data 9.
Choose the Sales: sales org. 1 tab.
10.
Make the following entries and press Enter: Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Delivering plant
3710
Tax classification ("TTX1")
1 for taxable
11.
Choose the Sales: sales org. 2 tab.
12.
Make the following entries and press Enter: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Acct assignment grp
Y2
Item category group
CB02
13.
Choose the Sales: General/plant tab.
14.
Make the following entries and press Enter: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Availability check
SP
Trans. Grp
0001
LoadingGrp
0001
Profit Center
YB111
Comment
Comment
Comment
15.
Choose the Sales text tab.
16.
Enter text that should appear on sales documents for this material.
MRP Data 17.
Choose the MRP tab (ENTER does not work when the cursor is in a text field)
18.
Choose the MRP1 tab.
19.
Make the following entries and press Enter. Field Name MRP type
Description
User Action and Values
Comment
ND
Reorder point MRP controller
001
CUSTOMER 454
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
20.
Choose the MRP2 tab.
21.
Make the following entries and press Enter. Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Procurement Type
F
Planned Delivery Time
10
22.
Choose the MRP3 tab.
23.
View the values and press Enter.
24.
Choose the MRP4 tab.
25.
View the values and press Enter.
Comment
Comment
Accounting Data 26.
Choose the Accounting 1 tab.
27.
Make the following entries and press Enter. Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Price unit
1
Valuation Class
3050
Price Control
V
Standard price
5
Comment
28.
Select the second accounting screen, and press Enter.
29.
On the Last data screen reached dialog box, choose Yes to save your entries.
Result The trading materials are created.
4.6.8.1.2 Create Pricing Conditions Use The SAP Baseline Package scenarios require several pricing conditions.
Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following transaction code: Transaction code
VK15
2.
On the Create Condition Records screen, enter PPR0 in the input field Condition type and 304 in the input field Table.
3.
Choose Key combination.
4.
In the Key Combination dialog box, select Material with release status.
5.
Choose Continue E n t e r .
6.
In the Valid From field enter the
and in the Valid to field enter
Sales Organization
Distribution Channel
Material
Condition Price Unit
Amount
3710
10
RP001
1
5
7.
Choose Enter.
8.
Save your entries.
9.
Choose Back F 3 .
Result The pricing conditions have been created.
4.6.9
Returnables Processing [local] (BDY)
4.6.9.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.6.9.1.1 Master Data Creating Output Condition for Confirmation Use The output condition is created to enable printing of a confirmation-document for the customer.
CUSTOMER 456
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: User Menu
Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Output Sales Document Create
Transaction Code
VV11
On the Create Output – Condition Records: Billing screen, choose BA00:
Order
Confirmation. 3.
Choose Enter.
4.
On the Create Condition Records (Order Confirmation): Fast Entry screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Sales Document Type
CBG0
Partner Function
SP
Medium
1
Date/Time
4
5.
Select the entry and choose Communication. Select the print option Print immediately.
6.
Save your entries.
7.
Choose Back F 3 .
Result The output condition BA00 for the immediately confirmation-printout is created.
4.6.10 SEPA Direct Debit Handling in Sales and Distribution (BKW) 4.6.10.1
Configuration – On-Premise
4.6.10.1.1 Output Control Create Condition Record BA00_CBDD 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
Transaction Code
VV11
IMG Menu
Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Output→ Sales Document → Create
2.
On the Create Output – Condition Records: Sales screen, enter the output type BA00 and choose Enter.
3.
On the Create Condition Records (Order Confirmation): Fast Entry screen, make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Sales Organization
3710
Sales Document Type
CBDD
Function
SP
Medium
1
Date/Time
4
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
Comment
4.6.10.2 Manual Rework If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity
Manual transport possible
Manual action in target system / client required
3.1.1 Create Condition Record BA00_CBDD
No
Yes
Remarks
In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: Logon to the source system / client. 1.
Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.
2.
Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. CUSTOMER
458
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.
Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.
Logon to the target system / client.
2.
Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.
4.6.11 BP-Customers and -Suppliers, Sample Master Data [local] (BN6) Both Material Management and Sales and Distribution are using the business partner master data. Please check which area is responsible for the configuration.
4.6.11.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.6.11.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 1.
2.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Settlement Management Environment Master Data Maintain Business Partner
Transaction code
BP
On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100003
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
Customer3
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Domestic NL 3
BP: Legal form of organization
1
BP role
FLCU01
Field Name
Entry Value
BP role
UDM000
BP role
FLCU00
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ING
Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)
NL40INGB0005544499
Industry System
0001
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B03
City
Duivendrecht
City postal code
1114 AJ
Street
Oostweg
House Number
2
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
0000000002
Language Key
NL
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
20 570 1922
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
20 570 1923
CUSTOMER 460
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
C
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
9
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
0012100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
NT30
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST3
Accounting clerk
01
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Field Name
Entry Value
Customer group
01
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
Amsterdam
Delivery Priority
02
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
01
Terms of Payment Key
0004
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG (RE, RG, WE)
Partner counter
000
Default Partner
X
3.
Save your entries.
4.
On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100004
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
Customer 4
Form-of-Address Key
0003
Name 1 of organization
Domestic NL 4
BP: Legal form of organization
01
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
BP role
FLCU00
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ING
Bank account number CUSTOMER 462
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
IBAN (International Bank Account Number)
NL40INGB0005544499
Industry System
0001
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL161882268
City
Diemen
City postal code
1112 XN
Street
Diemerhof
House Number
10
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
0000000001
Language Key
NL
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
20 346 3400
Complete number: dialing code + number + extension
20 346 3400
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
001
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Field Name
Entry Value
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
C
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
DE
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
009
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
12100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
0004
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST4
Accounting clerk
1
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
1
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
Amsterdam
Delivery Priority
02
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
1
CUSTOMER 464
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Terms of Payment Key
0004
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG (RE, RG, WE)
Partner counter
000
Default Partner
X
5.
Save your entries.
6.
On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100006
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
Customer 6
Form-of-Address Key
3
Name 1 of organization
Domestic NL 6 (Returns)
BP: Legal form of organization
01
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
BP role
FLCU00
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ABN
Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)
NL02ABNA0123456789
Industry System
0001
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B03
City
Amsterdam Zuid-Oost
Field Name
Entry Value
City postal code
1101 HE
Street
De entrée
House Number
123
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
0000000001
Language Key
NL
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code + number
800 2487636
Complete number: dialing code + number+ extension
800 2487636
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
001
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
001
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
CUSTOMER 466
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
Account Number of Vendor or Creditor
373000006
External Interface: Tax Indicators
C
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
009
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
0012100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
0004
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST6
Accounting clerk
01
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
01
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
Amsterdam
Delivery Priority
02
Shipping Conditions
RE
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
01
Terms of Payment Key
0004
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG (RE, RG, WE)
Partner counter
0
Default Partner
X
7.
Save your entries.
4.6.11.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors Procedure 1.
2.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Settlement Management Environment Master Data Maintain Business Partner
Transaction code
BP
On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37300006
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
Supplier 6
Form-of-Address Key
0003
Name 1 of organization
Domestic NL 6 (Returns)
BP: Legal form of organization
01
BP role
FLVN01
BP role
FLVN00
BP Role Category
FLVN01
BP Role Category
FLVN00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys
ABN
Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)
NL02ABNA0123456789
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B03
City
Amsterdam Zuid-Oost
City postal code
1101 HE
CUSTOMER 468
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Street
De Entree
House Number
123
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Language Key
NL
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
DE
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code +number
800 2487636
Complete number: dialing code +number +extension
800 2487636
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
01.01.1900
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
31.12.9999
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Customer Number
37100006
Purchase order currency
EUR
3.
Field Name
Entry Value
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
009
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
21100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
T
Terms of Payment Key
0001
Our account number with the vendor
3710-LIEF6
Accounting clerk
01
Purchasing Organization
3710
Currency
EUR
Terms of Payment Key
0001
Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification
X
Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)
01
Purchasing Group
001
Planned Delivery Time in Days
2
Shipping Conditions
01
Partner Function
LF
Partner counter
000
Default Partner
X
Save your entries.
4.6.12 BP-Customers and -Suppliers CPD, Sample Master Data [local] (BRC) 4.6.12.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.6.12.1.1 Create CPD Customers Procedure 1.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Settlement Management Environment Master Data Maintain Business Partner
CUSTOMER 470
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction code 2.
BP
On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100273
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
CPDS
Search term 1 for business partner
CPD NL
Form-of-Address Key
0003
Name 1 of organization
Domestic Customer NL CPD
BP: Legal form of organization
01
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
FLCU00
BP role BP role BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
FLCU00
BP Role Category BP Role Category Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys IBAN (International Bank Account Number) Industry System Industry sector Tax Number Category Business Partner Tax Number City
Leeuwarden
City postal code
8938 AR
Street House Number Country Key
NL
Field Name
Entry Value
Region (State, Province, County) Address time zone Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered Language Key
NLD
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code +number Complete number: dialing code +number +extension Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
19000101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
19000101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
C
CUSTOMER 472
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
Field Name
Entry Value
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
009
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
12100000
Payment methods
T
Terms of Payment Key
0001
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CPD
Accounting clerk
01
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
01
Incoterms (Part 1)
EXW
Incoterms (Part 2)
Leeuwarden
Delivery Priority
02
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
Account assignment group for this customer
01
Terms of Payment Key
0001
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
3710
Partner Function
AG
Partner counter
000
Default Partner
X
Save your entries.
4.6.13
Free Goods Processing [local] (BKC)
4.6.13.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.6.13.1.1 Activating Free Goods Determination Use The purpose of this activity is to assign the procedure to activate free goods. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Free Goods Condition Technique for Free Goods Activate Free Goods Determination
Transaction Code
V/N6
On the Change View “Determining Free Goods Procedure in Sales”: Overview screen, change the following entries: SOrg.
DChl.
Dv
DoPr
3710
10
00
Y1
3710
10
00
Y1
3.
Choose Enter.
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back F 3 .
Cu
Proc. YA0001
01
YA0001
Result Free goods determination has been activated for the relevant sales organizations.
CUSTOMER 474
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.6.13.1.2 Master Data Creating Free Goods Determination Use The purpose of this activity is to create a free goods condition for material.TG11 Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Conditions Free Goods Create
Transaction Code
VBN1
2.
On the Create free goods determination screen, in the Discount type field, enter YA00 and press Enter.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
Field
User Action or Values
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Customer
37100001
Comments
In the fast entry section of the screen enter the following details: Material
Min qty.
For
Unit
are free good
TG11
1000
500
PC
10
5.
Choose Enter.
6.
Save your entries.
7.
Choose Back F 3 .
Result The free goods condition record has been created. For a sales order item with quantity > 1000 pieces the customer gets 10 pieces free for every 500 pieces. Sales order item 999 = No free goods Sales order item 1000 = 20 pieces free Sales order item 2000 = 40 pieces free.
4.6.14 Sample Master Data for SEPA Processing [local] (BN9) 4.6.14.1
Configuration for OP
4.6.14.1.1 Create Domestic Customers Procedure 1.
2.
Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu
Logistics Settlement Management Environment Master Data Maintain Business Partner
Transaction code
BP
On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name
Entry Value
Business Partner Number
37100100
Business partner category
2
Business Partner Grouping
BP03
Search term 1 for business partner
CUST100
Form-of-Address Key
0003
Name 1 of organization
Domestic Customer NL 100 (SEPA)
BP: Legal form of organization
01
BP role
FLCU01
BP role
UDM000
BP role
FLCU00
BP Role Category
FLCU01
BP Role Category
UDM000
BP Role Category
FLCU00
Bank country key
NL
Bank Keys IBAN (International Bank Account Number)
NL02ABNA0123456789
CUSTOMER 476
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Entry Value
Industry System
0001
Industry sector
91
Tax Number Category
NL0
Business Partner Tax Number
NL001234560B01
City
Apeldoorn
City postal code
7322 HR
Street
Korfstraat
House Number
2
Country Key
NL
Region (State, Province, County)
GE
Address time zone
CET
Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered
2
Language Key
NL
2-Character SAP Language Code
NL
City file test status
C
Country for telephone/fax number
NL
Country ISO code
NL
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
Telephone no.: dialing code +number
+31 26 12345
Complete number: dialing code +number+ extension
+31 26 12345
Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone
1
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
19000101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type
X
E-Mail Address
[email protected]
Field Name
Entry Value
Sequence Number
1
Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
19000101
Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)
99991231
Address Type
XXDEFAULT
Purchasing Organization
3710
Purchase order currency
EUR
External Interface: Tax Indicators
C
Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)
NL
Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)
TTX1
Tax classification for customer
1
Company Code
3710
Key for sorting according to assignment numbers
009
Reconciliation Account in General Ledger
0012100000
List of the Payment Methods to be Considered
TE
Terms of Payment Key
SEPA
Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor
3710-CUST100
Accounting clerk
01
Sales Organization
3710
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Customer group
1
Incoterms (Part 1) Incoterms (Part 2) Delivery Priority
02
Shipping Conditions
01
Currency
EUR
CUSTOMER 478
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
Field Name
Entry Value
Account assignment group for this customer
1
Terms of Payment Key
SEPA
Delivering Plant (Own or External)
371
Partner Function
AG
Partner counter
000
Default Partner
X
Save your entries.
4.6.14.1.2 Creating SEPA Mandate Master Data Use The scope items require active SEPA mandates for customers with SEPA direct debit payment method. In the context of the SEPA Direct Debit Scheme (SDD), Mandate is an authorization given by the payer for payment to be collected in the form of a direct debit. The mandate must be created, printed and sent to the customer. Once the customer has approved it, the user can have its status to active. Once the status is correct, a Direct Debit can be processed using the payment transaction F110. Mandate can be accessed directly in customer master data, under general data, payment transaction, for each valid bank details, using Edit mandate button. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP ECC menu Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Receivable Master Records SEPA Mandates Create Transaction code
2.
3.
FSEPA_M1
On the Create Mandate: Initial Screen, enter the first value following Customer and Paying Company Code and repeat for the customer list the steps below: Mandate Ref.
Customer
Paying company code
3710_37100100
37100100
3710
Choose Enter.
4.
If a mandate already exist choose Create F 5 on the Mandates screen
5.
On the Create Mandate: Detail Screen, choose Supplement Data F 7 Default values are retrieved from Customer Master Data and Paying Company Code master data. Data can be checked and modified: o Basic Data o Status: To be confirmed o Valid From: current date o Trans. Type: Recurring Use Mandate o Payer o Name and address of Payer o IBAN and SWIFT code of Payer o Payment Recipient o Name/address of Payment Recipient
6.
On the Create Mandate: Detail screen, on the Basic Data tab page, choose B2B Mandate check box.
7.
On the Create Mandate: Detail screen, on the Basic Data tab page, set B2B Mandate Status to 1 active.
8.
On the Create Mandate: Detail screen, on the Basic Data tab page, enter the Location of Signature and Signature date. Only a Mandate with Location of Signature and Signature Date fulfilled can be active. Only an active Mandate can be used by SEPA Direct Debit in automatic payment program F110.
9.
Choose Check Mandate F 6 . The system displays the message: The errors.
10.
Save your entries.
data contains no
If necessary, you can instead save and print the mandate directly using the Save and Print button.
Result You have now created a Mandate reference number xxxxxxxxxxxx. It is ready to use as an example. Usually, productive mandates are created with an inactive status and the user must print the mandate, send it to the customer, and change the mandate status to active to give authorization to the system to use the mandate in payment program. (F110).
CUSTOMER 480
Localization objects - per Business Priority
To change the mandate, run the transaction FSEPA_M2 or from the menu, choose Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Receivable Master Records SEPA Mandates Change.
4.7 Localization objects for Production Planning 4.7.1 Production Planning and Control Settings [local] (BJ1) 4.7.1.1
Configuration – On-Premise
4.7.1.1.1
Basic Data
Defining Planner Group Use In this step, you define planner groups per plant. A planner group is a group of people responsible for the maintenance of routings. You can use the planner group as a selection criterion for task list selection.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Routing General Data Configure Planner Group
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Maintenance planner group”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:
4.
Plnt
PlGrp
Planner Group Desc.
3710
1
Planner Group 1
3710
2
Planner Group 2
Save your entries.
Defining Wage Group Use In this step you define wage groups for operations and work centers. By assigning an operation or a work center to a wage group you can evaluate the work to be performed in the operation from a job evaluation point of view (for example, suitable for unskilled labor or requiring special training). When you confirm the operation, you enter the wage group that was actually used.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Routing Operation Data Define Wage Group
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in the Plant field, enter 3710, then choose Continue.
3.
On the Change View “Wage Groups”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:
5.
Wage group
Description
1
Wage group 1
Save your entries.
Defining Suitability Use In this menu option, you can define the suitability required in a plant for carrying out certain tasks. In addition, you can determine whether suitability is copied or used as a reference. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Routing Operation Data Define Suitability
CUSTOMER 482
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in the Plant field, enter 3710, then choose Continue.
3.
On the Change View “Suitability”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries:
5.
Suitability
Text for suitability
10
Suitability 10
20
Suitability 20
Save your entries.
Defining Setup Type and Setup Group Use In this step, you define the setup. The setup includes: Setup type key: You define the setup type according to plant by using the setup type key. You can print setup type with shop floor papers. In sequencing, the optimum sequences for setup are determined with the setup type key. Setup group category: The setup group category classifies the setup groups. Setup group categories are plant-dependent. Setup group: The setup group combines operations with the same or similar setup conditions. In capacity levelling, you can optimize the sequence using the setup group. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Routing Operation Data Define Setup Type and Setup Group
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Setup screen, choose Setup Type Key.
3.
On the Change View “Setup Type Key”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plant
STypeKey
Description
3710
1
Setup type 1
3710
2
Setup type 2
5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose Back to the Setup screen, and then choose Setup group category.
7.
On the Change View “Setup group category”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
8.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plant
Setup GrpCategory
Description
3710
1
Setup group cat. 1
3710
2
Setup group cat. 2
9.
Select the first row you created, then in Dialog Structure, double-click Setup group key.
10.
On the Change View “Setup group key”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
11.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:
12.
13.
Setup Group Key
Description
2
setup group 2
Repeat the steps for the second row you created: Setup Group Key
Description
2
setup group 2
3
setup group 3
Save your entries.
Defining Type of Standard Value Determination Use The type of standard value calculation specifies how the standard values of an operation are calculated (for example, using CAPP). You define the types of standard value calculation for each plant. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Routing Operation Data Define Type of Standard Value Determination
Transaction Code
SPRO
CUSTOMER 484
Localization objects - per Business Priority
2.
On the Change View “Standard Value Determination Type”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries:
4.
Plant
StdVDetT
3710
1
3710
2
3710
3
Save your entries.
Defining Reduction Strategy Use In this step, you specify the reduction strategy to be used when the reduction measures are carried out on operations. Scheduling reduces the lead time automatically if the basic dates given are not adhered to, that is if the scheduled dates lie outside the basic dates. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Routing Operation Data Define Reduction Strategy
Transaction Code
OPJS
2.
On the Change View “Reduction strategy”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Plnt
Reduction Strategy
Reduction Strategy
3710
01
Reduction strategy 1
4.
Select the 3710 row, then in the Dialog Structure, double-click Reduction Levels.
5.
On the Change View “Reduction levels”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
6.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: RedLevel
Red.Queue
Transport
1
50
2
100
X
3
100
X
Overlap
X
Split
4 7.
100
X
X
X
Save your entries.
Defining Move Time Matrix Use The purpose of this step is to define move time matrix settings.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Work Center General Data Define Move Time Matrix
Transaction Code
OP30
2.
On the Change View “Location groups”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Plnt
Loc. group
Description
3710
A
Location group A
3710
B
Location group B
4.
Select the first row you created, then in Dialog Structure, double-click Transport time matrix.
5.
On the Change View “Transport time matrix”: Details screen, choose New Entries.
6.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Plnt
Loc. grou p
371 0 7.
A
Targ Plnt
To locatio n grp
Std. move time
Min. move time
Calenda r
Start
Finish
371 0
B
160,00 0 MIN
30,00 0 MIN
1
07:00:0 0
18:00:0 0
Calenda r
Start
Finish
Repeat the steps for the second row you created: Plnt
Loc. grou p
Targ Plnt
To locatio n grp
Std. move time
Min. move time
CUSTOMER 486
Localization objects - per Business Priority
371 0 8.
B
371 0
A
120,00 0 MIN
15,00 0 MIN
1
07:00:0 0
18:00:0 0
Save your entries.
Determining Person Responsible Use The purpose of this step is to determine a person responsible.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Work Center General Data Determine person responsible
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Person Responsible for Work Center”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:
4.
Plant
Pers. Respons.
Person responsible for work center
3710
001
Work center supervisor
Save your entries.
Defining Alternative Determination for Inventory Management Use The purpose of this step is to define the alternative determination for Inventory Management.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Bill of Material Alternative Determination Alternative Determination in Related
Application Areas Define Alternative Determination for Inventory Management Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Alternative Determination in Inventory Mgmt”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:
4.
Plant
Application
3710
BEST
Save your entries.
Defining Alternative Determination for MRP Use The purpose of this step is to define the alternative determination for MRP. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Bill of Material Alternative Determination Alternative Determination in Related Application Areas Define Alternative Determination for MRP
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Alternative Determination in MRP”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries:
4.
Plant
SelID
3710
Y1
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 488
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Define Strategies for Stock Determination Use The purpose of this step is to define strategies for stock determination. The configuration settings are located in MM customizing, but required for PP.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Stock Determination Define Strategies for Stock Determination
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
Double-click the section in Dialog structure for Stock determination group.
3.
On the Change View “Stock determination group”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plant
SDG - Stock Determination group
Description
3710
0001
Stock determination group 0001
5.
Save your entries.
6.
On the Change View: “Stock determination group“: Overview screen, double-click the section in Dialog structure for Stock determination Header Table.
7.
On the Change View “Stock determination Header Table”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
8.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plant Stock Stck Description determ. determation group rule 3710 0001
9.
0001
Sorting – Item table
Rank.Ordr Sorting Price
Stock Select 1 determination Ascending
Rank Order
Select 2 Ascending
Double-click the section in Dialog structure for Stock determination group. choose New Entries and enter the following: S -Special stock indicator
SLoc – Storage Location
Priority Indicator
F
371C
1
K 10.
371C
2
Save your entries.
4.7.1.1.2 Material Requirements Planning (MRP) Defining Rescheduling Check – Plant Use The purpose of this step is to define a rescheduling check for plant. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Planning MRP Calculation Define Rescheduling Check
Transaction Code
OMDW
2.
On the Rescheduling screen, choose Plant.
3.
On the Change View “Plant Rescheduling”: Overview screen, double-click the Plant 3710 and then enter the following: Field Name
4.
Description
User action and values
Rescheduling horizon
100
Firmed Planned Orders
X
Production order
X
Fixed Purchase Requisitions
X
PO/SA Schedule Line
X
QM inspection lot
X
Shipping notificat
X
Tolerance value forward
2
Tolerance value for displacemt
2
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 490
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Defining Range of Coverage Profile (Dynamic Safety Stock) Use The purpose of this step is to define range of coverage.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Planning MRP Calculation Define Range of Coverage Profile (Dynamic Safety Stock)
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Range of coverage profile”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Field Name
4.
Description User action and values
Plant
3710
Coverage Profile
001
Description
3 days in the next month, then 5 days
Period ind.
M
Determine average requirements Number of periods
3
Type of per.length
1
Range of coverage in the first period – target
3
Range of coverage in the first period Number of periods
1
Range of coverage in the second period – target
5
Save your entries.
Carrying out Overall Maintenance of Plant Parameters Use The purpose of this step is to carry out overall maintenance of plant parameters.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Plant Parameters Carry Out Overall Maintenance of Plant Parameters
Transaction Code
OPPQ
2.
On the Plant Parameters for Material Requirements Planning screen, choose Maintain.
3.
In the Maintain Plant Parameters dialog box enter the following: Plant 3710
4.
Choose Maintain.
5.
Choose Number Ranges
Object
Plant
NRg.Pl.Orders
Simulative planned orders
Planned Orders
3710
01
01
Object
Plant
NR:StkTRns Res
Reservations / dependent requirements
3710
01
Object
Plant
NR:P req
Purchase Requisitions
3710
01
Object
Plant
No. Range -MRP
MRP list
3710
01
CUSTOMER 492
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Object
Plant
NR. SimDepRs
Simulative Dep Req
3710
01
6.
Choose Conversion and in the next screen Planned order production order.
7.
Make sure that the following entries have been made: Plnt
Production Order
Process Order
3710
YBM1
YBM2
8.
Save your entries and go back to the Conversion screen.
9.
Choose Planned Order purch. requisition.
10.
Make sure that the number of plant orders to be read is 500 for plant.
11.
Save your entries and go back to the Maintain Plant Parameters screen.
12.
Choose BOM/Routing Selection.
13.
Enter Y1 in BOM Sel ID for every plant.
14.
Save your entries and go back to the Maintain Plant Parameters screen.
15.
Choose BOM Explosion.
16.
Select the checkbox SOrd/WBS BOM Active.
17.
Save your entries and go back to the Maintain Plant Parameters screen.
18.
Choose Direct Procurement, and then maintain the following entries: Plnt
Direct procuremnt/production
Acc. Asst unknown: direct procmt
3710
3
U
19.
Save your entries and go back to the Maintain Plant Parameters screen.
20.
Choose Floats, and the maintain the following entries:
21.
Plnt
Marg.
3710
000
3710
001
Op. Per.
FI Bef.
FI After
Rel. Per.
10
2
1
5
Save your entries.
Carrying out Overall Maintenance of MRP Groups Use The purpose of this step is to create MRP groups and maintain the relevant parameters for these groups.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning MRP Groups Carry Out Overall Maintenance of MRP Groups
Transaction Code
OPPR
2.
On the MRP Group screen, enter the plant 3710 and choose Create.
3.
In the Create MRP Group dialog box enter the following: Plant
MRP Group
Description
3710
0000
External procurement (blank)
3710
0001
In-hse prod. w/o indpt reqmts (initial)
3710
0002
In-house prod. with planned indpt reqmts
3710
0010
Make to Stock Production
3710
0040
Production w. consump. with prel.plan
3710
0052
Production without final assembly
4.
Choose Create and then save your entries. Go back to the previous screen. In the following, maintain the parameters for the relevant MRP groups.
5.
On the MRP Group screen, enter the relevant plant (see the following table) and choose Maintain.
6.
On the Create Plant Parameters dialog box enter the relevant MRP group (see the following table) and choose Maintain. Plant /
3710 3710
3710
3710
0002 0010
0040
0052
10
40
52
Field MRP Group Consumption/adjustment radio button Planning Strategy group Consumption mode
2
2
2
2
Consumption period: backward
30
30
30
30
Consumption period: forward
2
2
2
2
Rescheduling horizon
100
100
100
Tolerance value forward
2
2
2
Tolerance value for displacement
2
2
2
Rescheduling horizon radio button
CUSTOMER 494
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Plant /
3710 3710
3710
3710
Field
Planning time fence radio button Planning Time Fence Order types radio button Process order
YBM2 YBM2 YBM2
Safety Stock radio button Share of safety stock which can be used for planning
100
100
100
Create Purchase Req.
2
2
2
Create MRP list
1
1
1
Schedule Lines
2
2
2
PP
PP
PP
Creation indicator radio button
Check Rule Dep Req radio button Checking Rule 7.
Save your entries.
Assign MRP Group to Strategy Group In this step, you allocate a strategy group to the MRP group. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Master Data Independent Requirements Parameters Assign MRP Group to Strategy Group
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Change View “Strategy Group for MRP Group”: Overview screen, enter the following: Plnt
MRP Group
Planning Strategy Group
3710
0010
10
3.
3710
0040
40
3710
0052
52
Save your entries.
Defining Splitting of Forecast Requirements for MRP Use The purpose of this step is to define splitting of forecast requirements for MRP. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Forecast Define Splitting of Forecast Requirements for MRP
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Splitting Forecast Requirements”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Plnt
4.
Splitting indicator
Period indicator
Period indicator Descr.
No.dys No.wks Pds
3710 A
M
Monthly
1
3710 A
W
Weekly
4
2
4 16
Save your entries.
Defining Availability of Stock in Transfer/Blocked Stock/Restricted Stock Use The purpose of this step is to define availability of stock in transfer/blocked stock/restricted stock. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER
496
Localization objects - per Business Priority
2.
3.
IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Planning MRP Calculation Stocks Define Availability of Stock in Transfer/Blocked Stock/Restricted Stock
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Change View “Available Stocks”: Overview screen, enter the following: Plnt
Stock in transfer
3710
X
Blocked Stk
Restricted-use stock
Save your entries.
Defining Special Procurement Type Use The purpose of this step is to define special procurement type.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Master Data Define Special Procurement Type
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Special Procurement”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name
4.
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Sp.Pr. Type
10
Description
Consignment
Procurement Type
F
Special procurement
K
Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name Plant
Description
User action and values 3710
Sp.Pr. Type
20
Description
External procurement
Procurement Type
F
Special procurement 5.
Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name
6.
3710
Sp.Pr. Type
30
Description
Subcontracting
Procurement Type
F
Special procurement
L
Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Sp.Pr. Type
50
Description
Phantom assembly
Procurement Type
E
Special procurement
E
Phantom item
X
Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name
8.
User action and values
Plant
Field Name
7.
Description
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Sp.Pr. Type
52
Description
Direct production / collective order
Procurement Type
E
Special procurement
E
Direct production
X
Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Sp.Pr. Type
60
Description
Phantom in planning
CUSTOMER 498
Localization objects - per Business Priority
9.
Procurement Type
E
Special procurement
E
Save your entries.
Defining Line Item Numbers Use The purpose of this step is to define the line item numbers. Procedure 1.
2.
3.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Planning Procurement Proposals Define Line Item Numbers
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Change View “Item Numbers”: Overview screen, enter the following: Plnt
Item PR
Item No. Stock Trans. Res.
3710
10
100
Save your entries.
Defining External Procurement per MRP Group Use In this step, you specify default values for externally procured materials which are included in materials planning. You can maintain the GR processing time for purchasing as well as the purchasing group at plant level. The purchasing group maintained here is then taken into account in the planning run, if a purchasing group has been maintained for the material in the master record. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
Materials Management Consumption-Based Planning Planning Procurement proposals Define External Procurement
Transaction Code
OMDT
2.
On the External Procurement screen, choose Plant.
3.
On the Change View “Default Values Purchasing/MRP”: Overview screen, doubleclick plant 3710.
4.
On the Change View “Default Values Purchasing/MRP”: Details screen enter the following: Field Name
Description
User action and values
Purch. Process. Time
3
Unknown Acct Assignment
U
5.
Choose Back to return the External Procurement screen.
6.
On the External Procurement screen, choose MRP group.
7.
On the Change View “External Procurement per MRP Group”: Overview screen, enter the following: Plnt MRP Scheduling: Group Info/Agreemt
DocType Standard purchase order (SPO)
DocType Subcontractor (SC)
DocType Stock transfer (ST)
3710 0000 3710 0001 3710 0002 8.
Save your entries.
Defining Safety Stock Availability Use In this step, you define the percentage of the safety stock to be available for planning. This function is used to avoid the situation where order proposals are created unnecessarily by the system for small shortage quantities.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER
500
Localization objects - per Business Priority
2.
3.
IMG Menu
Materials Management Consumption-Based Planning Planning MRP Calculation Stocks Define Safety Stock Availability
Transaction Code
SPRO
On the Change View “Safety Stock Availability”: Overview screen, enter the following: Plnt
MRP
AvSS
3710
0000
000
3710
0001
000
3710
0002
000
Save your entries.
Defining Period Display for Period Totals Use In this step, you specify which periods are to be displayed in the period totals display of the MRP list and the stock/requirements list. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Material Requirements Planning Evaluation Period Totals Define Period Display for Period Totals
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Period Grouping”: Overview screen, select the 3710 row and choose Details.
3.
On the Change View “Period Grouping ”: Details screen, enter the following:
4.
Days
Weeks
Months
X
X
X
Save your entries.
Defining Receipt Elements for Receipt Days’ Supply Use In this IMG activity, you define which receipt elements are used to calculate receipt days' supplies. The receipt days' supply indicates how many days a material will last. It takes the current plant stock and predefined receipts into consideration.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Consumption-Based Planning Evaluation Define Receipt Elements for Receipt Days' Supply
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Calculation of Days’ Supply”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:
4.
Plnt Prd/Prc
PO/SN/SL QM- Fixed Firm APOrd Receipt Shipping Safety Insp. Purch. Planned Reservations Notes Stock Req Orders
3710 X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Save your entries.
Parameters for Determining the Basic Dates Use In this step, you can determine for each plant that the system will not automatically switch to forward scheduling in the calculation of the basic dates if the planned start date lies in the past.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Materials Management Consumption-Based Planning Planning Parameters for Determining the Basic Dates
CUSTOMER 502
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Order Proposals in the Past”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plnt
Start in past
3710 4.
Save your entries.
Defining Storage Location and Supply Area Determination in BOM Use In this step, you define the strategy the system uses to find the storage location (issue storage location) for the components in BOM explosion, when back flushing and in MRP. This logic is also used in supply area determination. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Repetitive Manufacturing Cross-Process Settings Define Storage Location and Supply Area Determination in BOM Explosion
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
Double-click Storage Location Determination for Component Withdrawal.
3.
On the Change View “Storage Location Determination in Repetitive Mfg”: Overview screen, enter the following:
4.
Plnt
MGr
3710
0000
3710
0001
3710
0002
Save your entries.
PSSel
Defining Profiles with Default Values Use In this step, you define task list profiles. A profile is a collection of default values for task list headers and operations.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Basic Data Routing -> Control Data Define Profiles with Default Values
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Default Values Profile screen, choose Profile/General Data.
3.
On the Change View “Default Values for Routings”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name
5.
Description
User action and values
Application
P
Profile
371
Description
Default Value Profile
Predefined Plnt
3710
Usage
1
Stat
4
Unit
PC
Increment
0010
Base Quantity
100,000
Counter
1
Denominator
1
Crcy
EUR
SV Determ.Type
1
Std val.key
SAP1
Entry tool
X
Save your entries. CUSTOMER
504
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Defining Default Values – Task List Selection Use In this step, you specify which data is contained in an operation that is automatically created during order creation.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Task List Selection Define Default Values
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in the Plant field, enter 3710 and choose Continue.
3.
On the Change View “Default values for generation of operations”: Overview screen, Choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Order Type
YBM2
Control Key
YBP1
Task list unit Usage Denominator
1
Numerator
1
Base Quantity
100,000
Operation
0010
Operation Description Purchasing group Material Group 5.
Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Order Type
YBW1
Control Key
YBP1
Task list unit Usage
1
Denominator
1
Numerator
1
Base Quantity
100,000
Work Center Operation
0010
Operation Description
Rework
Purchasing group Material Group 6.
Save your entries.
Scheduling Planned Orders Use The purpose of this step is to define scheduling parameters for planned orders. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Capacity Requirements Planning Operations Scheduling Define scheduling parameters for planned orders
Transaction Code
OPU5
2.
On the Change View “Scheduling planned orders”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field name Plnt
Description Values 3710
CUSTOMER 506
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Order type
*
ProdSupervisor
*
Sched. Hor.det
550
detailed scheduling Scheduling
X
detailed scheduling – Generate capacity reqs.
X
Adjust dates
Adjusts basic dates, Adjust dep. reqmts to operation dates
In Capacity scheduling
Always basic dates, dep. reqmts to operation dates
Scheduling Type
Backwards
Reduction Type
All oper. In the future will be red.
Maximum Reduction Level
Do not reduce
Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field name
5.
Description Values
Plnt
3710
Order type
PE
ProdSupervisor
*
Sched. Hor.det
550
detailed scheduling Scheduling
X
detailed scheduling – Generate capacity reqs.
X
Adjust dates
Adjusts basic dates, Adjust dep. reqmts to operation dates
In Capacity scheduling
Always basic dates, dep. reqmts to operation dates
Scheduling Type
Backwards
Reduction Type
All oper. In the future will be red.
Maximum Reduction Level
Do not reduce
Save your entries.
4.7.1.1.3 Shop Floor Control (SFC) Defining Scheduling Margin Key Use The purpose of this step is to define the scheduling margin key. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Scheduling Define Scheduling Margin Key
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Margins for scheduling”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Plant Key Opening Period
Float After Production
Float Before Production
Release Period
1
2
5
3710 000 3710 001 10 4.
Save your entries.
4.7.1.1.4
Repetitive Manufacturing
Defining Control Data for Pull List Use This step contains all the information needed to define control data for the Pull List. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
CUSTOMER 508
Localization objects - per Business Priority
IMG Menu
Production Repetitive Manufacturing Material Staging Define Control Data for Pull List
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Pull List Control”: Overview screen that appears, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Field name
Description
Values
Plant
3710
Stock Transfers
311
MTO
4.
StkRule
0001
Search proced.
YB0001
Save your entries.
Result After performing this activity the necessary settings for control data for pull list are made.
Defining Generation of Cost Log Use In this step, you control whether a costs log is created in repetitive manufacturing when backflushing activities. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Repetitive Manufacturing Cost Object Controlling Define Generation of Cost Log
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Repetitive Manufacturing: Cost Log”: Overview screen that appears, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries:
4.
Plnt
Log
3710
X
Save your entries.
4.7.2Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Industry [local] (BJ7) 4.7.2.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.7.2.1.1 Shop Floor Control (SFC) Defining Order Type Dependent Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define the parameters for the production order types.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Master Data Order Define Order Types-dependent Parameters
Transaction Code
OPL8
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
Plant
3710
Order type
YBM1
On the Planning tab, make the following entries: Master Data Production version
1
Routing Application (Routing)
P
Routing selection ID
Y1
CUSTOMER 510
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Sequence exchange
0
Alternative sequence
X
Routing type
N
Operation Entry tool
X
Oper./act. increment
0010
Bill of Material BOM Application
PP01
Batch Determination Search procedure
YB0001
Check batch
X
Purchase Requisitions Reservation/Purchase Req. 5.
2
On the Implementation tab, make the following entries: Status change documents For Order Header
X
For Operation
X
For Material
X
For Production Resource/Tool
X
Shop floor information system Update
X
Header
X
Item Operation Documentation of goods movements
6.
GR for Purchase Order
X
GR for Production Order
X
Planned Goods Issue
X
Unplanned Goods Issue
X
On the Cost Accounting tab, make the following entries: Controlling Cstg variant planned
PYG1
Cstg variant actual
PYG2
Results Analysis Key
MBMF01
Planned Cost Calcul.
Determine Planned Cost When Saving
Distribution Rule Default Rule 7.
PP1
On the Display profiles tab, make the following entries: Collective order display Graphics profile
000001
Graphic Group
PP
Name
Standard
Index
2
Missing parts list ProfMissPrtsLstOrdNo
000001
Missing Parts Prof.
000002
8.
Save your entries.
9.
Choose
Back.
Defining ATP Checking Control Use The purpose of this activity is to define parameters for the confirmation of operations. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Availability Check Define Checking Control
Transaction OPJK 2.
On the Change View “Order Control”: overview Screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field Name Plant
Description
User action and values 3710
CUSTOMER 512
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Order Type
YBM1
Availability Check
1
Material availability No Check
X (set indicator)
Checking Rule
SO
PRT availability No Check
X (set indicator)
Capacity availability No Check 4.
X (set indicator)
Save your entries and make a new entry by maintaining the following values: Field Name
Description User action and values
Plant
3710
Order Type
YBM1
Availability Check
2
Material availability No Check
Leave blank/Remove indicator
Checking Rule
SP
Check material availability when saving order
X
Release material
1
PRT availability No check
X (set indicator)
Capacity availability Capacity Availability No Check 5.
X (set indicator)
Save your entries and go back to the IMG menu.
Defining Confirmation Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define parameters for the confirmation of operations.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Confirmation Define Confirmation Parameters
Transaction OPK4 2.
On the Change View “Parameters for Order Confirmation”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values: Field Name
Description User action and values
Plant
3710
Order Type
YBM1
Accept default settings on General valid settings tab Individual Entry General tab Confirmation type
Partial confirmation
Shift - Proposal
Shift Not used
indiv. Entry of Operation w. initial Screen tab
4.
Quantities - Propose
X
Quantities - Display confirmed quantities
X
Quantities - Display Standard Values
X
Activities - Propose
X
Activities - Display confirmed activities
X
Activities - Display Standard Values
X
Dates – Display confirmed dates
X
Dates – Display Standard Values
X
HR Data – Display Standard Values
X
Screen Control Time Ticket Quantities/activities
X
Selection – Incl.Finally Confirmed Operations
blank
Selection – Include Confirmable Operations
X
Save your entries and go back to the IMG menu. CUSTOMER
514
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Defining Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders Use The purpose of this activity is to define for each plant the order type, the production scheduler/production supervisor and the parameters for the scheduling of production orders.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Scheduling Define Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders
Transaction OPU3 2.
On the Change View “Specify Scheduling Parameter”: Overview screen, choose New entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values: Field Name
4.
Description User action and values
Plant
3710
Order Type
YBM1
Production Supervisor
*
Generate Capacity Req.
X
Adjust Dates
Adjust basic dates, adjust dep. reqmts to order start
Scheduling Type
Backwards
Start in the past
Leave blank
Automatically Scheduling
X
Operation Segment
Setup
Reduction Type
All operations in the order will be reduced
Maximum reduction level
Do not reduce
Save your entries and go back to the IMG menu.
Defining Production Scheduling Profile Use The purpose of this activity is to create the production-scheduling profiles for specific plants.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Master Data Define production scheduling profile
Transaction OPKP 2.
On the Change View Production Scheduling Profile: Overview Screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values: Field Name
4.
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Production Scheduling Profile
YB0001
Description
MTS DI Valuated
Schedule Order
X
Confirm Available Partial Qty
X
Order Type - MTS Production
YBM1
Save your entries and go back to the IMG menu.
Define Production Supervisor Use The purpose of this activity is to define production schedulers/production supervisors for your plants. In addition to this, you can assign a control profile to each production scheduler. By assigning production schedulers to materials within the application, you can define responsibilities for a material within production activity control.
CUSTOMER 516
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Master Data Define Production Supervisor
Transaction OPJ9 2.
On the Change View “Production Scheduler”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values: Field
4.
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Production Scheduler
YB1
Description
MTS DI Valuated
Prod.Profile
YB0001
Save your entries and go back to the IMG menu.
4.7.3 Make-to-Stock Production - Process Industry [local] (BJA) 4.7.3.1
Configuration – On-Premise
4.7.3.1.1 Define Order Types-Dependent Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define order types-dependent parameters. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Planning for Process Industries Process Order Master Data Order Define Order Types-dependent Parameters
Transaction Code
COR4
2.
On the Change View “Order Type-Dependent Parameters” Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of added entries screen, enter the following:
4.
Plant
3710
Order type
YBM2
On the Master data tab, enter the following values: Field Name
5.
User Action and Values
Production Version
0 Automatic selection of production version
Operation Det. Verif.
X
Relationship View
1 Predecessor
Selection ID
Y4
Order Record Required
Radio button selected
Entry Tool
X
Operation Increment
0010
On the Planning tab, enter the following: Field Name
6.
Description
Description
User Action and Values
Reservation/Pur.req
3
Application
PI01 Process Manufacturing
Search Procedure
YB0001 BP: Search procedure
Check: Specified Batch Active
X
On the Implementation tab, enter the following: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
For Order Header
X
For Operation
X
For Material
X
Statistics
X
Planned Goods Issue
X
Unplanned Goods Issue
X
CUSTOMER 518
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
7.
Description
Goods receipt for process order
X
Goods Receipt for Purchase order
X
On the Cost Accounting tab, enter the following: Field Name
8.
Description
User Action and Values
Standard Costing Variant
PYG1
Actual Costing Variant
PYG2
Results Analysis Key
MBMF01
Planned Cost Calculation
2 Determine Planned Cost When Saving
Default Role
PP1
On the Display profiles tab, enter the following: Field Name
9.
User Action and Values
Description
User Action and Values
ProfMissPrtsLstOrdNo
000001
PrfMissPrtLstCollOrd
000001
Save your entries.
Result The order type-dependent parameters are defined.
4.7.3.1.2 Define and Set Up Control Recipe Destinations Use The purpose of this activity is to define and set up control recipe destinations. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Planning for Process Industries Process Management Control Recipes / PI Sheets Control Recipe Destinations Define and Set Up Control Recipe Destinations
Transaction Code
O10C
2.
On the Determine Work Area: Entry, enter 3710 Continue.
3.
On the Change View “Maintain Control Recipe Destinations” Overview screen, choose New Entries.
4.
On the New Entries: Details of added entries screen, enter the following: Field Name
Description
and then choose
User action and values
Plant
3710 (field already filled)
CtrlRec.Destin.
01
Description
Default
Dest. Type
Transfer to ABAP listbased PI Sheet
Address 5.
for Plant
1 DEFAULT
Save your entries.
4.7.3.1.3 Define Checking Controls Use The purpose of this activity is to define checking controls. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Planning for Process Industries Process Order Operations Availability Check Define Checking Control
Transaction Code
OPJK
2.
On the Change View “Order Control”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Plant
3710
Order Type
YBM2
Availability Check
1
CUSTOMER 520
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
4.
User Action and Values
Material availability No check
X
Material availability Checking Rule
SO
PRT availability - No check
X
Capacity availability No check
X
Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name
5.
Description
Description
User Action and Values
Plant
3710
Order Type
YBM2
Availability Check
2
Material availability Checking Rule
SP
Material availability Release material
1
PRT availability - No check
X
Capacity availability No check
X
Save your entries.
Result The checking control is defined.
4.7.3.1.4 Specify Scheduling Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to specify scheduling parameters.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
Production Planning for Process Industries Process Order Operations Scheduling Specify Scheduling Parameters
Transaction Code
OPUZ
2.
On the Change View “Specify scheduling parameters”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name
4.
Description
User Action and Values
Plant
3710
Order type
YBM2
Prodn Superv.
*
Generate Capacity Reqs
X
Adjust Dates
Adjust basic dates, adjust dep. reqmts to operation dates
Scheduling Type
1 Forwards
Start in the Past
30
Automatic Scheduling
X
Maximum reduction level
0 Do not reduce
Save your entries.
Result The scheduling parameters are defined.
4.7.3.1.5 Define Production Scheduling Profiles Use The purpose of this activity is to define production scheduling profiles.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER
522
Localization objects - per Business Priority
IMG Menu
Production Planning for Process Industries Process Order Master Data Define Production Scheduling Profiles
Transaction Code
CORY
2.
On the Change View “Production Scheduling Profile”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Plant
3710
ProdProfile
YB0002
On Creation - Release
X
On Release – Carry Out Scheduling
X
Batch Management Aut. Batch Creation
No Automatic batch creation in Production/process order
Batch Management Classify Batches
1 Classification carried out in background (all batches)
Transport - WM Request
No creation or transfer requirements on order release
Order Type - Make-tostock
YBM2
4.
Choose Back F 3 .
5.
On the Change View “Production Scheduling Profile”: Overview screen, enter MTS Process Manufacturing in the corresponding field for profile description.
6.
Save your entries.
Result The production scheduling profile YB0002 is defined.
4.7.3.1.6 Define Production Supervisor Use The purpose of this activity is to define the production scheduler/production supervisor.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Planning for Process Industries Process Order Master Data Define Production Supervisor
Transaction Code
CORU
2.
On the Change View “Production Scheduler”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following values:
4.
Plant
ProdSched.
Description
ProdProfile
3710
YB2
MTS PI valuated
YB0002
Save your entries.
Result The production scheduler YB2 is defined.
4.7.3.1.7 Define Confirmation Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define confirmation parameters. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Planning for Process Industries Process Order Operations Confirmation Define Confirmation Parameters
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
On the Change View “Parameters for Order Confirmation”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plant
3710
Order type
YBM2
CUSTOMER 524
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Generally valid settings tab Field Name
5.
User Action and Values
Operation sequence
Operation sequence is not checked
Underdelivery
Underdelivery tolerance is not checked
Overdelivery
Overdelivery tolerance is not checked
Results Rec. (QM)
Message if no inspection results exist
Selection - Open orders
X
Propose Time Units Automatic optimization
X
Individual Entry General tab Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Confirm.type
Final confirmation
X
Clear open reservations
X
Act. costs
X
Goods movements
X
Shift - Proposal 6.
Description
Shift Not Used
Individual entry for Operation with initial screen tab Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Quantities - Propose
X
Quantities - Display Confirmed Quantities
X
Quantities - Display Standard Values
X
Dates - Display Confirmed Dates
X
Dates - Display Standard Values
X
Screen Control Time Ticket Quantities/Activities
X
Field Name
7.
Description
User Action and Values
Activities - Propose
X
Activities - Display Confirmed Activities
X
Activities - Display Standard Values
X
HD Data - Display Standard Values
X
Save your entries.
Result The confirmation parameters are defined.
4.7.4 Make-to-Order Production w/o Variant Configuration [local] (BJG) 4.7.4.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.7.4.1.1 Sales and Distribution Pricing Define and Assign Pricing Procedures - Control Data Use The purpose of this activity is to define pricing procedure. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Sales and Distribution Basic Functions Pricing Pricing Control Define and assign pricing procedures
CUSTOMER 526
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Maintain pricing procedures.
3.
Select the pricing procedure A37002 and in the Dialog Structure pane, double-click Control data.
4.
On the Change View Control data: Overview screen choose New Entries.
5.
Enter the following data: Field Name
6.
Description
User Action and Values
Step
25
Ctype
YB01
Print
X
SuTot
4
Reqt
2
AccKey
ERL
Comment
Save your entries.
Result You have defined and assigned the Pricing Procedure A37002.
4.7.4.1.2 Production Planning and Batch Management Production Order Defining Production Order Type Use This task allows you to define the production order type. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Master Data Order Define Order Types
Transaction Code
OPJH
2.
On the Change View Maintain Production Order Types: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Maintain the following settings: Field Name
User Action and Values
Order category
10
Order Type
YBM4
Description
Production Order Processing MTO
Comment
Control Indicator CO Partner Update
Semi-active
Reorganization Residence Time 1
1
Residence Time 2
1
Cost controlling Settlement profile
YBMFP1
BP: PP Valuated to COPA
Status Profile Header 4.
Save your entries.
Result Production order type YBM4 is defined.
Assignment Functional Areas to Order Type Use In this step, you make additional settings for a functional area in the order type. Only perform this procedure when testing the configuration. Use caution if you decide to perform it in a productive system.
CUSTOMER 528
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system Menu
Controlling Product Cost Controlling- Cost Object Controlling - Product Cost by Order - Manufacturing Orders Check Order Type
Transaction Code
KOT2
2.
On the Change View “Order Type”: Overview screen, double-click order type YBM4
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
Field
User Action or Values
Object class
Production
Functional area
YB20
Save your entries.
Defining Order Type Dependent Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define the parameters for the production order types. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Master Data Order Define Order Types-dependent Parameters
Transaction Code
OPL8
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Make the following entries:
4.
Plant
3710
Order type
YBM4
On the Planning tab, enter the following: Master Data Production version
0
Routing Application (Routing)
P
Routing selection ID
Y1
Sequence exchange
0
Alternative sequence
X
Routing type
N
Operation Entry tool
X
Oper./act. increment
0010
Bill of Material BOM Application
PP01
Batch Determination Search procedure
YB0001
Check batch
X
Purchase Requisitions Reservation/Purchase Req. 5.
2
On the Implementation tab, enter the following: Status change documents For Order Header
X
For Operation
X
For Material
X
For Production Resource/Tool
X
Shop floor information system Update
X
Header
X
Item Operation Documentation of goods movements GR for Purchase Order
X
GR for Production Order
X
Planned Goods Issue
X
CUSTOMER 530
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Unplanned Goods Issue 6.
X
On the Cost Accounting tab, make the following entries: Controlling Cstg variant planned
PYG1
Cstg variant actual
PYG2
Results Analysis Key
MBMF01
Planned Cost Calcul.
Determine Planned Cost When Saving
Distribution Rule Default Rule 7.
PP1
On the Display profiles tab, enter the following: Collective order display Graphics profile
000001
Graphic Group
PP
Name
Standard
Index
2
Missing parts list
8.
ProfMissPrtsLstOrdNo
000001
Missing Parts Prof.
000002
Save your entries.
Result You have defined order dependent parameters for order type YBM4.
Defining Production Scheduling Profiles Use The purpose of this activity is to define production scheduling profiles.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Master Data Define Production Scheduling Profile
Transaction Code
OPKP
2.
On the Change View Define Production Scheduling Profiles: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following settings: Field Name
User Action and Values
Plant
3710
Prod. Sched. Profile
YB0004
Description (of prod. sched. Profile)
MTO w/o VC – Val.
Automatic Actions On Release Schedule Order
X
Material Availability Check Confirm Available Partial Qty
X
Order Type Make-to-Order Production 4.
YBM4
Save your entries.
Result You have defined the production scheduling profile YB0004.
Defining Production Supervisor Use The purpose of this activity is to define the production scheduler/production supervisor. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Master Data Define Production Supervisor
CUSTOMER 532
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Transaction Code
OPJ9
2.
On the Change View Production Scheduler: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following settings:
4.
Field Name
User Action and Values
Plant
3710
Prod.Sched.
YB4
Description
MTO w/o VC – Val.
ProdProfile
YB0004
Save your entries.
Result You have defined the production scheduler YB4.
Scheduling Defining Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders Use The purpose of this activity is to specify scheduling parameters. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Scheduling Define Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders
Transaction Code
OPU3
2.
On the Change View Specify Scheduling Parameters: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following settings: Field Name
User Action and Values
Plant
3710
Field Name
User Action and Values
Order type
YBM4
Prodn Superv.
*
Detailed Scheduling Scheduling
X
Generate Capacity Reqs.
X
Adjust Dates Adjust Dates
Adjust basic dates, adjust dep. reqmts to operation date
Scheduling control for detailed scheduling Scheduling Type
Backwards
Automatic Scheduling
X
Start in the Past
5
Requirements Date Determination for Components Operation Segment
Setup
Reduction Reduction type
All operations in the order will be reduced
Maximum reduction level
Do not reduce
% reduction in floats 4.
Save your entries.
Result You have defined the scheduling parameter for production order type YBM4.
Availability Check Defining ATP Checking Control Use The purpose of this activity is to define parameters for the confirmation of operations.
CUSTOMER 534
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Availability Check Define Checking Control
Transaction OPJK 2.
On the Change View Order Control: overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following settings: Field Name
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Order Type
YBM4
Availability Check
1
Material availability No Check
X (set indicator)
Checking Rule
SO
PRT availability No Check
X (set indicator)
Capacity availability No Check
X (set indicator)
4.
Save your entries and go Back.
5.
On the Change View Order Control: overview screen, choose New Entries and enter the following settings: Field Name
Description User action and values
Plant
3710
Order Type
YBM4
Availability Check
2
Material availability Check material availability when saving order
X (set indicator)
Checking Rule
SP
Release material
1
PRT availability No check
X (set indicator)
Field Name
Description User action and values
Capacity availability No check 6.
X (set indicator)
Save your entries.
Result You defined the ATP checking control.
Confirmation Parameters Defining Confirmation Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define parameters for the confirmation of operations. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Confirmation Define Confirmation Parameters
Transaction OPK4 2.
On the Change View Parameters for Order Confirmation: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
3.
On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
3710
Order Type
YBM4
YBM4
Control data Generated confirmations w/o quantity adjustment
X
Generally valid settings tab
CUSTOMER 536
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Checks Operating sequence
Warning when operation sequence is not adhered to
Underdelivery
Under delivery tolerance is not checked
Overdelivery
Error when over delivery tolerance is exceeded
Results Rec. (QM)
Message if no inspection results exist
Selection Open orders
X
Propose time units Automatic Optimization
X
Goods movements All components
blank
Individual Entry General tab Confirmation type
1
Automatic final confirmation
Act.cost
X
X
Goods movements
X
X
Shift - Proposal
Shift Not used
Individual Entry of Operation with initial scrn tab Quantities Propose
X
Display confirmed quantities
X
Display Standard Values
X
Dates Display confirmed dates
X
Display Standard Values
X
Screen control Time Ticket Quantities/activities Activities
X
Propose
X
Display confirmed activities
X
Display Standard Values
X
HR Data Display Standard Values
X
Selection Include Confirmable Operations 4.
X
Save your entries.
Result You have defined confirmation parameter for order type YBM4.
SD Batch Determination and Batch Check Allocate SD Search Procedure/Activate Check Use The purpose of this activity is to allocate the batch search strategy to order type CBMO. Automatic batch determination can be done either on the sales order level or in the delivery. When you assign the batch already in the sales order, a batch split is not possible. The standard configuration foresees the automatic batch determination in the delivery. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics - General Batch Management Batch Determination and Batch Check Batch Search Procedure Allocation and Check Activation Allocate SD Search Procedure/Activate Check
Transaction Code
SPRO
CUSTOMER 538
Localization objects - per Business Priority
1.
On the Change view “Search Procedure for Batches: Determination in Sales Docs screen, choose New entries.
2.
Enter the following information:
3.
Sales Org
Distr. Chl
Division Sales Doc Type
Search Procedure
Check Batch
3710
10
00
YB0001
X
CBMO
Save your entries.
Result You have allocated the batch search strategy to the order type SBMO.
Activate Automatic Batch Determination in SD (Item Cat Delivery) Use The purpose of this activity is to activate automatic batch determination in SD. General Information: The automatic batch determination can be done either on sales order level or in the delivery. If the batch is assigned already in the sales order, a batch split is not possible. The standard configuration foresees the automatic batch determination in the delivery.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Logistics - General Batch Management Batch Determination and Batch Check Activate Automatic Batch Determination in SD
Transaction Code
SPRO
2.
Choose Activate Automatic Batch Determination for Delivery Item Cat.
3.
Enter the following information:
4.
Item Category
Description
Automatic Batch Determination
CBTA
MTO Standard Item
X
Save your entries.
Result You have activated the automatic batch determination in SD.
4.7.5Repetitive Manufacturing [local] (BJJ) 4.7.5.1
Configuration – On Premise
4.7.5.1.1 Defining Production Scheduling Profile Use The purpose of this activity is to define the production scheduling profile for your plant.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Production Shop Floor Control Master Data Define Production Scheduling Profile
Transaction code
SPRO
In the Change View "Production Scheduling Profile": Overview screen, choose New Entries and enter the following values: Field
Description
Values
Plant
3710
Prod. Sched. Profile
YBR001
Comment
REM - Rep. Man.
On Release Schedule Order
Selected
Material Availability Check Confirm Available Partial Qty 3.
Selected
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 540
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.7.5.1.2 Defining Production Supervisor Use The purpose of this activity is to define the production scheduler/production supervisor.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu
Production Shop Floor Control Master Data Define Production Supervisor
Transaction code
SPRO
In the Change View "Production Scheduler": Overview screen, choose New Entries and enter the following values: Field
3.
Description
Values
Plant
3710
Prod. Sched.
YBR
Description
REM –Rep. Man.
Prod.Profile
YBR001
Comment
Save your entries.
4.7.6 Production Material Related Sample Master Data [local] (BM2) 4.7.6.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.7.6.1.1 Create Material Master – Organization Dependent for Production material Creating Raw Material Use A new raw material is needed.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General) Immediately
Transaction code
MM01
On the initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Material
Industry sector
M Mechanical Engineer
Material type
ROH Raw Materials
Material
Industry Sector
RM12
M
RM13
M
RM14
M
RM16
M
RM17
M
RM18
M
RM124
M
RM20
M
RM122
M
RM120
M
RM128
M
RM27
M
RM28
M
RM09
M
RM15
M
RM19
M
RM30
M
Note
see table below
CUSTOMER 542
Localization objects - per Business Priority
General Plant Data / Storage 1/2 3.
Choose the Plant data/stor.1/2 tab, view entries and choose Enter to continue. Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Plant
Comment
3710
Stor. location
see table below for material- and plant-specific data
Material
Plant
Stor. location
RM12
3710
371B;371C
RM13
3710
371B;371C
RM14
3710
371B;371C
RM16
3710
371B;371C
RM17
3710
371B;371C
RM18
3710
371B;371C
RM124
3710
371B;371C
RM20
3710
371B;371C
RM122
3710
371B;371C
RM120
3710
371B;371C
RM128
3710
371B;371C
RM27
3710
371B;371C
RM28
3710
371B;371C
RM09
3710
371B;371C
RM15
3710
371B;371C
RM19
3710
371B;371C
RM30
3710
371B;371C
4.
Choose Enter to open the second screen.
5.
Choose Save to go to the initial screen.
6.
On the initial screen, enter the following and choose Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Material
Industry sector
M Mechanical Engineer
Note
see table below
Material type 7.
ROH Raw Materials
In the Select View(s) dialog box, select the following views and press Enter: Sales Org. Data 1 and 2, Sales General Plant Data: for all materials Purchasing and Purchase Order Text: for all materials MRP views 1, 2, 3 and 4: for all materials Accounting 1 and 2: for all materials Costing 1 and 2: for all materials
8.
In the Organizational Levels dialog box, enter the following values: Field name
9.
Description User action and values
Plant
3710
Sales Org.
3710
Distr.Channel
10
Note
Enter the main plant where the material will be procured (see special instructions below)
Choose Enter To view the material lists, execute transaction MM60 or from the menu, choose Logistics Materials Management Material Master Other Materials List.
Sales Data 10.
Choose the Sales: sales org. 1 tab.
11.
Enter the following and press Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Delivering plant
3710
Tax classification ("TTX1")
1 for taxable
12.
Choose the Sales: sales org.2 tab.
13.
Enter the following and press Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Comment
Note
Acct assignment grp Item category group 14.
Choose the Sales: General/plant tab.
15.
Make the following entries and press Enter
NORM
CUSTOMER 544
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description
User action and values
Availability check
Y2 for Indiv.requirements
Trans. Grp
0001
LoadingGrp
0001
Profit Center
YB111
16.
Choose the Sales text tab.
17.
Enter text that should appear on sales documents for this material.
Note
Purchasing Data 18.
On the Initial purchasing screen, enter the following values and press Enter: Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Purchasing group
see table for material-specific data
Goods Receipt Processing Time
see table for material-specific data
Material
Purchasing Group
Goods Receipt Processing Time (days)
RM09
001
1
RM12
001
0
RM120
002
0
RM122
002
0
RM124
002
1
RM128
002
0
RM13
001
0
RM14
001
0
RM15
001
1
RM16
001
0
RM17
003
0
RM18
003
0
RM19
001
1
Material
19.
Purchasing Group
Goods Receipt Processing Time (days)
RM20
002
0
RM27
001
0
RM28
002
0
RM30
003
1
On the Purchase order text screen, enter the text that should appear on purchasing documents for this material.
MRP Data 20.
Choose the MRP1 tab.
21.
Enter the following and choose Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
MRP type
PD, VB
Note The MRP type for materials RM124 and RM30 must be VB PD for all the other row material.
MRP controller
see table for material-specific data
Reorder Point
see table for material-specific data
Lot size 22.
see table for material-specific data
Material-specific data MRP view 1: Material
MRP Controller
Reorder Point
RM09
001
EX
RM12
001
EX
RM120
001
EX
RM122
001
EX
RM124
001
RM128
001
EX
RM13
001
EX
RM14
001
EX
RM15
001
EX
200
Lot Size
EX
CUSTOMER 546
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Material
MRP Controller
Reorder Point
RM16
001
EX
RM17
001
EX
RM18
001
EX
RM19
001
EX
RM20
001
EX
RM27
001
0
EX
RM28
001
0
EX
RM30
001
200
EX
23.
Choose the MRP2 tab.
24.
Enter the following and press Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
Lot Size
Note
Procurement type
F
Special procurement
Prod. Stor. Location
371B
Storage loc. for EP
371C
Plnd delivery time
see table for materialspecific data
SchedMargin Key
Required
see table for materialspecific data
Backflush
see table for materialspecific data
Stock determination group
0001
see table for materialspecific data
Material Special Procurement Planned Delivery Time
Scheduling Margin Key
RM09
10
000
RM12
10
000
RM120
10
000
RM122
10
000
RM124
10
000
RM128
10
000
RM13
10
000
RM14
10
000
RM15
10
000
RM16
10
000
RM17
10
000
RM18
10
000
RM19
10
000
RM20
10
000
RM27
10
000
RM28
15
000
RM30
10
000
25.
Choose the MRP3 tab.
26.
Maintain the following values and choose Enter. Field name
Description
Backflush
1
1
1
User action and values
Note
Planning: Strategy Group 27.
Choose the MRP4 tab.
28.
Enter the following values and choose Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
Indiv./Coll
Note see table for material-specific data
Material
Indiv./ Collective Requirements
RM09
2
RM12
2
CUSTOMER 548
Localization objects - per Business Priority
29.
RM120
2
RM122
2
RM124
2
RM128
2
RM13
2
RM14
2
RM15
2
RM16
2
RM17
2
RM18
2
RM19
2
RM20
2
RM27
2
RM28
2
RM30
2
Choose Enter.
Accounting Data 30.
On the Accounting 1 tab, enter the following and choose Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
Price unit
1
Standard price
Valuation Class
3000
Material
Standard price
RM09
0,08
RM12
1
RM120
1,25
RM122
0,75
RM124
0,35
Note
see table for materialspecific data
RM128
1,65
RM13
0,5
RM14
0,75
RM15
0,2
RM16
0,25
RM17
0,88
RM18
0,67
RM19
0,12
RM20
1,3
RM27
0,75
RM28
2,25
RM30
0,01
31.
Choose the Accounting 2 tab.
32.
Choose Enter.
Costing Data 33.
Choose the Costing 1 tab.
34.
Maintain the following and then choose Enter. Field name
Description
Material origin
User action and values
Note
select the checkbox
35.
Choose the Costing 2 tab.
36.
Choose Enter.
37.
On the Last data screen reached dialog box, choose Yes to save your entries.
Result The raw material is created.
Creating Semi-finished (HALB) Material Use A new semi-finished material is needed. CUSTOMER 550
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General) Immediately
Transaction code
MM01
On the initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field name
Description User action and values
Material
required
Industry sector
M Mechanical Engineer
Material type
HALB Semi finished products
Material
Industry Sector
SG124
M
SG21
M
SG22
M
SG224
M
SG23
M
SG24
M
SG25
M
SG325A
M
SG325B
M
Note
see listed data below
General Plant Data / Storage 1/2 3.
Choose the Plant data/stor.1/2 tab, view the entries, and choose Enter to continue. Field Name Plant Stor. location
Description User Action and Values
Comment
3710 See the following table for material- and plant-specific data
Material
Plant
Stor. location
SG124
3710
371B
SG21
3710
371B
SG22
3710
371B
SG224
3710
371B
SG23
3710
371C
SG24
3710
371B
SG25
3710
371B
SG325A
3710
371B
SG325B
3710
371B
4.
Choose Enter to open the second screen.
5.
Choose Save to go to the initial screen.
6.
On the initial screen, Maintain the following and then choose Enter: Field name
7.
Description User action and values
Material
Industry sector
M Mechanical Engineer
Material type
HALB Semi finished products
Note
see table below
In the Select View(s) dialog box, select the following views and press Enter: Sales Org. Data 1 and 2, Sales General Plant Data: for all materials Purchasing and Purchase Order Text: for all materials MRP views 1, 2, 3 and 4: for all materials Accounting 1 and 2: for all materials Costing 1 and 2: for all materials
8.
Enter the following: Field name
9.
Description
User action and values
Plant
3710
Stor. location
Sales Org.
3710
Distr.Channel
10
Note
Choose Enter. To view the material lists, execute transaction MM60 or from the menu, choose Logistics Materials Management Material Master Other Materials List.
CUSTOMER 552
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Sales Data 10.
Choose the Sales: sales org. 1 tab.
11.
Maintain the following and then choose Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Delivering plant
3710
Tax classification ("TTX1")
1 for taxable
12.
Choose the Sales: sales org.2 tab.
13.
Maintain the following and then choose Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Acct assignment grp
02
Item category group
NORM
14.
Choose the Sales: General/plant tab.
15.
Maintain the following and then choose Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Availability check
Y2 for Indiv.requirements
Trans. Grp
0001
LoadingGrp
0001
Batch management
Profit Center
YB111
Note
Note
Note
16.
On the Sales text tab, enter the text to appear on sales documents for this material.
17.
Choose the Purchasing tab Enter does not work when the cursor is in a text field.
Purchasing Data 18.
Choose the Purchasing tab.
19.
Make the following entries and press Enter: Field name Purchasing group
Description User action and values
Note see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Goods Receipt Processing Time
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Material
Plant
Purchasing group
Goods Receipt Processing Time (days)
SG124
3710
001
0
SG21
3710
001
0
SG22
3710
001
0
SG224
3710
001
0
SG23
3710
001
0
SG24
3710
002
0
SG25
3710
001
0
SG325A
3710
001
0
SG325B
3710
001
0
20.
On the Purchase order text screen, enter the text to appear on purchasing documents for this material.
21.
Choose the MRP1 tab Enter does not work when the cursor is in a text field.
MRP Data 22.
Maintain the following and then choose Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
MRP type
PD
MRP controller
Lot size
EX
Note
see table below for materialand plant-specific data
Material
Plant
MRP controller
SG124
3710
001
SG21
3710
001
SG22
3710
001
CUSTOMER 554
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Material
Plant
MRP controller
SG224
3710
001
SG23
3710
001
SG24
3710
001
SG25
3710
001
SG325A
3710
001
SG325B
3710
001
23.
Choose the MRP2 tab.
24.
Maintain the following and then choose Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Procurement type
see table below for materialand plantspecific data
Special procurement
40 if material will always be transferred from another plant, otherwise leave blank
see table below for materialand plantspecific data
Prod. Stor. Location
see table below for materialand plantspecific data
Storage location for External Procurement
see table below for materialand plantspecific data
In-house production
see table below for materialand plantspecific data
Plnd delivery time
see table below for materialand plantspecific data
SchedMargin Key
001
Stock Determination group
see table below for material-
and plantspecific data
Materi al
Plant
Procur Special . procure -ment Type key
Prod. Stor Loc.
Stor. Loc. for Ext. proc.
Inhou se pro d. time
Plann Stock ed determ.g delive roup ry time in days
SG124
3710
E
371B
371C
1
10
SG21
3710
X
20
371B
371C
1
10
SG22
3710
E
50
371B
1
10
SG224
3710
E
SG23
3710
F
SG24
3710
E
SG25
3710
X
SG325 A
3710
SG325 B
3710
371B
371C
1
10
371C
371C
1
10
371B
371C
0
2
20
371B
371C
1
10
X
20
371B
371C
1
10
X
20
371B
371C
1
10
30
25.
Choose the MRP3 tab.
26.
Maintain the following and then choose Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
0001
0001
0001
Note
Planning Strategy group
40
Consumption mode
2
Bwd consumption per
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Fwd consumption per
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Total replenishment lead time
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
CUSTOMER 556
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Material Plant Backward consumption
Forward consumption
Total replenishment lead time
SG124
3710 100
100
2
SG21
3710 100
100
2
SG22
3710 100
100
2
SG224
3710 100
100
2
SG23
3710 100
100
2
SG24
3710 100
100
2
SG25
3710 100
100
2
SG325A
3710 100
100
2
SG325B
3710 100
100
2
27.
Choose the MRP4 tab.
28.
Maintain the following and then choose Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
Individual/coll.
2 for collective requirements 1 for individual requirements
Repetitive Manufacturing
REM profile
Material Plant Individual/ coll. requirements SG124
3710 2
SG21
3710 2
SG22
3710 2
SG224
3710 1
SG23
3710 2
Note see table below for material- and plantspecific data
see table below for material- and plantspecific data see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Repetitive Manufacturing
REM profile
x
0002
Material Plant Individual/ coll. requirements
29.
SG24
3710
SG25
3710 2
SG325A
3710 2
SG325B
3710 2
Repetitive Manufacturing
REM profile
Choose Enter.
Accounting Data 30.
31.
On the Accounting 1 screen, maintain the following entries and then press Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
Price unit
1
Standard price
enter standard cost of material
Valuation Class
7900
Note
see table below for materialand plant-specific data
Material
Plant
Standard price
SG124
3710
0,52
SG21
3710
1,5
SG22
3710
2,7
SG224
3710
0,52
SG23
3710
1,88
SG24
3710
0,17
SG25
3710
5,75
SG325A
3710
6,6
SG325B
3710
5,6
On the Accounting 2 tab, choose Enter.
Costing Data 32.
On the Costing 1 tab, make the following entries and then choose Enter. CUSTOMER
558
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description
User action and values
Material origin
select the checkbox
Variance key
000001
Note
33.
On Costing 2 tab, choose Enter.
34.
On the Last data screen reached dialog box, choose Yes to save your entries.
Result The semi-finished material is created.
Creating Finished (FERT) Material Use A new finished material is needed. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General) Immediately
Transaction code
MM01
On the initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter: Field name
3.
Description
User action and values
Material
Industry sector
M Mechanical Engineer
Material type
FERT Finished Products
Note
Industry Sector M for all of materials.
General Plant Data / Storage 1/2 4.
Choose the Plant data/stor.1/2 tab, view entries and choose Enter to continue.
Field Name
Description User Action and Values
Plant
Comment
3710
Stor. location
see table below for material- and plant-specific data
Material
Plant
Stor. location
FG126
3710
371A, 371B, 371R
FG226
3710
371A, 371B,
FG29
3710
371A, 371B, 371R
5.
Choose Enter to open the second screen.
6.
Choose Save to go to the initial screen.
7.
On the initial screen, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field name
8.
Description
User action and values
Material
Industry sector
M Mechanical Engineer
Material type
FERT Finished Products
Note
see table below
In the Select View(s) dialog box, select the following views and then choose Enter:
Sales Org. Data 1 and 2, Sales General Plant Data: for all materials Foreign Trade: Export Data Purchasing and Purchase Order Text: for all materials MRP views 1, 2, 3 and 4: for all materials Accounting 1 and 2: for all materials Costing 1 and 2: for all materials 9.
Enter the following: Field name
Description User action and values
Plant
3710
Stor. location
Sales Org.
3710
Note
First create the materials for plant 3710; see table below for further plants
First create the materials for sales organization 3710. see table below for further sales organizations
CUSTOMER 560
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description User action and values
Distr.Channel 10.
Note
10
Choose Enter.
Sales Data 11.
Choose the Sales: sales org. 1 tab.
12.
Make the following entries and then choose Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Delivering plant
3710
Tax classification ("TTX1")
1 for taxable
13.
Choose the Sales: sales org.2 tab.
14.
Make the following entries and then choose Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Acct assignment grp
03
Item category group
NORM;
15.
Choose the Sales: General/plant tab.
16.
Make the following entries and then choose Enter: Field name
Description
User action and values
Availability check
Y2 for Indiv.requirements
Trans. Grp
0001
LoadingGrp
0001
Batch Management
Blank
Profit Center
YB110
Note
Note
Note
17.
On the Sales text tab, enter the text to appear on sales documents for this material.
18.
Choose the MRP tab
19. 20.
Enter does not work when the cursor is in a text field.
MRP Data 21.
Choose the MRP1 tab.
22.
Make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field name
Description
User action and values
MRP type
PD
MRP controller
Lot size
EX
Material
Plant
MRP controller
FG126
3710
001
FG226
3710
001
FG29
3710
001
23.
Choose the MRP2 tab.
24.
Make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Note
Procurement Type
E;
E for plant 3710;
Special Procurement
blank;
blank for plant 3710;
Prod. Stor. Location
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Storage Location for External Procurement
see table below for material- and plantspecific data
SchedMargin Key
000; 001
In-house production time
Material Plant Production Storage Location FG126
3710 371A
Storage Location for External Procurement
see table below for material- and plantspecific data see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Scheduling Margin Key
In-house Production
000
1
CUSTOMER 562
Localization objects - per Business Priority
FG226
3710 371A
000
FG29
3710 371A
000
25.
Choose the MRP3 tab.
26.
Make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field name
1
Description User action and values
Note
Strategy group
40
See the following table for material- and plant-specific data
Consumption mode
2 (see special instructions)
Bwd consumption per
See the following table for material- and plant-specific data
Fwd consumption per.
See the following table for material- and plant-specific data
Total replenishment lead time
See the following table for material- and plant-specific data
Material Plant Period Planning Consumption Consumption Total period: repl. Indicator strategy period: lead group forward backward time FG126
3710 W
40
100
100
2
FG226
3710
40
100
100
2
FG29
3710
40
100
100
2
27.
Choose the MRP4 tab.
28.
Make the following entries and then choose Enter.
Field name
Description User action and values
Individual/coll.
2 for collective requirements 1 for individual requirements
29.
Material
Plant
FG126
3710
FG226
3710
FG29
3710
Note see table below for material- and plantspecific data
Individual/ coll. requirements
1
Choose Enter.
Accounting Data 30.
On the Accounting 1 tab, make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field name
Description User action and values
Price unit
1
Standard price
Valuation class
31.
Note
see table below for material- and plant-specific data
7920
Material
Plant
Standard price
FG126
3710
18,65
FG126
3710
27,19
FG29
3710
0,88
Choose the second Accounting screen, and then choose Enter.
CUSTOMER 564
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Costing Data Use For the SpecProcurem Costing field, when the standard cost must be copied from the same material in a different plant, and no value was entered in the Special Procurement field in MRP2, then enter the appropriate value.
Procedure 1.
On the Costing 1 tab, make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field name
Description
User action and values
Material origin
Selected
Variance key
000001
Note
2.
On the Costing 2 tab, choose Enter.
3.
On the Last data screen reached dialog box, choose Yes to save your entries.
Result The finished material is created.
Creating Info Records Use The purpose of this activity is to create Info Records.
Prerequisites The material master records have been created. Vendor master records have been created. Procedure 4.
Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Info Record Create
Transaction Code 5.
At the entry view, maintain the fields as: Field name
6.
ME11
Description User action and values
Material
Plant
3710
Purchasing Organization
3710
Vendor
Info category:
Standard
Comment see table below for material-specific data
see table below for material-specific data
Choose the Purchase Organization Data 1 tab and enter the following: Field name
Description User action and values
Comment
Pl. Deliv. Time
see table below for materialspecific data
Purch. Group
see table below for materialspecific data
Tol. Underdl
10
Tol. Overdl
10
Standard Qty
Tax Code
AA
Net Price
Currency Key
EUR
Price unit
100
Incoterms 1
EXW
Incoterms 2
VENDOR
Material Vendor RM09
Purchasing Group
37300001 001
see table below for materialspecific data
see table below for materialspecific data
Planned Delivery Time
Standard quantity
Net Price
5
1
0,084
CUSTOMER 566
Localization objects - per Business Priority
RM12
37300001 001
5
1
1,05
RM12
37300002 001
5
1
0,95
RM120
37300001 001
5
1
1,31
RM120
37300002 001
5
1
1,37
RM122
37300001 001
5
1
0,75
RM124
37300001 001
5
1
0,35
RM15
37300001 001
5
1
0,21
RM16
37300001 001
5
1
0,24
RM17
37300001 001
5
1
0,84
RM18
37300001 001
5
1
0,70
RM18
37300002 001
5
1
0,64
RM19
37300001 001
5
1
0,13
RM20
37300001 001
5
1
1,23
RM27
37300001 001
5
1
0,71
RM28
37300001 001
5
1
2,70
RM30
37300001 001
5
100
0,01
SG21
37300001 002
5
1
1,43
SG23
37300001 002
5
1
1,78
SG23
37300002 002
5
1
2,25
SG25
37300001 002
5
1
5,46
RM13
37300001 001
5
1
0,48
RM14
37300001 001
5
1
0,71
7.
Choose Enter.
8.
Save your entries.
9.
Choose Back F 3 .
10.
Enter the data required on the Create Info Record: Initial Screen. Enter the data as follows: Field name
User action and values
Vendor
37300001
Material
SG23 (SEMI material)
Purchasing Organization
3710
Plant
3710
Field name
User action and values
Info category:
“Subcontracting”
11.
Choose Enter.
12.
On the Create Info Record: General Data screen, choose Purch. Org. Data1.
13.
On the Create Info Record: Purch. Organization Data screen, enter the data as follows: Subscreen Control: Field name
User action and values
Pl.Deliv.Time
10
Purch. group
001
Standard Qty.
100
GR-Bsd IV
Selected
Net price
0,59
Currency Key
EUR
Price unit
1
Order price unit
PC
Tax Code
AA
14.
Choose Enter. The system fills the missing data from material master.
15.
Save your entries.
Result The info records have been created.
Creating Sales Pricing Conditions Use The SAP Baseline Package scenarios require several pricing conditions.
Prerequisites The material master records have been created.
CUSTOMER 568
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP Menu
Logistics Sales and Distribution Master Data Conditions Select Using Condition Type Create
Transaction Code
VK11
2.
On the Create Condition Records screen, enter PPR0 in the input field Condition type.
3.
Choose Key combination.
4.
In the Key Combination dialog box, select Material with release status.
5.
Choose continue E n t e r .
6.
On the Create Price Condition (PPR0 Fast Entry screen, enter the values for Sales Organization, Distribution Channel, Material, Amount according to the details list in the section above (Use). In the Valid From field, enter the current date and in the Valid to field, enter 31.12.9999. Sales Organization
Division
Material
Per
Amount
3710
10
SG23
1
2,44
SG25
1
7,48
FG126
1
24,25
FG226
1
35,35
FG29
1
1,15
7.
Choose Enter.
8.
Save your entries.
9.
Choose back F 3 .
Result The pricing conditions have been created.
4.7.7 Rework Production Order - Stock-Manufactured Material [local] (BJP) 4.7.7.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.7.7.1.1 Shop Floor Control Defining Order-Type-Dependent Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define order types-dependent parameters. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Master Data Order Define Order Types-dependent Parameters
Transaction Code
OPL8
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following:
4.
Plant
3710
Order type
YBW1
On the Planning tab, enter the following: Production version Production version
1
Routing Routing selection
P
Selection ID
Y1
Sequence exchange
0
Alternative sequences Task List Type
N
Operation Entry tool CUSTOMER 570
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Oper./act. increment
0010
Bill of material
5.
BOM Application
PP01
Reservation/Purch.Req
2
On the Implementation tab, enter the following: Status change documents For Order Header For Operation For Material For Production Resource/Tool Shop floor information system Update
X
Header
X
Item Operation Documentation of goods movements
6.
GR for Purchase Order
X
GR for Production Order
X
Planned Goods Issue
X
Unplanned Goods Issue
X
On the Cost Accounting tab, enter the following: Controlling Cstg variant planned
PYG1
Cstg variant actual
PYG2
Results Analysis Key
MBMF01
Planned Cost Calcul.
Determine Planned Cost When Saving
Distribution Rule Default Rule 7.
PP1
On the Display profiles tab, enter the following: Collective order display Graphics profile Graphic
000001
Group
PP
Name
Standard
Index
2
Missing parts list ProfMissPrtsLstOrdNo
000001
Missing Parts Prof.
000002
8.
Save your entries.
9.
Choose Back.
Defining Checking Control Use In this activity, you define the checking control.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Availability Check Define Checking Control
Transaction Code
OPJK
2.
Choose Execute.
3.
Choose New Entries.
4.
Enter the following: Plant
3710
Order type
YBW1
Availability check
1
Material availability Checking Rule
PP
PRT availability No check
X
Capacity availability CUSTOMER 572
Localization objects - per Business Priority
No check
X
5.
Save your entries.
6.
Choose Back.
7.
Repeat the steps for the following information: Plant
3710
Order type
YBW1
Availability check
2
Material availability Checking Rule
PP
Release Material
1
PRT availability No check
X
Capacity availability No check
X
Defining Parameters for Order Confirmation Use In this activity, you define the parameters for order confirmation. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Shop Floor Control Operations Confirmation Define Confirmation Parameters
Transaction Code
OPK4
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following:
4.
Plant
3710
Order Type
YBW1
On the Generally valid settings tab, enter the following:
Checks Operation sequence
Warning when operation sequence is not adhered to
Under delivery
Under delivery tolerance is not checked
Over delivery
Over delivery tolerance is not checked
Results Rec.(QM)
Message if no inspection results exist
Selections Open orders
X
Propose time units Automatic optimization
Selected
Goods movements All components 5.
Choose the individual entry General tab.
6.
Enter the following: Confirmation function except fast entry Confirm.type
Partial confirmation
Error handling/logs Act costs
X
Goods movements
X
Shift - Proposal
Shift Not Used
7.
Choose the indiv.entry of Operation w initial screen tab.
8.
Make the following entries: Quantities Propose
X
Display confirmed quantities
X
Display Standard Values
X
Activities Propose
X
Display confirmed activities
X
Display Standard Values
X
Dates Display confirmed dates
X
CUSTOMER 574
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Display Standard Values
X
HR Data Display Standard Values
X
Screen control Time Ticket Quantities/activities
Selected
Selection Incl.Confirmable operations 9.
Save your entries.
10.
Choose Back.
X
Defining Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu
Production Capacity Requirements Planning Operations Scheduling Define Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders
Transaction Code
OPU3
2.
Choose New Entries.
3.
Enter the following: Plant
3710
Ord.Typ
YBW1
Prod.sched.
*
Detailed Scheduling Scheduling
X
Capacity reqts
X
Adjust scheduling Adjust Dates
Adjust basic dates, adjust dep. reqmts to operation date
Scheduling control for detailed scheduling Scheduling type
Backwards
Automatic scheduling
X
Start. in.past
005
Requirements Date Determination for Components Operation Segment
Setup
Reduction Reduction type
All operation in the order will be reduced
Max.redctn.level
Do not reduce
4.
Save your entries.
5.
Choose Back.
4.7.8 Rework Production Order Sample Master Data [local] (BJY) 4.7.8.1
Master Data –OP
Create Routing – Finished Product Use The purpose of this activity is to create routings for the finished product. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Routings Routings Standard Routings Create
Transaction Code
CA01
On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter. Field Name
Description
Values
Material number
FG126
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Group
4101000
Key Date
Comment
CUSTOMER 576
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name
4.
5.
Description
Values
Group Counter
99
Task list description
Packaging Line 1
Task list usage
Production (1)
Status
Released (general)
From Lot Size
0
To Lot Size
99999999
Comment
Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field Name
Values
Operation/Activity Number
010
Work center
WORK
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Control Key
YBP1
Operation short text
WORK
Base Quantity
1
Unit of Measure for Operation
PC
Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field
Values
Setup
30
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
3
Machine
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
1
Labor
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
11
6.
Save your entries.
Create BOMs - Finished Products Use The purpose of this activity is to create a BOM for materials FG126. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Bills of Material Bill of Material Material BOM Create
Transaction Code
CS01
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter. Field Name
3.
Description
Comment
Material number
FG126
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
BOM usage
Production (1)
Valid From
e.g. 01.01.2007
On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name
4.
Values
Description
Values
Base quantity
1
BOM Status
Active (1)
Comment
Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values: BOM Item Number
Item Category (Bill of Material)
BOM Component
Component quantity
Component unit of measure
010
Stock item (L)
FG126
1
PC
5.
Choose Enter. You are prompted that the BOM is recursive and you are taken to the Item General data tab. Select the recursive allowed tick box.
6.
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 578
Localization objects - per Business Priority
The BOM will be created as Alternative 2 if Alternative 1 BOM has already been created from configuration guide Building Block BJL (MTS Production – Discrete Industry Sample Master Data) for the material FG126.
Create Production Version for Finished Product Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. The purpose of this activity is to create a production version for the material Finished Good MTS (FG126).
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Production Versions
Transaction Code
C223
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name
3.
Description
Values
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Material number
FG126
Key date for the selection of production versions
Today’s Date
On the Production Versions table, enter the following values: Field Name
Description Values
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Material Number
Finished Good MTS (FG126)
Production Version
0099
Short text on the production version
Production Version 99
Comment
Comment
Field Name
4.
Description Values
Valid-from date of production version
Today’s Date
Run-time end: production version
31.12.9999
Lot Size from
0
To Lot Size
99999999
Alternative BOM
2
BOM Usage
1 (Production)
Key for Task List Group
410100XX
Group Counter
99
Task List Type
N
Comment
Enter the group number from the Routing of your finished product.
Save your entries.
4.7.9 Production Subcontracting - External Processing [local] (BJM) 4.7.9.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.7.9.1.1 Master Data Creating Purchase Info Record Use The purpose of this activity is to create an Info Record.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER
580
Localization objects - per Business Priority
2.
SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Purchasing Master Data Info Record Create
Transaction Code
ME11
On the Create Info Record: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter. Field Name
3.
Vendor Account Number
37300001
Purchasing Organization
Purchasing Organization 1 (3710)
Info category
Standard
Comment
On the Create Info Record: General Data screen, enter the following values for each of the materials and then choose Enter. Field Name
4.
Description User Actions and Values
Description User Actions and Values
Material Group
01
Short Text
Shrink Wrapping
Salesperson
Mr. Salesman
Telephone
172595959
Order Unit
PC
Certificate of origin: Country of issue
DE
Region
BadenWürttemberg (08)
Sort Term
Comment
For example,FG126, Enter material number of any finished good.
Choose Purchase Organization Data, enter the following values. Field Name
Description User Actions and Values
Planned delivery time days
1
Purchasing Group
004
Comment
5.
Standard purchase order quantity
100
Net price
35
Price unit
100
Sales Tax Code
AA
Save your entries.
4.7.10 Central Production Sample Master Data (for Library - Mfg.) [local] (BJ3) 4.7.10.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.7.10.1.1 Logistics – General Data Creating Bill of Material Use The purpose of this activity is to create BOM Header Data and all items for materials SG22;SG23. Prerequisites The material master records have been created.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Bills of Material Bill of Material Material BOM Create
Transaction Code
CS01
On the Create Material BOM: Initial Screen, enter the following data to create the BOM of material SG22. Field name Material
Description User action and values
Comment
SG22
CUSTOMER 582
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description User action and values
Plant
3710
BOM Usage
1
Comment
Effectivity Valid From
First date of the fiscal year
For example 01.01.2006
3.
Choose Enter.
4.
On the Create Material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 .
5.
On the Create Material BOM: Header Overview screen, enter 100 in the input field Base quantity.
6.
Choose Enter.
7.
On the Create Material BOM: Header Overview screen, choose Item Overview F 5 .
8.
On the Create Material BOM: General Item Overview screen, enter the following data: Item
ICt
Component
Quantity
Un
0010
L
RM16
100
PC
0020
L
RM17
100
PC
0030
L
RM18
100
PC
9.
Save your entries.
10.
On the Create Material BOM: Initial Screen, enter the following data to create the BOM of material SG23. Field name
Description User action and values
Material
SG23
Plant
3710
BOM Usage
1
Comment
Effectivity Valid From
First date of the fiscal year
For example 01.01.2006
11.
Choose Enter.
12.
On the Create Material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 .
13.
On the Create Material BOM: Header Overview screen, enter 100 in the input field Base quantity.
14.
Choose Enter.
15.
On the Create Material BOM: Header Overview screen, choose Item Overview F 5 .
16.
17.
On the Create Material BOM: General Item Overview screen, enter the following data: Item
ICt
Component
Quantity
Un
0010
L
RM13
100
PC
0020
L
RM14
100
PC
Save your entries.
Result You have created BOM Header Data and all related items for material SG22 and SG23.
4.7.10.1.2 General Data Production Creating Resources Use The purpose of this activity is to create all kind of resources to be used in Master Recipes. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Process Master Data Resources Resource Create (CRC1)
Transaction Code
CRC1
At the entry view, maintain the fields as: Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Plant
3710
Resource
see table below for specific data
Resource category
see table below for specific data
CUSTOMER 584
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
4.
5.
Resource
Resource Category
BOTTLING
0008
MIXING
0008
PACKING
0008
In the Basic data view, maintain the following fields: Field name
Description User action and values
Resource Description
see table below for specific data
Person Responsible
see table below for specific data
Usage
see table below for specific data
Standard Value key
see table below for specific data
Resource
Person Responsible
Usage Standard value key
BOTTLING Ink Bottling
001
008
YBP1
MIXING
Ink Mixing
001
008
YBP1
PACKING
Ink Packing
001
008
YBP1
Resource Description
Note
In the Default Values view, maintain the following fields: Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Control Key
see table below for specific data
Standard value units
see table below for specific data
Resource
Control Key
Standard value unit 1
Standard value unit 2
BOTTLING
YBP4
H
H
MIXING
YBP4
H
H
PACKING
YBP4
H
H
In the Capacities view, maintain the following fields:
Field name
Description User action and values
Capacity Category
001
Other formula
see table below for specific data
Capacity Category
002
see table below for specific data
Other formula
see table below for specific data
Resource
Capacity Category
Other formula
BOTTLING
001
YBPI01
002
YBPI02
001
YBPI01
002
YBPI02
001
YBPI01
002
YBPI02
MIXING PACKING 6.
Note
Select the Capacity header data, maintain fields (first for capacity category 001, then return to the main screen, set the cursor on capacity category 002, and select the Capacity header data, if applicable) Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Capacity Category
see table below for specific data
Capacity Category Description
see table below for specific data
Capacity Planner Group
see table below for specific data
Factory calendar ID
01
Unit of measure
see table below for specific data
Start Time
see table below for specific data
CUSTOMER 586
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Finish Time
see table below for specific data
Length of Breaks
see table below for specific data
Capacity Utilization
see table below for specific data
No. of individual capacities
see table below for specific data
Relevant to finite scheduling
see table below for specific data
can be used by several operations
see table below for specific data
relevant for long-term planning
see table below for specific data
Resource
UoM Cap. Pln. Grp
Start Time
Fin. Time
BOTTLING 001
H
06:00
002
H
001
H
002
H
001
H
002
H
MIXING PACKING
Resource
Cap. Cat.
Cap. Cat.
BOTTLING 001 002
A A A
Length of Breaks
Cap. Utilization
No. of indiv. cap.
18:00
100
1
06:00
18:00
100
1
06:00
18:00
100
1
06:00
18:00
100
1
06:00
18:00
100
1
06:00
18:00
100
1
Capacity short text
Relevant to finite scheduling
Can be used by several operations
Long-termplanning
Machine Capacity
Labor Capacity
Resource
Cap. Cat.
Capacity short text
Relevant to finite scheduling
Can be used by several operations
Long-termplanning
MIXING
001
Machine Capacity
002
Labor Capacity PACKING
001 002
Machine Capacity Labor Capacity
7.
Choose the Scheduling Tab page and make the following entries: Field name
8.
Description User action and values
Capacity Category
001
Int.Proc.Duration
Resource
Int.Proc.Duration
BOTTLING
YBPI01
MIXING
YBPI01
PACKING
YBPI01
Comment
see table below for specific data
Choose the Costing tab and make the following entries: Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Controlling Area
A000
Cost Center
Start Date
Activity Type
see table below for specific data
Activity Unit
see table below for specific data
see table below for specific data
CUSTOMER 588
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description User action and values
Reference Indicator
set always indicator
Formula
see table below for specific data
Work Center
Cost Center
Activity Type
Activity Unit
Formula
BOTTLING
37101301
3
H
YBPI01
11
H
YBPI02
3
H
YBPI01
11
H
YBPI02
3
H
YBPI01
11
H
YBPI02
MIXING PACKING 9.
Note
37101301 37101301
Save your entries.
Result You have created the necessary resources.
Creating Work Centers Use The purpose of this activity is to create all kind of work centers with different work center categories, according to their different applications. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Work Centers Work Center Create (CR01)
Transaction Code
CR01
At the entry view, maintain the fields as:
Field name
3.
Description User action and values
Note
Plant
3710
Work Center
see table below for specific data
Work center category
see table below for specific data
Work Center
Work Center Category
ASSEMBLY
0001
DISCR_MF
0001
PACK01
0001
PACK02
0001
PVRSN_MF
0001
TECHNIC
0001
TESTING
0001
TOT_PLNT
0001
WORK
0001
WINDING
0007
In the Basic data view, maintain the following fields: Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Work Center Description
see table below for specific data
Person Responsible
see table below for specific data
Usage
see table below for specific data
Standard Value key
see table below for specific data
CUSTOMER 590
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
Work Center
Work Center Description
Person Responsible
Usage Standard value key
ASSEMBLY
Assembly
001
009
SAP1
DISCR_MF
Manufacturing - Top Level
001
009
SAP1
PACK01
Packing Line 1
001
009
SAP1
PACK02
Hand Packing Work Center
001
009
SAP1
PVRSN_MF
Pen Manufacturing Top Level
001
009
SAP1
TECHNIC
CNC machine
001
009
SAP1
TESTING
Testing
001
009
SAP1
TOT_PLNT
Manufacturing - Top Level
001
009
SAP1
WINDING
Spring Winding
001
009
SAP1
WORK
Work for machine/person
001
009
SAP1
In the Default Values view, maintain the following fields: Field name
Description User action and values
Control Key
see table below for specific data
Standard value units
see table below for specific data
Work Center
Control Key
Note
Standard value unit 1
Standard value unit 2
Standard value unit 3
ASSEMBLY
MIN
MIN
MIN
DISCR_MF
MIN
MIN
MIN
PACK01
MIN
MIN
MIN
Work Center
Control Key
Standard value unit 1
Standard value unit 2
Standard value unit 3
PACK02
YBP1
MIN
MIN
MIN
PVRSN_MF
H
H
H
TECHNIC
MIN
MIN
MIN
TESTING
MIN
MIN
MIN
MIN
MIN
MIN
MIN
MIN
MIN
TOT_PLNT WINDING
YBP3
WORK 5.
In the Capacities view, maintain the following fields: Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Capacity Category
001
Setup formula
See the following table for specific data
Processing Formula
See the following table for specific data
Other formula
See the following table for specific data
Capacity Category
002
See the following table for specific data
Setup formula
See the following table for specific data
Processing Formula
See the following table for specific data
Other formula
See the following table for specific data
Work Center
Capacity Category
Setup formula
Processing formula
ASSEMBLY
001
SAP005
SAP006
CUSTOMER 592
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Work Center
Capacity Category
Setup formula
Processing formula
DISCR_MF
001
SAP005
SAP006
002
SAP007
PACK01
001
SAP005
SAP006
PACK02
001
SAP005
SAP006
PVRSN_MF
001
SAP005
SAP006
002
SAP005
SAP006
TECHNIC
001
SAP005
SAP006
TESTING
001
SAP005
SAP006
TOT_PLNT
001
SAP005
SAP006
WINDING
001
SAP005
SAP006
WORK
001
SAP005
SAP006
002 6.
SAP007
Select the Capacity header data and maintain fields (first for capacity category 001, then return to the main screen, set the cursor on capacity category 002, and select the Capacity header data, if applicable) Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Capacity Category
See the following table for specific data
Capacity Category Description
See the following table for specific data
Capacity Planner Group
See the following table for specific data
Factory calendar ID
01
Unit of measure
See the following table for specific data
Start Time
See the following table for specific data
Finish Time
See the following table for specific data
Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Length of Breaks
See the following table for specific data
Capacity Utilization
See the following table for specific data
No. of individual capacities
See the following table for specific data
Relevant to finite scheduling
See the following table for specific data
can be used by several operations
See the following table for specific data
relevant for long-term planning
See the following table for specific data
Work Center
Cap. Cat.
UoM Cap. Pln. Grp
Start Time
Fin. Time
ASSEMBLY 001
MIN
Cap. Utilization
No. of indiv. cap.
07:00
16:00 01:00
100
1
DISCR_MF
001
H
07:00
16:00 01:00
100
4
002
H
07:00
16:00 01:00
100
4
PACK01
001
MIN
B
07:00
16:00 01:00
100
1
PACK02
001
MIN
B
07:00
16:00 01:00
100
1
PVRSN_MF
001
H
06:00
00:00
100
3
002
H
06:00
00:00
100
3
TECHNIC
001
MIN
A
07:00
16:00 01:00
100
1
TESTING
001
MIN
A
07:00
16:00 01:00
100
1
TOT_PLNT
001
H
A
07:00
16:00 01:00
100
7
WINDING
001
MIN
C
07:00
16:00 01:00
100
1
A
A
A
Length of Breaks
CUSTOMER 594
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Work Center
Cap. Cat.
UoM Cap. Pln. Grp
Start Time
Fin. Time
WORK
001
H
07:00
002
H
07:00
A
Length of Breaks
Cap. Utilization
No. of indiv. cap.
16:00 01:00
90
2
16:00 01:00
90
4
Work Center
Cap. Cat.
Capacity short text
Relevant to finite scheduling
Can be used by several operations
Long-termplanning
ASSEMBLY
001
Default Capacity
DISCR_MF
001
Machine Capacity
002
Labor Capacity
PACK01
001
Default Capacity
PACK02
001
Default Capacity
PVRSN_MF
001
Machine Capacity
002
Labor Capacity TECHNIC
001
Default Capacity
TESTING
001
Default Capacity
TOT_PLNT
001
Default Capacity
WINDING
001
Default Capacity
Work Center
Cap. Cat.
Capacity short text
Relevant to finite scheduling
WORK
001
Machine Capacity
002
Can be used by several operations
Long-termplanning
Labor Capacity 7.
Choose the Scheduling Tab page and make the following entries: Field name
Comment
Capacity Category
001
Setup formula
See the following table for specific data
Processing Formula
See the following table for specific data
Work Center
Setup formula
Processing formula
ASSEMBLY
SAP001
SAP002
DISCR_MF
SAP002
PACK01
SAP002
PACK02
SAP003
PVRSN_MF
SAP002
TECHNIC
8.
Description User action and values
SAP001
SAP002
TESTING
SAP002
TOT_PLNT
SAP002
WINDING
SAP002
WORK
SAP002
Choose the Costing tab and make the following entries:
CUSTOMER 596
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description User action and values
Note
Controlling Area
A000
Cost Center
Start Date
Activity Type
See the following table for specific data
Activity Unit
See the following table for specific data
Reference Indicator
Set always indicator
Formula
See the following table for specific data
See the following table for specific data
Work Center
Cost Center
Activity Type
Activity Unit
Formula
ASSEMBLY
37101301
3
MIN
SAP005
1
MIN
SAP006
11
MIN
SAP007
3
MIN
SAP001
1
MIN
SAP002
11
MIN
SAP003
3
MIN
SAP005
1
MIN
SAP006
11
MIN
SAP007
3
MIN
SAP005
1
MIN
SAP006
11
MIN
SAP007
DISCR_MF
PACK01
PACK02
PVRSN_MF
37101301
37101301
37101301
37101301
Work Center
Cost Center
Activity Type
Activity Unit
Formula
TECHNIC
37101301
3
MIN
SAP005
1
MIN
SAP006
11
MIN
SAP007
3
MIN
SAP005
1
MIN
SAP006
11
MIN
SAP007
3
MIN
SAP005
1
MIN
SAP006
11
MIN
SAP007
3
MIN
SAP001
1
MIN
SAP002
11
MIN
SAP003
TESTING
TOT_PLNT
37101301
WINDING
37101301
WORK
9.
37101301
37101301
Save your entries.
Result You have created the necessary work centers.
Creating Work Center Hierarchy Use The purpose of this activity is to create the work center hierarchy Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Line Design Environment Work Center Hierarchy Create
Transaction Code
CR21
Make the following entries: Hierarchy Name
Plant
Short description Language EN
TOT_PLANT
3710
Total Plant
CUSTOMER 598
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
Choose the Work Center Assignment button, S h i f t
4.
On the dialog box, maintain Plant 3710, then choose Enter.
5.
Confirm the message with Enter.
6.
Choose Select all S h i f t
7.
Go to Graphic F 6 and create the following hierarchy using the connect function:
+ F7
+ F5 .
Work Center
Superior work center
ASSEMBLY
DISCR_MF
BOTTLING
PVRSN_MF
DISCR_MF
TOT_PLNT
MIXING
PVRSN_MF
PACK01
DISCR_MF
PACK02
DISCR_MF
PACKING
PVRSN_MF
PVRSN_MF
TOT_PLNT
TECHNIC
DISCR_MF
TESTING
DISCR_MF
TOT_PLNT
8.
WINDING
PVRSN_MF
WORK
DISCR_MF
Save your entries.
Result The work center hierarchy has been created, all work centers are now assigned to this hierarchy.
Create Routing (centrally used Routings) Use The purpose of this activity is to create a dummy routings.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Routings Routings Standard Routings Create
Transaction Code
CA01
On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter. Field Name
3.
Comment
SG22
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Group
5000000
Key Date
Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, and enter the following values: Description
Values
Comment
Group Counter
1
Task list description
SEMI22,PD,Phantom
Task list usage
Production
1
Status
Released (general)
4
From Lot Size
0
To Lot Size
99.999.999
Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Op/Acti Work Num center 0010
5.
Values
Material number
Field Name
4.
Description
Plant Control Description Based Setup Machine Labor key quantity
ASSEMBLY 3710 YB99
Dummy operation for costing only
100
0,001 0,001
0,001
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 600
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Create Production Version for Semi-finish Product Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. The purpose of this activity is to create a production version for the material Finished Good MTS (SG22). Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Production Versions
Transaction Code
C223
On the Create Production Version: Mass Processing, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name
3.
Description Values
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Material number
SG22
Key date for the selection of production versions
Today’s Date
Comment
On the Production Versions table, enter the following values: Field Name
Description Values
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Material Number
SG22
Production Version
0001
Short text on the production version
Production Version 1
Valid-from date of production version
Today’s Date
Run-time end: production version
31.12.9999
Lot Size from
1
To Lot Size
99.999.999,000
Comment
Field Name
Description Values
Alternative BOM
1
BOM Usage
1 (Production)
Comment
Key for Task List Group Group Counter
1
Task List Type 4.
Select the two lines of your new product versions and choose versions.
to check the product
5.
If the message Task List exists and BOM exists appears for each production version, quit screen with F 3 . The indicator in the Test Status field signals when the check was successfully (green traffic light).
6.
Save your entries.
4.7.10.1.3 Rework Creating Reference Operation Set Use In this activity, you create a Reference Operation Set. Prerequisites The routing, in which you want to include the reference operation set, has already been created in the system. The work center used has already been created in the system. Procedure 7.
Access the transaction choosing the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Quality Management Quality Planning Inspection Planning Routing Routings Reference Operation Sets Create
Transaction Code
CA11
CUSTOMER 602
Localization objects - per Business Priority
8.
Make the following entries and then choose Enter: Field
9.
Description
Group
YBREW
Change Number
leave blank
Key date
Description
Values created operation routing set
Plant
3710
Group Counter
10
Usage
(Production)
1
Status
Released (general)
4
From Lot size
1
To Lot size
99.999.999
Unit of Measure
PC
Choose Operation Overview and make the following entries: Description
Values
Work center
WORK
Plant
3710
Control Key
YBP1
Description
Rework
Comment
Choose Enter. Then maintain the following field: Field
Description
Labor 12.
Comment
Group description
Field
11.
Comment
Make the following Header Details entries and then choose Enter: Field
10.
Values
Save your entries.
Result The Reference Operation Set has been created.
Values 10
Comment
4.7.11 Repetitive Manufacturing Sample Master Data [local] (BR4) 4.7.11.1
Master Data – On Premise
4.7.11.1.1 Creating Material Master - Work Scheduling View Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on work scheduling view. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General ) Immediately
Transaction code
MM01
On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field
Description
Values1
Material
SG21
Industry sector
Mechanical engineering
Material type
Semifinished Product
3.
Select Work Scheduling, choose Enter.
4.
Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field
Description
Plant 5.
Values
Comment
Comment
Plant 1 NL (1010)
On the Work Scheduling tab, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field
SG21
Comment
Production Supervisor
YBR
Scheduler responsible for a material in production activity control.
Production Scheduling Profile
YBR001 Profile you use to specify certain business transactions are carried out in parallel in a production order, trigger an automatic goods
CUSTOMER 604
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field
SG21
Comment receipt or specify an overall profile for capacity levelling.
Issue Storage Location
101A
Receiving storage location to which the receipt of the produced material is posted.
In-house production time
10
Specifies the time in workdays needed to produce the material in-house.
Under delivery tolerance limit
99
Percentage rate that specifies the percent below which the quantity posted for a goods receipt may drop below the production order quantity.
Over delivery tolerance limit
99
Percent by which the quantity that is posted to goods receipt may exceed the production order quantity.
Save your entries.
4.7.11.1.2 Changing Material Master – MRP Views Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on work scheduling view. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General ) Immediately
Transaction code
MM01
On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each of the materials and choose Enter. Field
Description Values1
Values2
Material
SG21
RM12
Industry sector
Mechanical engineering
Mechanical engineering
Material type
Semifinished Product
Raw material
Comment
3.
Select MRP1 / MRP2 / MRP3 / MRP4, choose Enter.
4.
Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field
Description
Plant 5.
Values
Comment
Plant 1 NL (3710)
On the MRP1 / 2 / 3 / 4 tab, enter the following values. MRP1 tab Field
Description Values1 (SG21)
Values2 (RM12)
Purchasing group
001
100
MRP Type
PD
PD
MRP controller
003
100
Lot size
EX
EX
Reorder Point Minimum Lot size Planning time fence MRP2 tab Field Procurement type
Description Values1 (SG21) E
Backflush Prod. stor. location
Values2 (RM12) F 1
371A
Storage loc. for EP
371B 371C
Stock det. grp SchedMargin key
001
Planned delivery time in days In-house production in days
000 5
1
Goods Receipt Processing time
1
Stock determination group Batch Entry MRP3 tab Field Strategy group
Description Values1 (SG21) 40
Values2 (RM12) 10
CUSTOMER 606
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Consumption mode
2
Fwd consumption per.
30
00
Bwd consumption per.
30
00
Availability check
Y2
Y2
Forecast Requirements Period Indicator
M
M
Total repl. lead time
2
0
MRP4 tab Field
6.
Description Values1 (SG21)
Values2 (RM12)
Selection method
2
Individual/coll.
2
Repetitive manufacturing
Set indicator
REM profile
Y002
2
Save your entries.
4.7.11.1.3 Creating BOMs Use The purpose of this activity is to create a BOM for material FG126 and SG124.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu
Logistics Production Master Data Bills of Material Bill of Material Material BOM Create
Transaction code
CS01
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field
Description
Values
Material number
SG21
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
BOM usage
Production (1)
Comment
Valid From 3.
On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field
4.
5.
e.g. 01.01.2007
Description
Values
Base quantity
1000
BOM Status
Active (1)
Comment
Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values. BOM Item Number
Item Category (Bill of Material)
BOM Component
Component quantity
Component unit of measure
010
Stock item (L)
RM12
1000
PC
Save your entries.
4.7.11.1.4 Creating Routing Use The purpose of this activity is to create routings for the finished product. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu
Logistics Production Master Data Routings Routings Standard Routings Create
Transaction code
CA21
On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field
3.
Description
Values
Material number
SG21
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Group
40003710
Key Date
Comment
Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values: Field
Description
Values
Comment
CUSTOMER 608
Localization objects - per Business Priority
4.
5.
6.
Group Counter
37
Task list description
Spring Coil
Task list usage
1 (Production)
Status
4 Released (general)
From Lot Size
1
To Lot Size
100
Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values: Field
Value
Operation/Activity Number
010
Work center
WINDING
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Control Key
YBP3
Operation short text
Winding
Base Quantity
100
Unit of Measure for Operation
PC
Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field
Values1
Setup
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
3
Machine
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
1
Labor
30
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
11
Save your entries.
4.7.11.1.5 Creating Production Version for Semi - finished Product Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. The purpose of this activity is to create a production version for the material Finished Good MTS (F126). Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu
Logistics Production Master Data Production Versions
Transaction code
C223
On the Production Version: Mass Processing screen, make the following entries: Field
3.
Description Values
Comment
Material number
SG21
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Key date for the selection of production versions
Today’s date
On the Production Versions table, enter the following values. Field
Description Values
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Material Number
SG21
Production Version
0001
Short text on the production version
Production Version 1
Valid-from date of production version
Today’s date
Comment
CUSTOMER 610
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field
4.
Description Values
Run-time end: production version
31.12.9999
Lot Size from
1
To Lot Size
100
Alternative BOM
1
BOM Usage
1 (Production)
Key for Task List Group
40003710
Group Counter
37
Task List Type
R
REM allowd
Set indicator
Prod.Line
WINDING
Comment
Enter the group number from the Routing of your finished product.
Save your entries.
4.7.12 Make-to-Order Production w/o Variant Configuration Master Data [local] (BJU) 4.7.12.1
Configuration - On Premise
4.7.12.1.1 Master Data – On Premise Enhance Materials for MTO Create Material Master - Work Scheduling View Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on work scheduling view.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General ) Immediately
Transaction Code
MM01
On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each of the materials and choose Enter. Field Name
Description Values1
Values2
Material
FG226
SG224
Industry sector
Mechanical engineering
Mechanical engineering
Material type
Finished Product
Semi-Finished Product
3.
Select Work Scheduling, choose Enter.
4.
Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field Name
Description
Plant 5.
6.
Comment
Values
Comment
Plant 1 NL (3710)
On the Work Scheduling tab, enter the following values for each material and then choose Enter. Field Name
FG226
SG224
Comment
Production supervisor
YB4
YB4
Scheduler responsible for a material in production activity control.
Production Scheduling Profile
YB0004 YB0004 Profile that you can use to specify that certain business transactions are carried out in parallel in a production order, trigger an automatic goods receipt or specify an overall profile for capacity leveling.
Issue Storage Location
101B
101A
Receiving storage location to which the receipt of the produced material is posted.
In-house production time
20
1
Specifies the time in workdays needed to produce the material in-house.
Save your entries and go Back.
CUSTOMER 612
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Result You have created the Work Scheduling view for material FG226 and SG224.
Change Material Master MRP Views for Special MTO Settings Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master MRP views for special MTO settings.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Change Immediately
Transaction Code
MM02
On the Change Material: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name
Description
Values
Material
FG226
3.
Select MRP2 and MRP3, choose Enter.
4.
Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field Name
Description
Plant 5.
Values Plant 1 (3710)
Description
In-house production
Values
Comment
5
Choose MRP3 tab, enter the following values. Field Name Planning Strategy Group
7.
Comment
On the MRP2 tab, enter the following values. Field Name
6.
Comment
Description
Values B6
Save your entries and go Back.
Result You have changed the MRP 2 and MRP 3 view for material FG226.
Comment
Create Routing Use The purpose of this activity is to create routing needed for the MTO scenario.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Routings Routings Standard Routings Create
Transaction Code
CA01
On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name
3.
Values
Comment
Material number
FG226
Plant
3710
Key Date
Group
41010002
Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name
4.
Description
Description
Values
Comment
Task list usage
1 Production
Status
4 Released (general)
Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field Name
Values1
Values2
Values3
Values4
Operation/Activity Number
010
020
030
040
Work center
ASSEMBLY
TESTING
PACK01
TESTING
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Plant 1 (3710)
Plant 1 (3710)
Plant 1 (3710)
Control Key
YBP1
YBP1
YBP1
YBP1
Operation short text
Assembly
Final Acceptance
Packaging
Posting GR (optional with SerialNo assig)
CUSTOMER 614
Localization objects - per Business Priority
5.
Field Name
Values1
Values2
Values3
Values4
Base Quantity
100
100
100
100
Unit of Measure for Operation
PC
PC
PC
PC
Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following data: Field Name
Description
Values
Setup
30
Unit of measure for Setup
MIN
Activity Type
3
Machine
200
Unit of measure for Setup
MIN
Activity Type
1
Labor
200
Unit of measure for Setup
MIN
Activity Type
11
Comment
6.
Save your entries and go back.
7.
On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name
8.
Values
Material number
SG224
Plant
Plant1 NL (3710)
Key Date
Group
41010003
Comment
Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name
9.
Description
Description
Values
Group Counter
1
Task list description
SF Subassembly
Task list usage
1
Status
4
Comment
Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number.
Field Name
10.
Values2
Comment
Operation/Activity Number
020
Work center
TESTING
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Control Key
YBP1
Operation short text
Testing
Base Quantity
100
Unit of Measure for Operation
PC
Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following. Field Name
11.
Description
Description
Values
Setup
30
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
3
Machine
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
1
Labor
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
11
Comment
Save your entries and go Back.
Result You have created the routings necessary for MTO production for material finished material FG226 and semi-finished material SG224.
CUSTOMER 616
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Create BOM Create BOM for FG226, SG224 Use The purpose of this activity is to create BOM for finished material FG226 and semifinished material SG224. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Bills of Material Bill of Material Material BOM Create
Transaction code
CS01
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name
3.
Description
Material number
SG224
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
BOM usage
Production (1)
Valid From
Comment
On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name
4.
User Action and Values
Description
User Action and Values
Base quantity
100
BOM Status
Active (1)
Comment
Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values: BOM Item Number
Item Category (Bill of Material)
BOM Component
Component quantity
Component unit of measure
010
Stock item (L)
RM124
100
PC
5.
Save your entries and go Back.
6.
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter.
Field Name
7.
Description
Material number
FG226
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
BOM usage
Production (1)
Valid From
9.
Comment
On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name
8.
User Action and Values
Description
User Action and Values
Base quantity
100
BOM Status
Active (1)
Comment
Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values: BOM Item Number
Item Category (Bill of Material)
BOM Component
Component quantity
Component unit of measure
010
Stock item (L)
SG21
100
PC
020
Stock item (L)
SG22
100
PC
030
Stock item (L)
RM122
100
PC
040
Stock item (L)
RM128
100
PC
050
Stock item (L)
RM120
100
PC
060
Stock item (L)
SG23
100
PC
070
Stock item (L)
SG25
100
PC
080
Stock item (L)
SG224
100
PC
090
Stock item (L)
RM27
100
PC
Save your entries and go Back.
Result You have created the BOM for subassembly semi-finished good SG224 and finished good FG226.
CUSTOMER 618
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Create Production Version for Finished Product Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. The purpose of this activity is to create a production version for the material Finished Good MTS (FG226). Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Production Versions
Transaction Code
C223
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter: Field Name
3.
Description Values
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Material number
FG226
Key date for the selection of production versions
Today’s Date
On the Production Versions table, enter the following values: Field Name
Description Values
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Material Number
Finished Good MTS (FG226)
Production Version
0001
Short text on the production version
Production Version 01
Valid-from date of production version
Today’s Date
Comment
Comment
Field Name
Description Values
Run-time end: production version
Comment
31.12.9999
Lot Size from
4.
To Lot Size
99999999
Alternative BOM
01
BOM Usage
1 (Production)
Key for Task List Group
410100XX
Group Counter
01
Task List Type
N
Enter the group number from the Routing of your finished product.
Save your entries.
Enhance Materials for Batch Management Change Material Master: Activate Batch Management Use The purpose of this activity is to activate batch management for finished good FG226 and raw material RM122. Prerequisites The materials FG226 and RM122 must be virgin, that means they must not have stocks and must not be used in any documents, to be able to make them relevant to batch management.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Change Immediately
Transaction Code
MM02
CUSTOMER 620
Localization objects - per Business Priority
2.
On the Change Material (Initial Screen) screen, enter finished good FG226 in Material input field and choose Select view(s).
3.
On the Select view(s) screen, select General Plant Data / Storage 1 view and choose Organizational levels.
4.
On the Organizational levels screen enter 3710 in Plant input field and choose Enter.
5.
On the Change Material FG226 (Finished Good) screen select the Batch management checkbox (checkbox must be flagged).
6.
Save your entries C t r l
7.
Repeat the steps with raw
+ S.
material RM122.
Result You have activated the batch management for finished good FG226 and raw material RM122.
Batch Management Search Strategies Conditions Batch Search Strategy for Production Order Use The purpose of this activity is to create batch search strategies for production order type YBM4 for materials FG226 and RM122. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Central functions Batch Management Batch Determination Batch Search Strategy For Production Order
Transaction Code
COB1
2.
On the Create Batch Search Strategy: Initial Screen enter YB11 in Strategy type input field and choose Enter.
3.
On the Create BP: Batch number YB11: Fast Entry screen, enter YBM4 in the Order Type input field and 3710 in the Plant input field.
4.
Make the following entries for Order Type/Plant/Component:
Material No. Changes Dialog batch Dialog Quantity OverSelection batch allowed determination UoM proposal delivery Type splits allowed FG226
99
X
X
A
1
X
O
RM122
99
X
X
A
1
X
O
5.
Choose Enter.
6.
Ignore any warning messages.
7.
Select both entries and choose Selection criteria.
8.
The batch class YB_BATCH assigned to the material and the characteristics of the class are displayed. Confirm the data by choosing Enter and Back F 3 .
9.
On the Create BP: Batch number (YB11): Fast Entry screen, select both entries again and choose Sort.
10.
On the Create BP: Batch number (YB11): Sort Rule screen, enter YB_FIFO_SORT in the Sort rule input field.
11.
Choose Enter and Back F 3 .
12.
Save your entries and go Back.
Result You have created the batch search strategies for production order type YBM4 for materials FG226 and RM122.
4.7.13 MTS Production - Process Industry Sample Master Data [local] (BJR) 4.7.13.1
Configuration – On-Premise
4.7.13.1.1 Master Data Create Material Master - Classification View Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on classification view.
CUSTOMER 622
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General ) Immediately
Transaction Code
MM01
On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field
Description Values1
Values2
Values3
Material
FG29
SG24
RM09, RM19, RM30
Industry sector
M - Mechanical engineering
M - Mechanical engineering
M - Mechanical engineering
Material type
Finished Product
Semifinished Product
Raw materials
3.
Choose Classification.
4.
Enter the following values. Field
Description
Values
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Class type
Batch (023)
5.
Choose Enter.
6.
On the Classification screen, enter the following value: Field Class number
7.
Description
Values1
Values2
Values3
YB_EXP_DATE_001
YB_BATCH
YB_BATCH
Save your entries.
Create Material Master - Work Scheduling View Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on work scheduling view. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:
2.
SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General ) Immediately
Transaction Code
MM01
On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each of the materials and choose Enter. Field
Description Values1
Material
FG29
SG24
Industry sector
M - Mechanical engineering
M - Mechanical engineering
Material type
Finished Product
Semi-finished Product
3.
Select Work Scheduling.
4.
Choose Enter.
5.
Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field
Description
Plant 6.
7.
Values2
Values Plant 1 (3710)
On the Work Scheduling tab, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field
FG29
SG24
Production Supervisor
YB2
YB2
Production Scheduling Profile
YB0002
YB0002
Underdelivery tolerance limit
99,0
99,0
Overdelivery tolerance limit
99,0
99,0
Save your entries.
Change Material Master - MRP Views Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master on MRP views.
CUSTOMER 624
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Change Immediately
Transaction Code
MM02
On the Change Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field
Values1
Values2
Values3
Values4
Material
FG29
SG24
RM30
RM09, RM19, RM15
3.
Select MRP1 / MRP2 / MRP3 / MRP4 and then choose Enter.
4.
Enter the required data and choose Continue: Field
Description
Plant 5.
Values
Comment
Plant 1 (3710)
On the MRP1 / 2 / 3 / 4 tab, enter the following values. MRP1 tab Field Purchasing group
Description Values1 Values2 Values3 Values4 blank
002
001
002 – RM09 003 – RM19 001 – RM15
MRP Type
PD
PD
VB
PD
MRP controller
001
001
001
001
Lot size
EX
EX
WB
EX
Reorder Point
200
Minimum Lot size
1.000
Planning time fence
13
12
10
10
E
F
F
MRP2 tab Field Procurement type
Description Values E
Backflush Bulk Material
X
Prod. stor. location
371A
Storage loc. for EP SchedMargin key
001
371B
371B
371B
371C
371C
371C
001
000
000
5
5
1
1
Planned delivery time in days In-house production in days
1
1
Goods Receipt Processing time Stock determination group Batch Entry MRP3 tab Field
Description Values
Tot.repl.lead time
2
2
Strategy group
40
40
Consumption mode
2
2
Fwd consumption per.
30
30
Bwd consumption per.
30
30
Availability check
Y2
Y2
Y2
Y2
Forecast Requirements Period Indicator
W
W
W
W
2
2
MRP4 tab Field
Individual/coll. 6.
Description Values
Save your entries.
Change Material Master - Plant Data/Storage 1 Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master on Plant Data/Storage 1 view. CUSTOMER 626
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Change Immediately
Transaction Code
MM02
On the Change Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field Name
Description
Material
Values1
Values2
Values3
FG29
RM09, RM19, RM30, SG24
RM15
3.
Select General Plant Data/Storage 1.
4.
Choose Enter.
5.
Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field Name
Description
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
6.
On the General Plant Data / Storage 1 tab.
7.
Enter the following values: Field Name
8.
Values
Description Values1 Values2 Values2
Batch management requirement indicator
X
X
blank
Storage conditions
10
10
10
Max. storage period
150
min. remaining shelf life
50
Period Indicator for SLED
D
D
D
Time unit
D
Total shelf life
200
Save your entries.
Create BOM – Semi-finished and finished Products Use The purpose of this activity is to create a BOM for material S24 and F29.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material → Bill of Material → Material BOM → Create
Transaction code
CS01
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter: Field Name
3.
Description
Values
Material number
SG24
Plant
Plant 1 NL(3710)
BOM usage
Production (1)
Valid From
On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name
Description
Values
Base quantity
10000
BOM Status
Active (1)
4.
Choose Item Overview F 5 .
5.
Enter the following values: BOM Item Number
Item Category (Bill of Material)
BOM Component
Component quantity
Component unit of measure
010
Stock item (L)
RM09
1
KG
020
Stock item (L)
RM19
1,2
L
030
Stock item (L)
RM30
8,5
L
6.
Select BOM Item number 030 (material RM30) and choose Item.
7.
On Status tab, Lng Text screen, remove the indicator for Costing Relevancy in Item Status section.
8.
Save your entries.
9.
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Material number
Description
Values FG29
CUSTOMER 628
Localization objects - per Business Priority
10.
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
BOM usage
Production (1)
Valid From
On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field
Description
Base quantity
10000
BOM Status
Active (1)
11.
Choose Item Overview F 5 .
12.
Enter the following values:
13.
Values
BOM Item Number
Item Category (Bill of Material)
BOM Component
Component quantity
Component unit of measure
010
Stock item (L)
RM15
1000
PC
020
Stock item (L)
SG24
15000
CCM
Save your entries.
Create Master Recipe Use The purpose of this activity is to create master recipes for the semi-finished and finished products.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Process Master Data Master Recipes Recipe and Material List Create
Transaction Code
C201
Make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field Name
Description
Recipe group Semi or finished material number
User Action and Values MR-50001
Material number
3.
Semifinished Product PI
SG24
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Key date
date master recipe is effective (typically today's date)
Profile
YPI1
Make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and values
Recipe Counter
10
Recipe Description
SG24 - Ink (Process)
Status
4
Usage
1
Planner group
1
Base quantity
10000
4.
Choose Enter.
5.
On the Recipe screen, Operations tab, make the following entries and choose Enter. Operation 0010 Field name
Description
User action and values
Operation/Activity Number
0010
Control key
YPI1
Operation short text
Operation 1
Phase Indicator Superior Operation Resource
MIXING
Base Quantity
10.000
Unit of Measure for Operation
CCM
Operation 0020 Field name
Description
User action and values
Operation/Activity Number
0020
Control key
YPI1
Operation short text
Phase 1 to Operation 1
Phase Indicator
X
CUSTOMER 630
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Superior Operation
0010
Destination
01
Resource
MIXING
Relevant for costing
X
Base Quantity
10.000
Unit of Measure for Operation
CCM
1st Std. Value
1
Unit of Measure
H
Activity Type
3
2nd Std. Value
2
Unit of Measure
H
Activity Type
11
Operation 0030 Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Operation/Activity Number
0030
Control key
YBP4
Operation short text
Operation 2
Phase Indicator Superior Operation Resource
BOTTLING
Base Quantity
10.000
Unit of Measure for Operation
CCM
Operation 0040 Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Operation/Activity Number
0040
Control key
YBP4
Operation short text
Phase 1 to Operation 2
Phase Indicator
X
Superior Operation
0030
Destination
01
Resource
BOTTLING
Relevant for costing
X
Base Quantity
10.000
Unit of Measure for Operation
CCM
1st Std. Value
0,5
Unit of Measure
H
Activity Type
3
2nd Std. Value
1
Unit of Measure
H
Activity Type
11
6.
Select operation number 0020.
7.
Choose Relationships and make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
View Successors
X
Relationship type
FS
Phase
0040
Recipe group
MR-50001
Recipe number
10 (Same as created)
8.
Go back.
9.
Choose the Materials tab, which prompts you to maintain the production version: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Production Version
0001
Description
SG24 - Ink (Process)
Lock
not locked
valid from
01.01.2007
valid to
31.12.9999
Task list type
2 Master Recipe
Group number
MR-50001
Group counter
10
Alternative BOM
1
BOM Usage
1
From lot size
1
To lot size
99999999
Receiving location
371B
CUSTOMER 632
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Issue storage location
371B
10.
Close the screen and save changes F 8 . Now, you can maintain the materials view.
11.
Select all item lines and choose Create assignment.
12.
Enter assignment
13.
Choose Save.
14.
On the Create Master Recipe: Initial Screen, create the master recipe for Finished Product PI (FG29):
15.
to op./phase 0020.
Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Recipe group
Semi or finished material number
MR-50002
Material number
Finished Product PI
FG29
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Key date
Date master recipe is effective (typically today's date)
Profile
YPI1
Make the following entries: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Recipe Counter
10
Recipe Description
FG29 - Bottled Ink (Batched-Process)
Status
4
Usage
1
Planner group
1
Base quantity
10.000
16.
Choose Enter.
17.
On the Recipe screen, Operations tab, make the following entries and choose Enter. Operation 0010 Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Operation/Activity Number
0010
Control key
YBP4
Operation short text
Final operation
Phase Indicator Superior Operation
Resource
PACKING
Base Quantity
10.000
Unit of Measure for Operation
BT
Operation 0020 Field Name
18.
Description
User Action and Values
Operation/Activity Number
0020
Control key
YBP4
Operation short text
Final operation - phase
Phase Indicator
X
Superior Operation
0010
Destination
01
Resource
PACKING
Relevant for costing
X
Base Quantity
10.000
Unit of Measure for Operation
BT
1st Std. Value
2
Unit of Measure
H
Activity Type
3
2nd Std. Value
2
Unit of Measure
H
Activity Type
11
Choose the Materials tab, which prompts you to maintain the production version: Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
Production Version
0001
Description
FG29 - Bottled Ink (Batched-Process)
Lock
not locked
valid from
01.01.2007
valid to
31.12.9999
Task list type
2 Master Recipe
Group number
MR-50002
Group counter
10
Alternative BOM
1
CUSTOMER 634
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description
User Action and Values
BOM Usage
1
From lot size
1
To lot size
99999999
Receiving location
371B
Issue storage location
371A
19.
Close screen and save changes F 8 . You can now maintain the materials view.
20.
Select all item lines, then choose Create assignment.
21.
Enter assignment
22.
Choose Save.
to op./phase 0020.
Result The Master Recipes are created.
Maintain and Check Production Versions Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. Within master recipe maintenance, you are automatically prompted to create the production version when accessing the material view. Only when you use alternative BOMs are you allowed to create additional production versions or to assign the alternative BOM to the same master recipe. Within this standard scenario, additional production version maintenance is not required.
Create Batch Search Strategies Create Batch Search Strategy for Process Order – Expiration Date Use The purpose of this activity is to set the search strategy for process order.
Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Central functions Batch Management Batch Determination Batch Search Strategy For Production Order
Transaction Code
COB1
2.
On the Create Batch Search Strategy: Initial Screen, enter YB12 in the Strategy type input field.
3.
Choose Enter.
4.
On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB12): Fast Entry screen, enter the following values: Field Name
Description
Values
Order Type
YBM2
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Material
FG29
5.
Choose Enter.
6.
Make the following entries for Order Type/Plant/Component: Material No. Changes Dialog batch Dialog Quantity Overdelivery batch allowed determination UoM proposal allowed splits FG29
99
X
X
A
1
X
7.
Choose Enter.
8.
On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB12): Fast Entry screen, select the first line and choose Selection criteria.
9.
On the Create BP: Classification screen, enter the following values: Field Name
Description Values
Comment
Characteristic Description
Remaining shelf life for batch
Value
> 300
10.
Choose Back F 3 .
11.
On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB12): Fast Entry screen, choose Sort.
12.
On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB12): Sort Rule screen, enter the following values:
CUSTOMER 636
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field name
Description Values
Sort rule 13.
Comment
YB_EXP_DATE_SORT
Sorting rule expiration date
Choose Save C t r l + S .
Result The search strategy YB12 for Process Manufacturing has been created.
Create Batch Search Strategy for Process Order – FIFO Use The purpose of this activity is to set the search strategy for process order. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Central functions Batch Management Batch Determination Batch Search Strategy For Production Order
Transaction Code
COB1
2.
On the Create Batch Search Strategy: Initial Screen, enter YB11 in the Strategy type input field.
3.
Choose Enter.
4.
On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB11): Fast Entry screen, enter the following values: Field Name
Description
Values
Comment
Order Type
YBM2
Plant
Plant 1 NL (3710)
Material
SG24
5.
Choose Enter.
6.
Make the following entries for Order Type/Plant/Component: Materia l
No. batc h
Change Dialog batch s determinatio allowed n
Dialo g UoM
Sel. Typ e
Quantit y proposa l
Overdeliver y allowed
split s SG24
99
X
X
A
O
1
X
7.
Choose Enter.
8.
On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB11): Fast Entry screen, choose Sort.
9.
On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB11): Sort Rule screen, enter the following value: Field
Description
Sort rule
Values
Comment
YB_FIFO_SORT
Sorting rule for batches FIFO
10.
Choose Save C t r l + S .
11.
Repeat these steps for each additional material: R09, R19, R30.
Result The search strategy YB11 for Process Manufacturing has been created.
4.7.14 MTS Production - Discrete Industry Sample Master Data [local] (BJL) 4.7.14.1
Master Data –OP
4.7.14.1.1 Create Material Master - Work Scheduling View Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on work scheduling view. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General ) Immediately
Transaction Code
MM01
On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each of the materials and choose Enter. CUSTOMER
638
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description Values1
Values2
Material
FG126
SG124
Industry sector
Mechanical engineering
Mechanical engineering
Material type
Finished Product
Semi-Finished Product
3.
Select Work Scheduling, choose Enter.
4.
Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field Name
Description
Plant 5.
6.
Values
Comment
Comment
Plant 1 (3710)
On the Work Scheduling tab, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field Name
FG126
SG124
Comment
Production supervisor
YB1
YB1
Scheduler responsible for a material in production activity control.
Production Scheduling Profile
YB0001
YB0001
Profile you use to specify that certain business transactions are carried out in parallel in a production order, trigger an automatic goods receipt or specify an overall profile for capacity leveling.
Issue Storage Location
371A
371B
Receiving storage location to which the receipt of the produced material is posted.
In-house production time
any value
any value
Specifies the time in workdays needed to produce the material in-house. The in-house production time is maintained on MRP view
Save your entries.
4.7.14.1.2 Change Material Master – General Plant Data/Storage 1 Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master and assign the batch management flag and the serial number profile on General Plant Data / Storage view.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Materials Management Material Master Material Create (General ) Immediately
Transaction Code
MM02
On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field Name
Description
Material
Values1
Values2
FG126
RM122
Comment
3.
Select General Plant Data / Storage 1 and General Data / Storage 2, choose Enter.
4.
Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field Name
Description
Plant 5.
Values
Comment
Plant 1 (3710)
On the General Plant Data / Storage 1 tab, enter the following values: Field Name
Description Values Comment
Batch management requirement indicator
Specifies whether the material is managed in batches.
4.7.14.1.3 Create Routing - Finished- and Semi Finished Product Use The purpose of this activity is to create routings for the finished product. Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Routings Routings Standard Routings Create
Transaction Code
CA01
On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name Material number
Description
Values
Comment
FG126
CUSTOMER 640
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Group
4371000
Key Date
Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name
4.
5.
Description
Values
Comment
Group Counter
1
Task list description
Packaging Line 1
Task list usage
Production (1)
Status
Released (general)
From Lot Size
1
To Lot Size
100
Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field Name
Values1
Values2
Values3
Values4
Operation/Activity Number
010
020
030
040
Work center
ASSEMBLY
TESTING
PACK01
TESTING
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Plant 1 (3710)
Plant 1 (3710)
Plant 1 (3710)
Control Key
YBP1
YBP1
YBP1
YBP1
Operation short text
Assembly
Final Acceptance
Packaging
Posting GR
Base Quantity
100
100
100
100
Unit of Measure for Operation
PC
PC
PC
PC
Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field
Values1
Values2
Values3
Values4
Setup
30
30
30
30
Unit of measure for Setup
min
min
min
Min
Activity Type
3
3
3
3
Machine
10
10
10
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
min
min
min
Activity Type
1
1
1
1
Labor
10
10
10
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
min
min
min
Activity Type
11
11
11
11
6.
Save your entries.
7.
On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name
8.
Values
Comment
Material number
FG126
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Group
4371000
Key Date
Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name
9.
Description
Description
Values
Comment
Group Counter
2
Task list description
Packaging Line 2 (manual)
Task list usage
1
Status
4
From Lot Size
101
To Lot Size
99.999.999
Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field Name
Values1
Values2
Values3
Values4
Operation/Activity Number
010
020
030
040
Work center
ASSEMBLY
TESTING
PACK02
TESTING
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Plant 1 (3710)
Plant 1 (3710)
Plant 1 (3710)
Control Key
YBP1
YBP1
YBP1
YBP1
Operation short text
Assembly
Final Acceptance
Manual Packaging
Posting GR (
Base Quantity
100
100
100
100
Unit of Measure for Operation
PC
PC
PC
PC
CUSTOMER 642
Localization objects - per Business Priority
10.
Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field
Values1
Values2
Values3
Values4
Setup
30
30
30
30
Unit of measure for Setup
min
min
min
min
Activity Type
3
3
3
3
Machine
10
10
10
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
min
min
min
Activity Type
1
1
1
1
Labor
10
10
10
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
min
min
min
Activity Type
11
11
11
11
11.
Save your entries.
12.
On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name
13.
Values
Material number
SG124
Plant
Plant1 (3710)
Key Date
Comment
Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name
14.
Description
Description
Values
Group Counter
1
Task list description
SF Subassembly
Task list usage
1
Status
4
Comment
Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field Name
Values1
Values2
Operation/Activity Number
010
020
Work center
TECHNIC
TESTING
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Plant 1 (3710)
Control Key
YBP1
YBP1
Operation short text
Mechanical Processing
QM Check
15.
Base Quantity
100
100
Unit of Measure for Operation
PC
PC
Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following: Field Name
16.
Description
Values
Setup
30
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
3
Machine
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
1
Labor
10
Unit of measure for Setup
min
Activity Type
11
Comment
Save your entries.
4.7.14.1.4 Create BOMs - Finished- and Semi Finished Products Use The purpose of this activity is to create a BOM for materials FG126 and SG124.
Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Bills of Material Bill of Material Material BOM Create
Transaction Code
CS01
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name
Description
Values
Material number
FG126
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Comment
CUSTOMER 644
Localization objects - per Business Priority
3.
BOM usage
Production (1)
Valid From
On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name
4.
e.g. 01.01.2007
Description
Values
Base quantity
100
BOM Status
Active (1)
Comment
Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values: BOM Item Number
Item Category (Bill of Material)
BOM Component
Component quantity
Component unit of measure
010
Stock item (L)
SG21
100
PC
020
Stock item (L)
SG22
100
PC
030
Stock item (L)
RM122
100
PC
040
Stock item (L)
RM128
100
PC
050
Stock item (L)
RM120
100
PC
060
Stock item (L)
SG23
100
PC
070
Stock item (L)
SG25
100
PC
080
Stock item (L)
SG124
100
PC
090
Stock item (L)
RM20
100
PC
100
Stock item (L)
RM27
100
PC
5.
Save your entries.
6.
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name
7.
Description
Values
Material number
SG124
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
BOM usage
Production (1)
Valid From
Comment
e.g. 01.01.2007
On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name Base quantity
Description
Values 100
Comment
Field Name
Description
BOM Status 8.
Comment
Active (1)
Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values: Field Name
9.
Values
Description
Values
Comment
BOM Item Number
010
Item Category (Bill of Material)
Stock item (L)
BOM Component
RM124
Component quantity
100
Component unit of measure
PC
Save your entries.
4.7.14.1.5 Create Production Version for Finished Product Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. The purpose of this activity is to create a production version for the material Finished Good MTS (FG126). Procedure 1.
2.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Production Master Data Production Versions
Transaction Code
C223
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name
3.
Description Values
Comment
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Material number
FG126
Key date for the selection of production versions
Today’s Date
On the Production Versions table, enter the following values: CUSTOMER
646
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
4.
Description Values
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Material Number
Finished Good MTS (FG126)
Production Version
0001
Short text on the production version
Production Version 1
Valid-from date of production version
Today’s Date
Run-time end: production version
31.12.9999
Lot Size from
1
To Lot Size
100
Alternative BOM
1
BOM Usage
1 (Production)
Key for Task List Group
43710000
Group Counter
1
Task List Type
N
Comment
Enter the group number from the Routing of your finished product.
On the next row, enter the following values. Field Name
Description Values
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Material Number
FG126
Production Version
0002
Short text on the production version
Production Version 2
Valid-from date of production version
Today’s Date
Comment
Run-time end: production version
31.12.9999
Lot Size from
101
To Lot Size
99.999.999
Alternative BOM
1
BOM Usage
1 (Production)
Key for Task List Group
43710000
Group Counter
2
Task List Type
N
Enter the group number from the Routing of your finished product.
5.
Select the two lines of your new product versions and choose product versions.
to review the
6.
If message Task List exists and BOM exists appears for each production version, quit screen with F 3 . The indicator in the field Test Status signals if the check was successfully (green traffic light).
7.
Save your entries.
8.
On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name
9.
Description Values
Comment
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Material number
SG24
Key date for the selection of production versions
Today’s Date
On the Production Versions table, enter the following values: Field Name
Description Values
Plant
Plant 1 (3710)
Material Number
SG
Production Version
0001
Short text on the production version
Production Version 1
Comment
CUSTOMER 648
Localization objects - per Business Priority
Field Name
Description Values
Valid-from date of production version
Today’s Date
Run-time end: production version
31.12.9999
Lot Size from
1
To Lot Size
100
Alternative BOM
1
BOM Usage
1 (Production)
Key for Task List Group
43710001
Group Counter
1
Task List Type
N
Comment
Enter the group number from the Routing of Material SG124
10.
Select the two lines of your new product versions and choose product versions.
to review the
11.
If message Task List exists and BOM exists appears for each production version, quit screen with F 3 . The indicator in the field Test Status signals if the check was successfully (green traffic light).
12.
Save your entries.
4.7.14.1.6 Create Batch Search Strategy for Production Order Use The purpose of this activity is to create batch search strategies for production order for materials FG126 and RM122. Procedure 1.
Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu
Logistics Central functions Batch Management Batch Determination Batch Search Strategy For Production Order
Transaction Code
COB1
2.
On the Create Batch Search Strategy: Initial Screen enter YB11 in Strategy type input field and choose Enter.
3.
On the Create FIFO (YB11): Fast Entry screen, enter YBM1 in Order Type input field and 1000 in Plant input field.
4.
Make the following entries for Order Type/Plant/Component: Material No. Changes Dialog batch Dialog Quantity Overdelivery batch allowed determination UoM proposal allowed splits FG126
99
A
1
RM122
99
A
1
5.
Choose Enter.
6.
Select the first entered line and choose Selection criteria.
7.
The batch class YB_BATCH assigned to the material and the characteristics of the class are displayed. Confirm the data by choosing Enter and Back F 3 .
8.
On the Create FIFO (YB11): Fast Entry screen, select the first entered line again and choose Sort.
9.
On the Create FIFO (YB11): Sort Rule screen, enter YB_FIFO_SORT in Sort rule input field.
10.
Choose Enter and Back F 3 .
11.
Save your entries.
CUSTOMER 650
Localization objects - per Business Priority
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. Please see http://global.sap.com/corporateen/legal/copyright/index.epx#trademark for additional trademark information and notices. Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary. These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP SE or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE’s or its affiliated companies’ strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time for any reason without notice. The information in this document is not a commitment, promise, or legal obligation to deliver any material, code, or functionality. All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak only as of their dates, and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions.
CUSTOMER 652
Localization objects - per Business Priority
